Prospectus
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
$950,000,000
Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC
Issuer
Barclays Bank PLC
Transferor, Servicer and Trust Cash Manager
$900,000,000 Class A Floating Rate Asset-Backed Notes
$50,000,000 Class B Floating Rate Asset-Backed Notes
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Price to Public per Underwriting Discount Proceeds To Issuer
Class Interest Rate Note per Note per Note
------------------------------- --------------------- --------------------- --------------------- ---------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
A One-month LIBOR plus 100.00% 0.20% $998.00
0.18% annually
B One-month LIBOR plus 100.00% 0.25% $997.50
0.43% annually
</TABLE>
* The ultimate source of payment on the offered notes will be collections
on consumer credit and charge card accounts of Barclaycard originated in
the United Kingdom.
* The transaction documents, other than the depository agreement, will be
governed by the laws of England and Wales. The depository agreement will
be governed by New York law.
* A separate currency swap for each class of the offered notes will be used
to convert the sterling amounts received from the medium term notes into
U.S. dollar amounts for payment on the offered notes.
Please consider carefully the risk factors beginning on page 7 in this
prospectus.
A note is not a deposit and neither the notes nor the underlying receivables
are insured or guaranteed by any United Kingdom or United States governmental
agency.
The notes offered in this prospectus will be obligations of the issuer only.
The issuer will only have a limited pool of assets to satisfy its obligations
on the notes. The notes will not be obligations of Barclays Bank PLC or any of
its affiliates.
The total price to the public is $950,000, the total amount of the underwriting
discount is $1,925,000, and the total amount of proceeds plus accrued interest
and before deduction of expenses is $948,075,000.
We have applied to have the offered notes listed on the London Stock Exchange.
Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities
commission has approved or disapproved the offered notes or determined that
this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is
a criminal offence.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Underwriters of the Class A Notes
Barclays Capital
Credit Suisse First Boston Deutsche Banc Alex. Brown
Morgan Stanley Dean Witter Salomon Smith Barney
Underwriter of the Class B Notes
Barclays Capital
9 November, 1999
<PAGE>
Important Notice About Information Presented In This Prospectus
We include cross-references to captions in this prospectus where you can
find further related discussions. The following table of contents provides the
pages on which these captions are located.
Table Of Contents
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Prospectus Summary.................................................. 1
Series Structure................................................... 1
Program Structural Summary......................................... 1
Structural Diagram of Barclaycard Securitisation Program........... 2
The Issuer......................................................... 3
The Note Trustee, Principal Paying Agent and Agent Bank............ 3
The Notes.......................................................... 3
The Closing Date................................................... 3
The MTN Issuer and Initial Investor Beneficiary.................... 3
The Medium Term Notes.............................................. 3
The Security Trustee............................................... 4
The Receivables.................................................... 4
The Initial Transferor, Servicer, Trust Cash Manager and Excess
Interest Beneficiary .............................................. 4
The Receivables Trustee............................................ 4
The Receivables Trust.............................................. 4
The Investor Certificates.......................................... 4
The Swap Counterparty.............................................. 5
The Swap Agreements................................................ 5
Optional Early Redemption.......................................... 5
Notices............................................................ 5
United Kingdom Tax Status.......................................... 5
United States Federal Income Tax Status............................ 6
ERISA Considerations for Investors................................. 6
Risk Factors........................................................ 7
Introduction........................................................ 19
U.S. Dollar Presentation............................................ 19
Sterling/Dollar Exchange Rate History.............................. 19
The Issuer.......................................................... 19
Directors and Secretary............................................ 20
Management's Discussion And Analysis Of Financial Condition........ 20
Sources of Capital and Liquidity.................................. 20
Results of Operations............................................. 20
Use Of Proceeds.................................................... 20
Expenses Loan Agreement............................................ 21
The MTN Issuer...................................................... 21
Directors and Secretary............................................ 21
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition........ 21
Sources of Capital and Liquidity.................................. 21
Results of Operations............................................. 22
The Receivables Trustee............................................. 22
Management and Activities.......................................... 22
Barclays Bank PLC................................................... 23
Business........................................................... 23
Year 2000 Readiness Disclosure..................................... 24
Credit Card Usage in the United Kingdom............................. 25
Barclaycard and the Barclaycard Card Portfolio...................... 25
General............................................................ 25
Description of Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd............ 26
Acquisition and Use of Card Accounts............................... 26
Description of Processing.......................................... 27
Billing and Payment................................................ 27
Delinquency and Loss Experience.................................... 28
Delinquency Experience -- Bank Portfolio.......................... 29
Loss Experience -- Bank Portfolio................................. 30
Provision for Bad and Doubtful Debt -- Bank Portfolio............. 30
</TABLE>
(i)
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
The Receivables..................................................... 31
Assignment of Receivables to the Receivables Trustee............... 31
Redesignation and Removal of Accounts.............................. 33
Discount Option Receivables........................................ 33
Special Fees....................................................... 34
Interchange........................................................ 34
Annual Fees........................................................ 34
Reductions in Receivables, Early Collections and Credit Adjustments 34
Representations.................................................... 35
Amendments to Card Agreement and Card Guidelines................... 37
Summary of Securitised Portfolio as of 30 September, 1999.......... 37
Composition by Account Balance -- Securitised Portfolio........... 37
Composition by Credit Limit -- Securitised Portfolio.............. 37
Composition by Account Age -- Securitised Portfolio............... 38
Geographic Distribution of Accounts -- Securitised Portfolio...... 38
Composition by Product Line -- Securitised Portfolio.............. 38
Maturity Assumptions................................................ 39
Cardholder Monthly Payment Rates -- Bank Portfolio................. 39
Receivables Yield Considerations.................................... 40
Yield Experience -- Bank Portfolio................................ 41
The Receivables Trust............................................... 42
General Legal Structure............................................ 42
The Receivables Trust's Property................................... 44
General Entitlement of Beneficiaries to Trust Property............. 44
Allocation and Application of Collections.......................... 45
Acquiring Additional Entitlements to Trust Property and Payments for
Receivables ....................................................... 47
Non-Petition Undertaking of Beneficiaries.......................... 48
Trust Pay Out Events............................................... 48
Termination of the Receivables Trust............................... 49
Amendments to the Declaration of Trust and Trust Cash Management
Agreement ......................................................... 49
Disposals.......................................................... 49
Trustee Payment Amount............................................. 50
Servicing of Receivables and Trust Cash Management.................. 50
General -- Servicing............................................... 50
General -- Trust Cash Management................................... 51
Servicing and Trust Cash Manager Compensation...................... 52
Termination of Appointment of Servicer............................. 53
Termination of Appointment of Trust Cash Manager................... 54
Series 99-1......................................................... 56
General............................................................ 56
Beneficial Entitlement of the MTN Issuer to Trust Property......... 57
Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of Finance Charge
Collections to the MTN Issuer ..................................... 58
Class A Investor Interest.......................................... 59
Class B Investor Interest.......................................... 61
Class C Investor Interest.......................................... 61
Revolving Period................................................... 62
Controlled Accumulation Period..................................... 63
Regulated Amortisation Period...................................... 63
Rapid Amortisation Period.......................................... 64
Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of Principal Collections to
the MTN Issuer .................................................... 64
Postponement of Controlled Accumulation Period..................... 68
Unavailable Principal Collections.................................. 68
Shared Principal Collections....................................... 69
Defaulted Receivables; Investor Charge-Offs........................ 69
Excess Spread...................................................... 71
Extra Amount....................................................... 72
Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount................................ 72
Principal Funding Account.......................................... 73
Reserve Account.................................................... 73
Distribution Ledgers............................................... 74
Trustee Payment Amount............................................. 74
</TABLE>
(ii)
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Qualified Institutions............................................. 75
Series 99-1 Pay Out Events......................................... 75
Your Payment Flows................................................. 77
The Trust Deed...................................................... 79
The Notes And The Global Notes...................................... 80
Terms and Conditions of the Notes................................... 84
The Swap Agreements................................................. 94
General............................................................ 95
Common Provisions of the Swap Agreements........................... 96
Termination of the Swap Agreements................................ 96
Taxation.......................................................... 97
The Medium Term Notes............................................... 98
Material Legal Aspects of the Receivables........................... 100
Consumer Credit Act 1974........................................... 100
Enforcement of improperly executed or modified card agreements..... 100
Liability for supplier's misrepresentation or breach of contract... 100
Transfer of Benefit of Receivables................................. 101
United Kingdom Taxation Treatment Of The Notes...................... 102
Overview........................................................... 102
Taxation of US Residents........................................... 102
Taxation of Interest Paid.......................................... 103
Proposed European Directive on the Taxation of Savings............. 104
Ownership and Disposal, Including Redemption, of the Notes by United
Kingdom Tax Payers ................................................ 104
United Kingdom Inheritance Tax..................................... 105
Stamp Duty and Stamp Duty Reserve Tax.............................. 105
Taxation of the MTN Issuer and the Issuer.......................... 105
Taxation of the Receivables Trustee................................ 105
Material United States Federal Income Tax Consequences.............. 106
Overview........................................................... 106
Tax Status of the Receivables Trust, the MTN Issuer and the Issuer. 106
United States Holders.............................................. 107
Interest Payments and Distributions................................ 108
Sourcing.......................................................... 108
Disposition or Retirement of Investment............................ 108
Sourcing.......................................................... 108
Investment in a Passive Foreign Investment Company................. 109
Sourcing.......................................................... 110
Controlled Foreign Corporation Status.............................. 110
Non-United States Holders.......................................... 110
Backup Withholding and Information Reporting....................... 110
ERISA Considerations................................................ 111
General............................................................ 111
Equity Treatment................................................... 111
Further Considerations............................................. 112
Enforcement of Foreign Judgements in England And Wales.............. 113
Underwriting........................................................ 113
United Kingdom..................................................... 114
General............................................................ 115
Ratings of the Offered Notes........................................ 115
Experts............................................................. 116
Legal Matters....................................................... 117
Reports to Noteholders.............................................. 117
Where You Can Find More Information................................. 117
Listing and General Information..................................... 117
Litigation and Change in Circumstances............................. 117
Documents Available for Inspection................................. 118
Index of Terms for Prospectus....................................... 120
Index of Appendices................................................. 122
Appendix A Report of Independent Accountants for Gracechurch Card
Funding (No. 1) PLC ............................................... A1
Appendix B Balance Sheet of Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC.. B1
Appendix C Notes to Financial Statement........................... C1
Appendix D Report of Independent Accountants for Barclaycard
Funding PLC ....................................................... D1
Appendix E Balance Sheet of Barclaycard Funding PLC............... E1
Appendix F Notes to Financial Statement........................... F1
</TABLE>
(iii)
<PAGE>
Prospectus Summary
The following is a brief overview of the key aspects of the class A notes
and the class B notes, which we refer to as the offered notes. You need to read
all of this prospectus to fully understand the terms of the offered notes.
Series Structure
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Class of Notes Initial Principal Balance Sterling Equivalent % of Total
- ------------------------------- ----------------------------- ----------------------------- -----------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Class A*....................... $900,000,000 L546,345,000* 90%
Class B*....................... $50,000,000 L30,352,500* 5%
Class C*....................... $50,000,000 L30,352,500* 5%
----------------------------- ----------------------------- -----------------------------
Total*......................... $1,000,000,000 L607,050,000* 100%
</TABLE>
* sterling equivalent obtained by converting dollars to sterling at the
exchange rate of L0.60705 to $1.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Class A Notes Class B Notes
<S> <C> <C>
Anticipated Ratings:..... "AAA" or its equivalent "A" or its equivalent
from four from four
internationally internationally
recognised rating recognised
agencies. rating agencies.
Credit Enhancement:...... Subordination of the
class B notes and class Subordination of the
C notes. class C notes.
Interest Rate:........... One-month LIBOR, plus One-month LIBOR, plus
0.18 per cent. annually. 0.43 per cent. annually.
Interest Accrual Method:. Actual/360. Actual/360.
Interest Payment Dates:.. The 15th day of each The 15th day of each
calendar month. calendar month.
First Interest Payment January 2000 interest January 2000 interest
Date: .................. payment date. payment date.
Scheduled Redemption November 2002 interest November 2002 interest
Date: .................. payment date. payment date.
Legal Final Redemption November 2004 interest November 2004 interest
Date: .................. payment date. payment date.
Clearance/Settlement:.... DTC/Euroclear/ DTC/Euroclear/
Cedelbank. Cedelbank.
Minimum Denomination:.... $1,000. $1,000.
</TABLE>
Program Structural Summary
The following is a brief summary description of the Barclaycard
securitisation program, of which your notes will form a part.
Barclaycard, a division of Barclays Bank PLC, will assign all of its
present and future beneficial interest in receivables in designated revolving
credit and charge card accounts originated by Barclaycard in the United
Kingdom. Only the receivables will be assigned. The accounts will be retained
by Barclaycard.
The receivables will be assigned to a special purpose company,
incorporated in Jersey, Channel Islands, acting as receivables trustee. The
receivables trustee will hold the receivables on trust for Barclaycard, as
transferor beneficiary and excess interest beneficiary, and a special purpose
subsidiary of Barclays called the MTN issuer, as investor beneficiary.
The receivables trustee may issue multiple series of investor certificates
to the MTN issuer. Each series of investor certificates will represent an
undivided beneficial interest in the receivables trust. They will entitle the
MTN issuer to payments of interest and principal payable from collections on
the receivables.
The MTN issuer will finance its acquisition of an undivided beneficial
interest in the receivables trust, evidenced by the issuance of each series of
investor certificates, by issuing series of limited recourse medium term notes
to individual issuers and credit enhancement providers, if any. The limited
recourse nature of the medium term notes will ensure that the MTN issuer is
only ever liable under a series of medium term notes for payments of principal
and interest equal to what is paid under the corresponding series of investor
certificates.
The issuers, in turn, will finance their purchases of each series of
medium term notes by issuing series of notes to investors. Your series of
notes, series 99-1, will be the first series of notes issued under this
program.
1
<PAGE>
Structural Diagram of Barclays Bank PLC Securitisation Program
[GRAPHIC OMITTED]
2
<PAGE>
The Issuer
Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC is a public limited company
incorporated in England and Wales. Its registered office is at 200 Aldersgate
Street, London EC1A 4JJ. Its telephone number is 44-171-600-1000.
The issuer is a newly created special purpose company. The purpose of the
issuer is to issue the notes which represent its asset-backed debt obligations.
The issuer will not engage in any unrelated activities.
The Note Trustee, Principal Paying Agent and Agent Bank
The note trustee, principal paying agent and agent bank is The Bank of New
York, London Branch. The note trustee will act as trustee for the noteholders
under the trust deed. The principal paying agent will make payments on the
notes. The agent bank will calculate the interest rate on the notes. The Bank
of New York, London Branch's address is One Canada Square, London E14 5AL,
United Kingdom. Its telephone number is 44-171-570-1784.
The Notes
In this document, we are offering two classes of notes:
* floating rate class A notes with an initial principal balance of
$900,000,000.
* floating rate class B notes with an initial principal balance of
$50,000,000.
The class A notes and the class B notes represent asset-backed debt
obligations of the issuer. The class A notes are secured by payments received
by the issuer from the class A MTN and payments received from the swap
counterparty. The class B notes are secured by payments received by the issuer
from the class B MTN and payments received from the swap counterparty. The
issuer's ability to make these payments will ultimately be dependent upon
collections Barclaycard receives on the receivables.
We will issue the notes under the trust deed. The notes will also be
subject to a paying agency and agent bank agreement and a depository agreement.
The security for the notes will be created under a deed of charge between the
issuer and the note trustee. The terms of the notes will be contained in the
trust deed, the paying agency and agent bank agreement, the depository
agreement and the deed of charge.
On the date the offered notes are issued, the floating rate class C notes
with an initial principal balance of $50,000,000 will be offered in
transactions exempt from the registration requirements under the Securities
Act. The class C notes are not being offered by this prospectus. The class C
notes will also represent asset-backed debt obligations of the issuer secured
by payments received by the issuer from the class C MTN and payments received
from the swap counterparty.
The class B notes will be subordinated to the class A notes. The class C
notes will be subordinated to both the class A notes and the class B notes.
If there is an event of default under the notes, the note trustee, on your
behalf, can appoint a receiver of the issuer who would continue to collect
amounts paid by the MTN issuer under the medium term notes. The note trustee
would also be able to sell the medium term notes. In addition, the note trustee
may give an enforcement notice to the issuer declaring the notes to be
immediately due and payable. A declaration that the notes have become
immediately due and payable will not, of itself, accelerate the timing or
amount of redemption of the notes.
The Closing Date
We will issue the notes on or about 23 November, 1999.
The MTN Issuer and Initial Investor Beneficiary
The MTN issuer is Barclaycard Funding PLC, a public limited company
incorporated in England and Wales. Its registered office is located at 54
Lombard Street, London EC3P 3AH. The MTN issuer is a subsidiary of Barclays.
The MTN issuer was established to issue secured limited recourse medium
term notes under a programme.
The Medium Term Notes
On the closing date, the MTN issuer will sell to the issuer three limited
recourse medium term notes issued as a series under its medium term note
programme. These limited recourse medium term notes will be called the class A
MTN, the class B MTN and the class C MTN. The MTN issuer has made an
application to the London Stock Exchange for the medium term notes to be
admitted to the official list of the London Stock Exchange.
The issuer will make payments of interest and principal on the class A
notes, the class B notes and the class C notes from respective payments of
interest and principal made by the MTN issuer on the class A MTN, the class B
MTN and the class C MTN and from amounts paid by the swap counterparty.
If an event of default occurs under the medium term notes, the security
trustee, on behalf of the issuer as holder of the medium term notes, can
appoint a receiver of the MTN issuer who would continue to collect amounts paid
on the investor certificates. The security trustee would also be able to sell
the investor certificates. In addition, the security trustee may give an
enforcement notice to the MTN issuer declaring the medium term notes to be
immediately due and payable. A declaration that
3
<PAGE>
the medium term notes have become immediately due and payable will not, of
itself, accelerate the timing or amount of redemption of the medium term notes.
The Security Trustee
The security trustee is The Bank of New York, London Branch. The security
trustee will act as trustee for the holder of the medium term notes under the
security trust and cash management deed.
The Receivables
The receivables consist of amounts charged by cardholders to designated
MasterCard* and VISA* revolving credit and charge card accounts of Barclaycard
originated or acquired in the United Kingdom for the acquisition of
merchandise, services and cash advances. The receivables also include the
periodic finance charges and fees charged to the credit and charge card
accounts and interchange.
The Initial Transferor, Servicer, Trust Cash Manager and Excess Interest
Beneficiary
Barclays Bank PLC originates the credit and charge card receivables
through its business unit, Barclaycard. Barclaycard's principal place of
business is located at 1234 Pavilion Drive, Northampton NN4 7SG, United
Kingdom. Barclaycard will transfer the credit and charge card receivables to
the receivables trustee.
Barclaycard will be the initial transferor of the receivables trust.
Barclaycard will service the receivables in the receivables trust.
Barclaycard may not resign as servicer, but may be terminated and a successor
servicer may be appointed in its place if a servicer default occurs. In the
future, additional transferors, if any, may act as co-servicers.
Barclaycard will also be appointed as the initial trust cash manager to
manage the bank accounts of the receivables trustee for each series of investor
certificates.
Barclaycard will be the excess interest beneficiary of the receivables
trust.
Barclays Bank PLC is a bank incorporated in England and Wales. Its head
office is located at 54 Lombard Street, London EC3P 3AH, United Kingdom. It is
regulated in the United Kingdom by the Financial Services Authority. Its
telephone number is 44-207-699-5000.
* MasterCard and VISA are U.S. federally registered servicemarks of MasterCard
International Inc. and VISA U.S.A., Inc. and are registered trademarks in the
United Kingdom of MasterCard International Inc. and VISA International Service
Association.
The Receivables Trustee
Gracechurch Receivables Trustee Limited, the receivables trustee, is a
private limited liability company incorporated under the laws of Jersey,
Channel Islands on 29 September, 1999. Its registered office is located at
Normandy House, Grenville Street, St Helier, Jersey JE2 4UF. The shares of the
receivables trustee are held by a professional trust company -- not affiliated
with Barclays -- on trust for charitable purposes. This means that any profits
received by the receivables trustee, after all amounts have been paid on the
investor certificates and in meeting the costs and expenses of the receivables
trustee, will be paid to charities in Jersey selected at the discretion of the
professional trust company. The payments on your notes will not be affected by
this arrangement. The receivables trustee will act as trustee of the
receivables trust.
The Receivables Trust
The receivables trust was established on 1 November, 1999 under the terms
of a declaration of trust under which Barclays and the MTN issuer have an
undivided interest in the trust property equal to the proportion of their
contributions to the receivables trust. The receivables trust will be amended
and restated by a declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement.
The receivables trustee has been established for the purpose of acquiring
credit and charge card receivables of Barclaycard and any additional
transferors and to hold those receivables and the collections from them on
trust for the beneficiaries under the terms of the receivables trust set out in
the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement and to make
payments on the investor certificates. The receivables trustee may issue other
series of investor certificates, representing undivided beneficial interests in
the receivables trust, from time to time. The receivables trustee may not
engage in any unrelated activities.
The Investor Certificates
The MTN issuer will pay the proceeds of the medium term notes to the
receivables trustee to acquire, for each class of medium term notes, separate,
undivided beneficial interests in the receivables trust. These undivided
beneficial interests will be the first series of the receivables trust and will
be represented by a class A investor certificate, a class B investor
certificate and a class C investor certificate. The receivables trustee may
issue multiple series of investor certificates from time to time.
The MTN issuer will make payments of principal and interest on the class A
MTN, the class B MTN and the class C MTN from respective payments of principal
and interest made on the class A investor certificate, the class B investor
certificate and the class C investor certificate.
4
<PAGE>
The receivables trustee will be entitled to use the proceeds of the
investor certificates paid to it by the MTN issuer -- together with monies paid
to it by the other beneficiaries of the trust -- to accept an offer by the
transferor to assign to the receivables trustee the present and future
receivables generated by the designated credit and charge card accounts of the
transferor.
The investor certificates will entitle the MTN issuer to receive payment
of a designated portion of collections of the credit and charge card
receivables assigned by the transferor to the receivables trustee. The MTN
issuer will use those collections for the redemption of first the class A MTN,
then the class B MTN and then the class C MTN.
If a pay out event occurs, the rapid amortisation period or the regulated
amortisation period may begin, which could cause an early redemption of your
notes. If Barclays as the transferor beneficiary or the excess interest
beneficiary were to become insolvent, the receivables trustee may be required
to liquidate the receivables. In addition, some breaches of representations
made by the transferor will require the transferor to repurchase the
receivables.
The Swap Counterparty
The swap counterparty for the class A notes, the class B notes and the
class C notes will be Barclays Bank PLC acting through Barclays Capital, its
investment banking division in the United Kingdom. The swap counterparty's
address is 5 The North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London E14 4BB, United Kingdom.
The Swap Agreements
Barclaycards' cardholders will make payments to Barclaycard in the lawful
currency of the United Kingdom, which is called pounds sterling. Accordingly,
payments on the investor certificates and the medium term notes will also be
made in sterling. So that you can receive payments on your class A notes or
class B notes in United States dollars, the issuer will enter into two swap
agreements with the swap counterparty. The issuer will also enter into a swap
agreement with the swap counterparty to make payments in dollars on the class C
notes.
Under the swap agreement for the class A notes, the issuer will pay to the
swap counterparty the portion of sterling amounts received on the medium term
notes equal to the amount received on the class A MTN, less certain amounts
representing the issuers costs and expenses and required earnings, and the swap
counterparty will convert those sterling amounts into dollars. Under the swap
agreement for the class B notes, the issuer will pay to the swap counterparty
the portion of sterling amounts received on the medium term notes equal to the
amount received on the class B MTN, less certain amounts representing the
issuer's costs and expenses and required earnings and the swap counterparty will
convert those sterling amounts into dollars.
Optional Early Redemption
The issuer has the option to redeem all of the remaining notes when their
principal balance is reduced to less than 10 per cent. of their original
principal balance.
If an optional early redemption occurs, you will receive a final
distribution equal to the entire unpaid principal balance of your notes plus
any accrued and unpaid interest.
Notices
Any notices that are required to be given by the terms of your notes will
be deemed to be validly given if they are published in the Financial Times or
another leading English language daily newspaper in London.
United Kingdom Tax Status
Subject to important qualifications and conditions set out under "United
Kingdom Taxation Treatment of the Notes", including as to final documentation
and assumptions, Clifford Chance, as special UK tax advisers, are of the
opinion that:
* U.S. persons who have no connection with the United Kingdom will not be
subject to United Kingdom taxation in respect of payment of principal and
interest on the offered notes as described more fully in the section of
this prospectus headed "United Kingdom Taxation Treatment of the Notes";
* if and for so long as the notes are in global bearer form and listed on
the London Stock Exchange and held in a recognised clearing system like
the Depository Trust Company no UK withholding tax will be required on
these payments to any offered noteholder; if these conditions are not
satisfied, and in particular if the notes are in definitive form, UK
withholding tax at the current rate of 20 per cent. will be required on
these payments;
* no UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax is payable on the issue of the
offered global notes or on the issue or transfer of an offered note in
definitive form;
* the MTN issuer and the issuer will be subject to UK corporation tax, at a
maximum rate of currently 30 per cent., on the profit reflected in their
respective profit and loss accounts as increased by the amounts of any
non-deductible expenses or losses. The profit in the profit and loss
account will not exceed 0.01 per cent. of the principal amount
outstanding on the medium term notes in the case of the MTN issuer, or on
the notes in the case of the issuer. Examples of non-deductible expenses
and losses may include, for the MTN
5
<PAGE>
issuer: (1) amounts paid by the MTN issuer to the receivables trustee to
cover the receivables trustee's fees and expenses, and (2) any losses of
principal which cannot be met out of excess spread and are not reflected
by account-specific provisions in the MTN issuer's statutory accounts;
and for the issuer, certain expenses relating to cash management; and
* the receivables trustee will have no UK tax liabilities apart from a
liability to UK income tax or corporation tax on any amounts, such as
trustee fees, which are paid to the receivables trustee for its own
benefit; and accordingly, the receivables trustee will have no liability
to UK tax in relation to amounts which it receives on behalf of the MTN
issuer or amounts which it is obliged to pay to the MTN issuer.
Subject to final documentation in a form satisfactory to them and which is
not inconsistent with the descriptions in this prospectus other than the
exhibits to this prospectus, Clifford Chance, as special UK tax advisers,
expect to give an opinion at closing by reference to the final documentation
and based on certain assumptions listed in that opinion, which will cover in
detail the matters referred to under this heading "-- United Kingdom Tax
Status". See "Risk Factors: Taxable Nature of MTN Issuer and Issuer Could Cause
a Loss on Your Notes".
United States Federal Income Tax Status
As is further described herein, special U.S. tax counsel is of the opinion
that each of the receivables trust, the MTN issuer and the issuer will not be
subject to United States federal income tax.
The issuer intends to treat the class A notes and the class B notes as
debt for United States federal income tax purposes. Each noteholder, by holding
a beneficial interest in a note, will agree to conform to that treatment.
However, no ruling will be obtained from the IRS on the characterisation of the
notes for federal income tax purposes. Further, based on the absence of
relevant legal authority and the adverse impact on the characterisation
determination of (1) the nature and extent of the capitalisation of the issuer
and (2) the effect of a termination of a swap agreement on an investor's
principal entitlement, special U.S. tax counsel to the issuer is unable to
render any legal opinion with respect to whether the notes will be treated as
debt for such purposes, and it is possible that the class A notes and class B
notes could be viewed as equity interests in the issuer for such purposes. U.S.
holders of class A notes or class B notes that are treated as equity in the
issuer likely would be treated as owning shares in a passive foreign investment
company.
If the class A notes or class B notes were treated as equity in a passive
foreign investment company, all or a portion of both distributions and gains on
the class A notes or class B notes as applicable generally would be taxable to
the holder as ordinary income, and would be taxable at the highest marginal
rates applicable to current and prior years during the holding period. Further,
all or a portion of the distributions could be subject to the additional
interest charge tax. This interest charge regime may be avoided by an investor
treated as owning equity in a passive foreign investment company if that
investor makes an effective qualified electing fund, or QEF, election. A United
States holder making a QEF election generally would be required to include its
pro rata share of the issuer's ordinary income and net capital gains in income
for each taxable year. In general, a QEF election would be required to be made
on or before the due date for filing a United States holders' federal income
tax return for the first taxable year for which it holds a note. As is further
discussed in this prospectus, the issuer will, upon request, endeavour to
provide the requesting United States holder with information that the issuer
deems reasonably necessary for the United States holder to make an effective
QEF election. Alternatively, it may be possible for an investor to avoid the
interest charge regime applicable to equity in a passive foreign investment
company by making an election to account for its investment using a mark-to-
market method of tax accounting, under which it would take into account accrued
gains and losses on its investment in the class A notes or class B notes as
applicable during the tax years to which they relate, treating all related
income and loss as ordinary income and loss. However, the applicability of the
mark-to-market election is dependent upon certain facts -- such as the
frequency of secondary market trading of the class A notes and the class B
notes -- as to which there is uncertainty and, accordingly, as to which no
assurance is possible. Should neither of the foregoing elections effectively be
made, investors would be subject to the tax rules applicable to investors in
passive foreign investment companies described above.
Special U.S. federal income tax counsel to the issuer, Orrick, Herrington
and Sutcliffe LLP, have prepared and reviewed the summary of federal income tax
consequences set forth in this prospectus, and renders the United States
federal income tax opinions contained in this prospectus.
See "-- United States Federal Income Tax Consequences".
ERISA Considerations for Investors
Subject to important considerations described under "ERISA Considerations"
in this prospectus, the class A notes are eligible for purchase by persons
investing assets of employee benefit plans or individual retirement accounts.
The class B notes are not eligible for purchase by persons investing
assets of employee benefit plans or individual retirement accounts.
6
<PAGE>
Risk Factors
You should carefully consider the following risk factors before deciding
to invest in the notes offered by this prospectus.
You May Not Be Able to There currently is no secondary market for the
Sell Your Notes notes. The underwriters expect, but are not
obligated, to make a market in the notes. If no
secondary market develops, you may not be able
to sell your notes prior to maturity. We cannot
offer any assurance that one will develop or,
if one does develop, that it will continue.
Allocations of Charged-Off We anticipate that the servicer will charge off
Receivables Could Reduce or write off as uncollectable some of the
Your Payments receivables. Each class of investor interest in
the receivables trust will be allocated a
portion of those charged-off receivables. If
the amount of charged-off receivables allocated
to the class A investor interest exceeds the
amount of funds available to cover those
charge-offs, and the class C investor interest
and class B investor interest have been reduced
to zero, the class A investor interest will be
reduced. This could cause the holders of the
class A notes to not receive the full amount of
principal and interest due to them. Similarly,
if the amount of charged-off receivables
allocated to the class B investor interest
exceeds the amount of funds available to cover
those charge-offs and the class C investor
interest has been reduced to zero, the class B
investor interest will be reduced. This could
cause the holders of the class B notes to not
receive the full amount of principal and
interest due to them. See "Series 99-1:
Defaulted Receivables; Investor Charge-Offs".
The Class B Notes Bear The class B notes are subordinated in right of
Additional Risk Because They payment of principal to the class A notes.
Are Subordinated to the Principal payments to the class B noteholders
Class A Notes will not be made until the class A noteholders
are paid in full. This could cause the class B
noteholders to not receive the full amount of
principal due to them.
Inability of Noteholders to Some series 99-1 pay out events will cause the
Receive the Full Percentage start of the regulated amortisation period
Allocation of Principal rather than the rapid amortisation period.
Collections During the During a regulated amortisation period, all of
Regulated Amortisation the principal collections allocated to the
Period Could Delay investor interest may not be used to make
Payments on Your Notes or payments of principal on the investor
Cause a Loss on Your Notes certificates as they would be during a rapid
amortisation period. Instead, principal
payments on the investor certificates -- and
thus ultimately on your notes -- will be
limited to the controlled deposit amount. This
could cause you to receive payments of
principal slower than you would during a rapid
amortisation period. Since some of the series
99-1 pay out events that result in the start of
a regulated amortisation period are caused by a
deterioration in the performance of the
receivables, a delay in the principal payments
on your notes could expose you to an increased
risk of losses on your notes or a delay in
payment on your notes.
Grouping of the MTN Issuer Contractual provisions will be contained in the
with Barclays for Tax security trust and cash management deed and the
Purposes Could Jeopardise other agreements to which the MTN issuer is a
the Bankruptcy Remote Status party by which the other parties to those
of the MTN Issuer Causing an agreements agree not to take any actions
Early Redemption of Your against the MTN issuer that might lead to its
Notes or a Loss on Your bankruptcy. Furthermore, the MTN issuer will be
Notes contractually restricted from undertaking any
business other than in connection with the
financings described in this prospectus. In
particular, the MTN issuer will be expressly
prohibited from incurring any additional
indebtedness, having any employees, owning any
premises and establishing or acquiring any
subsidiaries. Together, these provisions ensure
that the likelihood of the MTN issuer becoming
insolvent or bankrupt is remote.
Notwithstanding the steps that will be taken to
ensure that a bankruptcy of the MTN issuer will
be remote, it is likely that the MTN issuer
will be included in the Barclays group
registration for VAT purposes. If it is so
included, it will be technically liable, on a
joint and several basis, along with all other
companies included in the group registration,
for the whole of the group VAT liability.
Accordingly, potential secondary liabilities
for VAT of other Barclays companies within the
same VAT group could increase the likelihood of
the MTN issuer becoming insolvent. In addition,
there are provisions in the UK tax
7
<PAGE>
code that are designed to enable the UK Inland
Revenue to collect corporation tax from one
member of a group where other members of the
group have been involved in asset-stripping
schemes that are designed to evade corporate
tax liabilities.
If the MTN issuer were to become liable for the
VAT or corporate tax liabilities of another
member in the Barclays group, which the MTN
issuer was unable to meet, the UK Inland
Revenue could seek to put the MTN issuer in
bankruptcy. This could cause an early
redemption of your notes or a loss on your
notes.
Issuance of Additional The MTN issuer may issue new series of medium
Series May Adversely Affect term notes in connection with the issuance of
Your Rights by Diluting new series of investor certificates. The holder
Your Voting Power of the medium term notes of each series --
including the issuer -- may require the MTN
issuer, as investor beneficiary, to take action
or direct actions to be taken under the
declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement or a supplement. However, the consent
or approval of holders of a percentage of the
total principal balance of the medium term
notes of all series might be necessary to
require or direct those actions. These actions
include terminating the appointment of the
servicer under the beneficiaries servicing
agreement or the trust cash manager under the
declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement. Thus, the holder of any new series
of medium term notes will have voting rights
that will reduce the percentage interest of the
issuer as holder of the medium term notes.
Holders of medium term notes of other series --
or persons with the power to direct their
actions -- may have interests that do not
coincide with the interests of the issuer -- or
the persons with the power to direct the
issuer. This may restrict your ability to
ultimately direct the MTN issuer to take the
actions referred to above.
Insolvency of the None of the MTN issuer, the receivables trustee
Transferor May Result in an or the issuer has undertaken or will undertake
Inability to Repurchase any investigations, searches or other actions
Receivables to verify the details of the receivables --
other than steps taken by the issuer to verify
the details of the receivables that are
presented in this prospectus -- or to establish
the creditworthiness of any cardholder on the
designated accounts. The MTN issuer,
receivables trustee and the issuer will rely
solely on the representations given by the
transferor to the receivables trustee about the
receivables, the cardholders on the designated
accounts, the designated accounts and the
effect of the assignment of the receivables.
If any representation made by the transferor
about the receivables proves to have been
incorrect when made, the transferor will be
required to repurchase the affected receivables
from the receivables trustee. If the transferor
becomes bankrupt or insolvent, the receivables
trustee may be unable to compel the transferor
to repurchase receivables, and you could incur
a loss on your notes or an early redemption of
your notes.
Insolvency of the Issuer, The ability of each of the issuer, the MTN
the MTN Issuer or the issuer and the receivables trustee to meet its
Receivables Trustee Could obligations under the notes, the medium term
Cause an Early Redemption notes and the receivables securitisation
of Your Notes or a Loss on agreement and the declaration of trust and
Your Notes trust cash management agreement will depend
upon their continued solvency.
A company that has assets in the United Kingdom
will be insolvent if its
liabilities exceed its assets or if it is
unable to pay its debts as they fall due. Each
of the issuer, the MTN issuer and the
receivables trustee have been structured so
that the likelihood of their becoming insolvent
is remote. Each of these entities will be
contractually restricted from undertaking any
business other than in connection with the
financings described in this prospectus. They
each will be expressly prohibited from
incurring any additional indebtedness, having
any employees, owning any premises and
establishing or acquiring any subsidiaries.
Contractual provisions will be contained in
each of the agreements to which they are a
party that will prohibit the other parties to
those agreements, other than your notes, from
taking any actions against these entities that
might lead to their bankruptcy. Together, these
provisions help ensure that the likelihood of
any of these entities becoming insolvent or
bankrupt is remote.
8
<PAGE>
Notwithstanding these actions, it is still
possible that the issuer, the MTN issuer or the
receivables trustee could become insolvent. If
this were to occur, you could suffer a loss on
your notes or an early redemption of your
notes.
Application of the Consumer The primary statute dealing with consumer
Credit Act 1974 May credit in the United Kingdom is the Consumer
Impede Collection Efforts Credit Act 1974. The Consumer Credit Act
and Could Cause Early applies to the transactions occurring on the
Redemption of Your Notes or designated accounts and, in whole or in part,
a Loss on Your Notes to the credit or charge card agreements. This
may have consequences for your investment in
the notes, because of the possible
unenforceability of, or possible liability for
misrepresentation or breach of contract, in
relation to an underlying credit or charge card
agreement.
If a credit or charge card agreement has not
been executed or modified in accordance with
the Consumer Credit Act, it may be
unenforceable against a cardholder without a
court order -- and in some instances may be
completely unenforceable. As is common with
many other UK credit card issuers, some of
Barclaycard's credit and charge card agreements
do not comply in all respects with the Consumer
Credit Act or other related legislation. As a
result, these agreements may be unenforceable
by Barclaycard against the cardholders without
a court order. The transferor gives no
guarantee that a court order could be obtained
if required. With respect to those credit or
charge card agreements which may not be
compliant, such that a court order would not be
obtained, the transferor estimates that this
would apply to approximately 1 per cent. of the
aggregate principal receivables in the
designated accounts on 30 September, 1999.
Barclaycard does not anticipate any material
increase in the percentage of these receivables
in the securitised portfolio. The accounts that
do not comply with the Consumer Credit Act are
still legal, valid and binding obligations of
the cardholder and it will still be possible to
collect payments and demand arrears from
cardholders willing to pay their debt and
demand arrears from cardholders who are falling
behind with their payments. The transferor will
have no obligation to repay or account to a
cardholder for any payments received by a
cardholder because of this non-compliance with
the Consumer Credit Act. However, if losses
arise on these accounts, they will be written
off and borne by the investor beneficiary and
transferor beneficiary based on their interests
in the receivables trust.
Transactions involving the use of a credit or
charge card in the United Kingdom may
constitute transactions under debtor-creditor-
supplier agreements for the purposes of section
75 of the Consumer Credit Act. A debtor-
creditor-supplier agreement includes an
agreement by which the creditor, with knowledge
of its purpose, advances funds to finance a
debtor's purchase of goods or services from a
supplier.
Section 75 of the Consumer Credit Act provides
that if a supplier breaches a contract between
the supplier and a cardholder in a transaction
under a debtor-creditor-supplier agreement, or
if the supplier makes a misrepresentation about
the contract, the creditor may also be liable
to the cardholder for the breach or
misrepresentation. An example of a supplier's
breach of contract would include the supplier
selling the cardholder merchandise that is
defective or unsuitable for its purpose. In
these circumstances, the cardholder may have
the right to reduce the amount owed to the
transferor under his or her credit or charge
card account. This right would survive the sale
of the receivables to the receivables trustee.
As a result, the receivables trustee may not
receive the full amount otherwise owed by a
cardholder. However, the creditor will not be
liable where the cash price of the item or
service supplied underlying the claim is less
than L100 or greater than L30,000.
The receivables trustee has agreed on a limited
recourse basis to indemnify the transferor for
any loss suffered by the transferor from a
cardholder claim under section 75 of the
Consumer Credit Act. This indemnity cannot
exceed the original outstanding principal
balance of the affected charges on a designated
account.
9
<PAGE>
The receivables trustee's indemnity will be
payable only from and to the extent of excess
spread on the receivables. Any amounts that the
transferor recovers from the supplier will
reduce the transferor's loss for purposes of
the receivables trustee's indemnity. This is
described under "Series 99-1: Aggregate
Investor Indemnity Amount". The transferor will
have rights of indemnity against suppliers
under section 75 of the Consumer Credit Act.
The transferor may also be able to charge-back
the transaction in dispute to the supplier
under the operating regulations of VISA or
MasterCard.
If the transferor's loss for purposes of the
receivables trustee's indemnity exceeds the
excess spread available to satisfy the loss,
the transferor interest in the receivables
trust will be reduced by the amount of the
excess loss.
These consequences could result in you
incurring a loss on your notes or an early
redemption of your notes.
Failure to Notify Cardholders The transfer by the transferor to the
of the Transfer of Receivables receivables trustee of the benefit of the
Could Delay or Reduce receivables is governed by English law and does
Payments on Your Notes not give the receivables trustee full legal
title to the receivables. Notice to the
cardholders of the transfer would perfect the
legal title of the receivables trustee to the
receivables. The receivables trustee has agreed
that notice of the transfer will not be given
to cardholders, unless the transferor's long-
term senior unsecured indebtedness as rated by
Moody's, Standard & Poor's or Fitch IBCA were
to fall below Baa2, BBB or BBB, respectively.
The lack of notice has several legal
consequences that could delay or reduce
payments on your notes.
Until notice is given to a cardholder, the
cardholder will discharge his or her obligation
under the designated account by making payment
to the transferor.
Prior to the insolvency of the transferor,
unless notice was given to a cardholder who is
a depositor or other creditor of the
transferor, equitable set-offs may accrue in
favour of the cardholder against his or her
obligation to make payments to the transferor
under the designated account. These rights may
result in the receivables trustee receiving
reduced payments on the receivables. The
transfer of the benefit of any receivables to
the receivables trustee will continue to be
subject both to any prior equities that a
cardholder had and to any equities the
cardholder may become entitled to after the
transfer. Where notice of the transfer is given
to a cardholder, however, some rights of set-
off may not arise after the date notice is
given.
Failure to give notice to the cardholder means
that the receivables trustee would not take
priority over any interest of a later
encumbrancer or transferee of the transferor's
rights who has no notice of the transfer to the
receivables trustee. This could lead to a loss
on your notes.
Failure to give notice to the cardholder also
means that the transferor or the cardholder can
amend the card agreement without obtaining the
receivables trustee's consent. This could
adversely affect the receivables trustee's
interest in the receivables, which could lead
to a loss on your notes.
Competition in the UK The credit and charge card industry in the
Card Industry Could United Kingdom is highly competitive. There is
Lead to Early Redemption increased competitive use of advertising,
of Your Notes target marketing and pricing competition in
interest rates and annual cardholder fees as
both traditional and new card issuers seek to
expand or enter the UK market and compete for
customers.
New card issuers may rely on customer loyalty
and may have particular ways of reaching and
attracting customers. For example, major
supermarket retailers are promoting the use of
their own cards through extensive in-store
campaigns and low introductory interest rates.
Also, in the last few years a number of new
card issuers have entered the UK market from
the United States and have sought to build
market share primarily through aggressive
pricing. As a result of this competition,
certain competitors offer cards to selected
customers at lower interest rates than those
offered by Barclaycard.
10
<PAGE>
This competitive environment may affect the
originator's ability to originate new accounts
and generate new receivables. If the rate at
which new receivables are generated declines
significantly and if the transferor is unable
to nominate additional accounts for the
receivables trust, a series 99-1 pay out event
could occur. A series 99-1 pay out event could
result in an early redemption of your notes.
Social, Legal, Political and Changes in card use, payment patterns, amounts
Economic Factors of yield on the card portfolio generally and
Affect Card Payments the rate of defaults by cardholders may result
and Are Unpredictable from a variety of social, legal, political and
economic factors in the United Kingdom. Social
factors include changes in public confidence
levels, attitudes toward incurring debt and
perception of the use of credit and charge
cards. Economic factors include the rate of
inflation, the unemployment rate and relative
interest rates offered for various types of
loans. Political factors include lobbying from
interest groups, such as consumers and
retailers, and government initiatives in
consumer and related affairs: for example, a
non-statutory review of banking services was
announced by the UK Chancellor of the Exchequer
in November 1998 which is wide ranging and
might encompass the manner and levels of
charges earned by card issuers from cardholders
and merchant acquirers. We are unable to
determine and have no basis on which to predict
accurately whether, or to what extent, social,
legal, political or economic factors will
affect the future use of credit, default rates,
the yield on the card portfolio generally or
cardholder repayment patterns.
A Change in the Terms of the Only the receivables arising under the
Receivables May Adversely designated accounts will be transferred to the
Affect the Amount or Timing receivables trustee. The originator will
of Collections and Could Cause continue to own those accounts. As the owner of
an Early Redemption the accounts, the originator retains the right
or a Downgrade of Your Notes to change the terms of the accounts. For
example, the originator could change the
monthly interest rate, reduce or eliminate fees
on the accounts or reduce the required minimum
monthly payment.
The originator may change the terms of the
accounts to maintain its competitive position
in the UK credit and charge card industry.
Changes in interest and fees could lower the
amount of finance charge receivables generated
by those accounts. This could cause a pay out
event to occur, which might cause an early
redemption of your notes. This could also cause
a reduction in the credit ratings on your
notes.
Principal on Your Notes The receivables in the receivables trust may be
May Be Paid Earlier paid at any time and we cannot assure you that
Than Expected new receivables will be generated or will be
Creating a Reinvestment generated at levels needed to maintain the
Risk to You or Later than receivables trust. To prevent the early
Expected redemption of the notes, new receivables must
be generated and added to the receivables trust
or new accounts must be originated and
nominated for the receivables trust. The
receivables trust is required to maintain a
minimum amount of receivables. The generation
of new receivables or receivables in new
accounts is affected by the originator's
ability to compete in the current industry
environment and by customers changing borrowing
and payment patterns. If there is a decline in
the generation of new receivables or new
accounts, you may be repaid your principal
before the expected date.
One factor that affects the level of finance
charge and principal collections is the extent
of convenience usage. Convenience use means
that the cardholders pay their account balances
in full on or before the due date. The
cardholder, therefore, avoids all finance
charges on his or her account. An increase in
the convenience usage by cardholders would
decrease the effective yield on the accounts
and could cause a pay out event and therefore
possibly an early redemption of your notes.
No premium will be paid upon an early
redemption of your notes. If you receive
principal on your notes earlier than expected,
you may not be able to reinvest the principal
at a similar rate of return.
Alternatively, a decrease in convenience usage
may reduce the principal payment rate on the
accounts. This could result in you receiving
the principal on your notes later than
expected.
11
<PAGE>
Credit Enhancement May Credit enhancement for your notes is limited.
Be Insufficient to Prevent a The only assets that will be available to make
Loss on Your Notes payment on your notes are the assets of the
issuer pledged to secure payment of your notes.
If problems develop with the receivables, such
as an increase in losses on the receivables, or
if there are problems in the collection and
transfer of the receivables to the trust, or if
the swap counterparty fails to make payments on
the swap agreements, it is possible that you
may not receive the full amount of interest and
principal that you would otherwise receive.
Issuance of Additional Series Series 99-1 is the first series created within
by the Receivables the receivables trust. Additional series may
Trustee on Behalf of from time to time be created within the
the Receivables Trust receivables trust. Any new series of investor
May Adversely Affect certificates -- and medium term notes and notes
Payments on Your Notes -- will also be payable from the receivables in
the receivables trust. The principal terms of
any new series of investor certificates will be
contained in a new series supplement to the
declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement. The terms of a new series contained
in the new series supplement to the declaration
of trust and trust cash management agreement
will not be subject to your prior review or
consent.
The principal terms of a new series may include
methods for determining investor percentages
and allocating collections, provisions creating
different or additional security or other
credit enhancement for the new series,
provisions subordinating the new series to
other series, and other amendments or
supplements to the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement that apply only
to the new series. It is a condition to the
issuance of a new series that each rating
agency that has rated any debt ultimately
payable from a prior series of investor
certificates that is outstanding -- including
your notes -- confirms in writing that the
issuance of the new series will not result in a
reduction or withdrawal of its rating.
However, the terms of a new series could
adversely affect the timing and amounts of
payments on any other outstanding series,
including series of which your notes are a
part.
Credit Quality of the The transferor may designate additional credit
Receivables Trust's Assets or charge card accounts as designated accounts
May Be Eroded by the and offer the receivables trustee an assignment
Addition of New Accounts of the receivables arising under the additional
Which Could Adversely Affect accounts. The transferor may be required at
Collections of Receivables times to nominate additional accounts as
designated accounts. These accounts may include
accounts that were originated using criteria
that are different from those applicable to the
accounts from which receivables were originally
assigned to the receivables trustee. For
example, they could be originated at a
different date with different underwriting
standards, or they could be acquired from
another institution that used different
underwriting standards. Consequently, there can
be no assurance that accounts that become
designated accounts in the future will have the
same credit quality as the designated accounts
on the closing date. This could adversely
affect collections on the receivables.
Interest Rate Payable by the The majority of the designated accounts have
Receivables Trustee on Behalf monthly interest rates that are constant,
of the Receivables Trust except for Barclaycard's ability to change the
May Increase Without a interest rate at its discretion. The interest
Corresponding Change in rate paid to the MTN issuer will be based on
Card Rates Potentially the London interbank offered rate for deposits
Causing a Loss on Your in sterling, which changes from time to time.
Notes or Early Redemption Accordingly, the interest payable to the MTN
of Your Notes issuer could increase without a corresponding
increase in the amount of finance charge
collections. If this occurred, you could suffer
a loss on your notes or a pay out event could
occur causing an early redemption of your
notes.
Commingling of Collections Collections from cardholders on the designated
with the Transferor May Delay accounts and other Barclaycard cardholders will
or Reduce Payments on initially be paid to an operating account of
Your Notes the transferor. The transferor has declared a
trust over the operating account in favour of
the receivables trustee for collections that
are deposited in it. Collections on the
designated accounts will be transferred to the
trustee collection account within two business
days of being identified.
12
<PAGE>
For the limited time that collections on the
designated accounts are in the operating
account, they may be commingled with other
funds of the transferor or future beneficiaries
and they may be untraceable. Consequently, if
the transferor were to become insolvent, there
may be a delay in the transfer of collections
to the receivables trustee if the transferor --
or a liquidator or administrator of the
transferor -- attempted to freeze the operation
of the operating account pending completion of
any rights of tracing. This could ultimately
cause a delay or reduction in the payments you
receive on your notes.
If the Transferor Opts to The transferor may opt to cause a percentage of
Treat a Portion of Principal receivables that would otherwise be treated as
Receivables as Finance principal receivables to be treated as finance
Charge Receivables, an charge receivables. If the transferor were to
Early Redemption of Your exercise this option, it could prevent a pay
Notes Could Occur or Could out event from occurring because of a reduction
Be Delayed of the portfolio yield, which could delay an
early redemption of your notes at a time when
the performance of the receivables is
deteriorating. Once this option is exercised,
the transferor may also reduce the percentage
or stop using the percentage at any time.
However, this option, if exercised, will reduce
the aggregate amount of principal receivables,
which may increase the likelihood that the
transferor will be required to designate
additional accounts from which receivables will
be assigned to the receivables trustee. If the
transferor were unable to designate additional
accounts, a pay out event could occur and you
could receive payments of principal on your
notes before you expect them.
If Optional Early Redemption When the total principal balance of the notes
Occurs, It Will is reduced to less than 10 per cent. of their
Result in an Early Redemption original total principal balance, the issuer
of Your Notes Creating a has the option to redeem the notes in full.
Reinvestment Risk This early redemption may result in an early
return of your investment. No premium will be
paid in the event of an exercise of the early
redemption option. If you receive principal on
your notes earlier than expected, you may not
be able to reinvest the principal at a rate of
return similar to that on your notes.
If Cardholders Are Concentrated If the receivables trust has a high
in a Geographic Region, concentration of receivables from cardholders
Economic Downturn in that located in a single region, an economic
Region May Adversely Affect downturn in that region may have a magnified
Collections of Receivables adverse effect on the receivables trust because
of that concentration. This prospectus contains
a geographic breakdown of accounts and the
amount of receivables generated in the regions
of the United Kingdom. See "The Receivables:
Geographic Distribution of Accounts --
Securitised Portfolio".
On 30 September, 1999, approximately 36.86 per
cent. of the outstanding balance of receivables
were from cardholders located in London and
11.71 per cent. of the outstanding balance of
receivables were from cardholders located in
the Central Midlands. No other region currently
accounts for more than 10 per cent. of the
outstanding balance of the receivables. These
concentration levels may change in the future.
We are not aware of any existing adverse
economic conditions affecting either of these
regions that would be material to you. Future
adverse economic conditions affecting either of
these regions or any of the other regions,
however, could adversely affect the performance
of the receivables which could result in a loss
on your notes.
The Year 2000 Problem Could Many computer programs and electronic
Disrupt the Generation and components that incorporate computer programs
Servicing of the Receivables use only two digit references for dates and
date dependent functions and therefore require
upgrading or replacement to recognise and
properly perform functions involving dates
before and after 1 January, 2000.
Barclays Bank PLC has been upgrading, testing
and replacing its mission critical computer
systems to address the Year 2000 problem, and
expects to be able to perform its servicing and
originator functions without significant
interruption. Barclays Bank PLC has also been
communicating with its key suppliers to monitor
their efforts in addressing the Year 2000
problem. One company's system failure could
directly or indirectly affect another company.
13
<PAGE>
If Barclays Bank PLC or any of its suppliers
are adversely affected by the Year 2000
problem, the generation and servicing of
receivables could be disrupted and payments you
receive on your notes could be reduced or
delayed.
Adoption of the Euro by the Before your notes have matured, the euro could
United Kingdom Would Have become the lawful currency of the United
Uncertain Effects on Your Notes Kingdom. If that were to happen, all amounts
payable on the medium term notes -- including
the sterling payments owed to the swap
counterparty on the swap agreements but not any
dollar payments made by the swap counterparty
to the issuer -- may become payable in euro. If
the medium term notes are outstanding when the
euro becomes the lawful currency of the United
Kingdom, we intend to make payments on the
medium term notes and the swap agreements
according to the then market practice of
payment on debts or, as the case may be, swaps.
We are uncertain what effect, if any, the
adoption of the euro by the United Kingdom may
have on your notes.
Adoption of Proposed European In May 1998, the European Commission presented
Directive on the Taxation to the Council of Ministers of the European
of Savings Could Cause Union a proposal to oblige member states to
Withholding Tax to be Applied adopt either a "withholding tax system" or an
to Payments on the Notes "information reporting system" for interest,
discounts and premiums on debt instruments. It
is not clear whether this proposal will be
adopted, and if it is adopted, whether it will
be adopted in its current form and if it is
adopted what the impact will be on your notes.
The withholding tax system would require a
paying agent established in a member state to
withhold tax at a minimum rate of 20 per cent.
from any interest, discount or premium paid to
an individual resident in another member state
unless the individual presents a certificate
obtained from the tax authorities of the member
state in which the individual is resident
confirming that those authorities are aware of
the payment due to the individual. The
information reporting system would require a
member state to supply to other member states
details of any payment of interest, discount or
premium made by paying agents within its
jurisdiction to an individual resident in
another member state.
The term "paying agent" is widely defined and
includes an agent who collects interest,
discounts or premiums on behalf of an
individual beneficially entitled to the
payment. If this proposal is adopted, it will
not apply to payments of interest, discount and
premiums made before 1 January, 2001.
You May Be Subject to UK If any of the following events occur, you will
Withholding Taxes If Definitive be entitled to receive definitive notes for
your book-entry interests:
Notes Are Issued * as a result of a change in UK or U.S. law,
for Book-Entry Interests the issuer or any paying agent is or will be
required to make any deduction or withholding
on account of tax from any payment on the
notes that would not be required if the notes
were in definitive form;
* DTC has notified the issuer that it is
unwilling or unable to hold the
certificateless depository interests or to
continue as a clearing agency under the
United States Securities Exchange Act of 1934
and the issuer cannot appoint a successor;
* if the depository notifies the issuer that it
is at any time unwilling or unable to
continue as depository and the issuer cannot
appoint a successor; or
* the principal amount of the notes is
accelerated because an event of default has
occurred.
Under current UK tax law, following the
issuance of definitive notes, interest payable
on the definitive notes will be subject to UK
withholding tax -- currently at the rate of 20
per cent. -- subject to the terms of any
applicable double tax treaty or other available
relief. Neither the issuer nor any other person
will be obliged to pay additional amounts to
compensate you for any withholding tax.
14
<PAGE>
If Stamp Duty Becomes Payable, Stamp duty is a UK tax levied on documents
it May Cause a Loss on which effect transfers of title on sale. Stamp
Your Notes duty is charged at the rate of 3.5 per cent. of
the sale price, insofar as the sale price can
be ascertained at the time when the relevant
document is executed. The sale of the
receivables to the receivables trustee will be
initiated by way of an offer document delivered
in accordance with the receivables
securitsation agreement, with the receivables
trustee being permitted to accept the offer, if
it so chooses, by way of the transfer of the
purchase price from the receivables trustee to
the transferor. The transaction which occurs on
acceptance of the offer by the receivables
trustee will be regarded for stamp duty
purposes, as a sale of an interest in the
receivables by Barclays to the receivables
trustee as trustee for the MTN issuer. Barclays
has received legal advice, subject to sight of
final documents, that stamp duty will not be
payable on the sale of an interest in the
receivables by Barclays to the MTN issuer. This
is primarily on the basis that the MTN issuer
is a subsidiary of Barclays and therefore the
transaction described above will benefit from
an exemption from stamp duty for sales between
associated companies.
In order to fulfil all of the conditions for
avoiding stamp duty on the sale of the
receivables, it is necessary for Barclays to
execute a transfer of the receivables which are
the subject of the offer and to have the
transfer adjudicated free of duty by the United
Kingdom Stamp Office. Under current law and
practice, there is no time limit in effect for
Barclays to do this.
Barclays has agreed in the receivables
securitisation agreement to seek a final
adjudication with the United Kingdom Stamp
Office within six months after the closing date
that no stamp duty is payable on a transfer of
a part of the receivables comprised in the
offer. The issuer has agreed to indemnify the
MTN issuer for any stamp duty which it becomes
liable to pay. In the circumstance where the
adjudication is not successful, the issuer will
undertake to obtain a loan facility under which
the MTN issuer would be permitted to draw to
fund any liability to stamp duty. If the issuer
is unable to secure the necessary stamp duty
facility, the MTN issuer may be unable to
enforce its rights in the receivables if
sufficient funds are not available from excess
spread to pay the stamp duty and to have the
transfer of the receivables stamped. This could
cause a loss on your notes.
Taxable Nature of the MTN As explained in "Prospectus Summary: United
Issuer and the Issuer Could Kingdom Tax Status" above, the MTN issuer and
Cause a Loss on Your Notes the issuer will be liable to UK corporation tax
at the current rate of 30 per cent. on the
profit reflected in their respective profit and
loss accounts as increased to take account of
any non-deductible expenses or losses; which
profit before any such increase is not expected
to exceed 1 basis point of the principal amount
outstanding on the MTN notes and the notes
respectively.
If the taxable profits of the MTN issuer or the
issuer are greater than expected, because
either the profit shown in the profit and loss
account is greater than 1 basis point of the
principal amount outstanding, or non-deductible
expenses or losses are greater than expected,
the MTN issuer or the issuer, as the case may
be, will be subject to corporation tax on the
greater amount at the maximum rate of currently
30 per cent., and you could suffer losses on
your notes as a result.
In order for the closing of the sale of the
notes to occur, an opinion must be obtained
from UK tax advisers covering the matters
described under the heading "Prospectus
Summary: United Kingdom Tax Status" above, and
in particular confirming the expected tax
treatment of the MTN issuer and the issuer and
analysing in detail the sorts of expenses which
either entity can incur which may not be
deductible. Subject to finalisation of
documents including those which are exhibits to
the registration statement of which this
prospectus forms a part in a form which is
satisfactory to them and not inconsistent with
the descriptions set out in the body of this
prospectus,
15
<PAGE>
Clifford Chance, as special UK tax advisers,
expect to deliver this closing tax opinion --
called the closing tax opinion -- to the
appropriate rating standard.
An opinion of UK tax advisers, however, is not
binding on the courts, and no specific
transaction rulings on this issue will be
obtained from the UK Inland Revenue. In
addition, there is no case law authority on a
number of features of the transactions that
raise difficult questions.
U.S. Tax Treatment There are no regulations, published rulings or
of the Notes is Uncertain and judicial decisions addressing the
Could Have Adverse Tax characterisation for U.S. federal income tax
Consequences for U.S. purposes of securities with terms similar to
Noteholders the notes. Further, because of the nature and
extent of capitalisation of the issuer and the
effect of a termination of the anticipated swap
agreement on an investor's principal
entitlement, special U.S. federal income tax
counsel to the issuer is not able to opine as
to the appropriate classification of the notes
as debt or as equity.
Although no ruling or legal opinion will be
obtained on the classification of the notes as
debt or equity for U.S. federal income tax
purposes, the issuer intends to take the
position that the notes are debt of the issuer
for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Based on
this position, the class A notes and class B
notes may be considered to be issued with
original issue discount. The accrual of
original issue discount may require holders to
recognise income in advance of the receipt of
payments of it.
If the notes were not treated as debt, they
likely would be treated as equity in the issuer
for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Further,
the issuer likely would be treated as a
"passive foreign investment company" for U.S.
federal income tax purposes, and holders of
notes treated as equity likely would be treated
as holding shares in a passive foreign
investment company. If the notes were treated
as equity in a passive foreign investment
company, holders may be subject to a special,
adverse tax regime which would tax any gain at
ordinary income rates rather than as capital
gain, and which would increase taxes otherwise
owing with respect to any gain and
distributions of interest by an interest
charge. Investors generally may avoid such
adverse tax consequences if they properly and
effectively make a qualified electing fund, or
QEF, election with respect to their notes. Such
an election generally would have the effect of
requiring an investor in a note to report its
share of the income earned by the issuer and,
accordingly, would produce a U.S. federal
income tax liability with respect to the class
A notes and class B notes generally similar to
that applicable to such notes were they to
properly be characterised as debt for U.S.
federal income tax purposes. Accordingly, it is
suggested that prospective investors carefully
consider the making of a QEF election with
respect to the class A notes and class B notes.
See "United States Federal Income Tax
Consequences -- Investment in a Passive Foreign
Investment Company."
Limited Nature of Credit Each credit rating assigned to your notes
Ratings Assigned to Your reflects the rating agency's assessment only of
Notes the likelihood that interest and principal will
be paid to you by the final redemption date,
not that it will be paid when expected or
scheduled. These ratings are based on the
rating agencies' determination of the value of
the receivables, the reliability of the
payments on the receivables, the
creditworthiness of the swap counterparty and
the availability of credit enhancement.
The ratings do not address the following:
* the likelihood that the principal or interest
on your notes will be redeemed or paid, as
expected on the scheduled redemption dates;
* the possibility of the imposition of United
Kingdom or European withholding tax;
* the marketability of the notes, or any market
price; or
* that an investment in the notes is a suitable
investment for you.
A rating is not a recommendation to purchase,
hold or sell the notes.
16
<PAGE>
Ratings Can Be Lowered or Any rating agency may lower its rating or
Withdrawn After You Purchase withdraw its rating if, in the sole judgement
Your Notes of the rating agency, the credit quality of the
notes has declined or is in question. If any
rating assigned to your notes is lowered or
withdrawn, the market value of your notes may
be reduced.
The issuer has the right, but not the
obligation, to direct the swap counterparty to
assign the swap agreements to a replacement
swap counterparty if the long-term credit
rating of the swap counterparty is withdrawn or
reduced below "Aa3" by Moody's or its short-
term credit rating is reduced below "A-1+" by
Standard & Poor's and the swap counterparty has
not remedied the event under the terms of the
swap agreements. We cannot assure you, however,
that the issuer will be able to find a
replacement swap counterparty and assign the
swap agreements in this event or that the
ratings of your notes will not be withdrawn or
reduced in this event.
Termination of Swap A swap agreement may be terminated, but only if
Agreements Could Result in an the issuer has been directed to do so by the
Early Redemption of Your relevant noteholders, if as a result of a
Notes change in applicable law, withholding taxes
would be imposed -- by any jurisdiction -- on
any payments made or required to be made to the
issuer by the swap counterparty or by the
issuer to the swap counterparty under the swap
agreement and there are not any reasonable
measures that the swap counterparty or the
issuer can take to avoid their imposition. In
addition, a swap agreement may be terminated,
but only if the issuer has been directed to do
so by the relevant noteholders, the issuer or
any paying agent has or will become obligated
to deduct or withhold amounts from payments on
the related class of notes to be made to any of
the related noteholders on the next interest
payment date, for any tax, assessment or other
governmental charge imposed by the United
Kingdom or any political subdivision or taxing
authority of the United Kingdom on the payments
as a result of any change in its laws or
regulations or rulings, or any change in
official position regarding the application or
interpretation of its laws, regulations or
rulings, which change or amendment becomes
effective on or after the date the notes are
issued, and there are no reasonable measures
the issuer can take to avoid the tax or
assessment.
A payment default by the swap counterparty or a
default in the payment of interest by the
issuer to the swap counterparty if funds are
available to pay interest will result in a
termination of any swap agreement. The swap
agreements may also terminate following a
material breach in a representation or covenant
by the swap counterparty, the insolvency of the
issuer or the swap counterparty or changes in
law resulting in illegality.
The swap agreements may also be terminated upon
the occurrence of certain other events
described under "The Swap Agreements: Common
Provisions of the Swap Agreements".
The termination without replacement of any of
the swap agreements will result in an event of
default under the notes and a pay out event
that results in a rapid amortisation period. We
cannot assure you that any of the swap
agreements will not terminate prior to the
payment in full of the principal balance of
your notes. If any of the swap agreements
terminates prior to the payment in full of the
principal balance of your notes, you could
receive payments of principal on your notes
before you expect them.
Withholding Taxes on Swap The issuer and the swap counterparty will each
Payments or Your Notes May represent and warrant in each swap agreement
Reduce the Amount You Are that, under current applicable law, each of
Paid on Your Notes them is entitled to make all payments required
to be made by them under the swap agreement
free and clear of, and without deduction for or
on account of, any taxes, assessments or other
governmental charges -- which we refer to as
withholding taxes. However, neither the issuer
nor the swap counterparty will be required to
indemnify the other party for any withholding
taxes imposed on payments under a swap
agreement as a result of a change in applicable
law.
If any withholding taxes -- by any jurisdiction
-- would be imposed on any payments made or
required to be made by the swap counterparty to
the issuer under a swap agreement as a result
of a change in applicable law and
17
<PAGE>
the obligation to deduct or withhold cannot be
avoided by the swap counterparty, the issuer
may terminate the swap agreement, but only if
the issuer has been directed to do so by the
relevant noteholders. If the relevant
noteholders do not elect to terminate the swap
agreement, then payments to that class of
noteholders will be reduced pro rata by the
amount withheld for any withholding taxes.
In addition, if any UK withholding taxes would
be imposed on any payments made or required to
be made by the issuer or any paying agent on
any class of notes, the issuer will terminate
the relevant swap agreement if the issuer has
been directed to do so by the relevant
noteholders. If the relevant noteholders do not
elect to terminate the swap agreement, then
payments to that class of noteholders will be
reduced pro rata by any amount withheld for any
withholding taxes.
Payment of an Early If a swap agreement is terminated before its
Termination Payment to the scheduled termination date, the issuer or the
Swap Counterparty May swap counterparty may be liable to make an
Reduce Payments on Your Notes early termination payment to the other party.
The amount of any early termination payment
will be based on the market value of the
terminated swap agreement. This market value
will be computed on the basis of market
quotations of the cost of entering into a swap
transaction with the same terms and conditions
that would have the effect of preserving the
respective full payment obligations of the
parties. Any early termination payment could,
if the sterling/dollar exchange rate has
changed significantly, be substantial.
Any early termination payment made by the
issuer to the swap counterparty under a swap
agreement will be made from repayments of
principal on the medium term notes equal to the
amount of principal repayments received by the
issuer on the relevant class of medium term
notes. If the amount of available repayments of
principal on the medium term notes is
insufficient to pay the early termination
payment under the relevant swap agreement, the
balance of the early termination payment will
be paid to the extent that such amounts are
available on the next interest payment date
together with interest. That will cause the
sterling amounts available for conversion to
dollars, and possibly your payments, to be
reduced -- perhaps substantially. Under the
terms and conditions of the notes, the
principal amount repayable on your notes will
be reduced by the amount of a notional swap
termination payment as more fully described
under "Terms and Conditions of the Notes". See
"The Swap Agreements".
18
<PAGE>
Introduction
You can find a listing of the pages where terms used in this prospectus
are defined under the caption "Index of Terms for Prospectus" beginning on page
120.
U.S. Dollar Presentation
Unless this prospectus provides a different rate, the translations of
pounds sterling into dollars have been made at the rate of 0.60705, which is
the closing price on 30 September, 1999 for the dollar/sterling exchange rate
as displayed on the Bloombergu Service under GBP Currency HP and is also the
fixed exchange rate for the swap agreements. Using this rate does not mean that
pound sterling amounts actually represent those U.S. dollar amounts or could be
converted into U.S. dollars at that rate.
References throughout this document to "L", "pounds" or "pounds sterling"
are to the lawful currency of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland. References in this document to "US$", "$", "U.S. dollars" or "dollars"
are to the lawful currency of the United States of America.
The following table sets forth the history of the dollar/pound sterling
exchange rates for the five most recent years and the quarters ended 31 March,
1999, 30 June, 1999 and 30 September, 1999.
Sterling/Dollar Exchange Rate History (1)
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Quarter Ended Year ended 31 December
------------------------------------------------ -------------------------------------------
30 September 1999 30 June 1999 31 March 1999 1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
---------------- ----------- ------------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Last(2)... 0.6080 0.6360 0.6200 0.6020 0.6040 0.5910 0.6460 0.6420
Average(3) 0.6248 0.6224 0.6123 0.6035 0.6101 0.6409 0.6336 0.6592
High...... 0.6450 0.6360 0.6260 0.6200 0.6330 0.6700 0.6520 0.6840
Low....... 0.6070 0.6100 0.6010 0.5840 0.5840 0.5910 0.6090 0.6110
</TABLE>
- ----------
Notes
(1) Data obtained from Bloomberg GBP [CRNCY] HP screen (opening exchange
rate).
(2) Last is the opening exchange rate on the last business day of each of the
periods indicated.
(3) Average is the average daily exchange rate during the periods indicated.
The Issuer
The issuer was formed in England and Wales on 24 June, 1999 as Harpmist
PLC. It passed a special resolution to change its name to Gracechurch Card
Funding (No. 1) PLC on 10 September, 1999. Its registered office and principal
place of business are located at 200 Aldersgate Street, London EC1A 4JJ, United
Kingdom.
All of its issued share capital is held by Gracechurch Card (Holdings)
Limited. It has a fiscal year end of 31 December.
The issuer was formed principally to:
* issue the notes;
* enter into all financial arrangements in order to issue the notes;
* purchase the series 99-1 medium term notes; and
* enter into all the documents necessary to purchase the series 99-1
medium term notes.
19
<PAGE>
Directors and Secretary
The following sets out the directors of the issuer and their business
addresses and principal activities. Because the issuer is organised as a
special purpose company and will be largely passive, it is expected that the
directors of the issuer in that capacity will participate in its management to
a limited extent.
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Name Nationality Business Address Principal Activities
- ------------------------------- ----------------------------- ----------------------------- -----------------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Peter Stuart Crook 1234 Pavilion Drive,
British Northampton NN4 7SG Finance Director
David Roger Finney 155 Bishopsgate, London EC2M
British 3UU Trust Official
Bryan Donald Needham 155 Bishopsgate, London EC2M
British 3UU Trust Official
Peter Michael Hills 155 Bishopsgate, London EC2M
British 3UU Trust Official
(alternative director)
</TABLE>
Clifford Chance Secretaries will provide the issuer with general
secretarial, registrar and company administration services on behalf of David
Roger Finney. The fees of Clifford Chance Secretaries for providing such
services will be included in the MTN Issuer Costs Amounts. See "Series 99-1:
Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of Finance Charge Collections to the
MTN Issuer".
The secretary of the issuer:
Name Business Address
- ------------------ -----------------------------------------------
David Roger Finney 155 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 3TG
The net proceeds of the sale of the notes will be used by the issuer to
purchase the medium term notes. The issuer will be prohibited by the trust deed
and the terms and conditions of the notes from engaging in business other than:
* the business described in this prospectus;
* preserving and exercising its rights under the notes, the deed of
charge, the paying agency and agent bank agreement, the depository
agreement, the trust deed, the expenses loan agreement, the swap
agreements, the corporate services agreement and the underwriting
and subscription agreements for the notes; and
* purchasing the series 99-1 medium term notes.
The issuer's ability to incur, assume or guarantee debt will also be
restricted by the trust deed and the terms and conditions of the notes.
Barclays does not own, directly or indirectly, any of the share capital of
the issuer.
Management's Discussion And Analysis Of Financial Condition
Sources of Capital and Liquidity
The issuer's source of capital will be the net proceeds of the offering of
the notes.
The issuer's primary sources of liquidity will be payments of interest and
principal on the medium term notes and borrowings under the expenses loan
agreement.
Results of Operations
As of the date of this prospectus, the issuer does not have an operating
history. Because the issuer does not have an operating history, we have not
included in this prospectus any historical or pro forma ratio of earnings to
fixed charges. The earnings on the medium term notes, the interest costs of the
notes and the related operating expenses will determine the issuer's results of
operations in the future. The income generated on the medium term notes will be
used to pay principal and interest on the notes.
Use Of Proceeds
The net proceeds of the issue of the class A notes, the class B notes and
the class C notes will be $997,900,000. The fees and commissions payable on the
issue of the notes will be deducted from the gross proceeds of the issue. The
issuer will use its reasonable endeavours to make a drawing under the expenses
loan agreement of at least an amount equal to the fees and commissions payable
on the notes. The issuer will use the net proceeds of the issue of the notes
converted into sterling under the swap agreements together with the drawing
under the expenses loan agreement to purchase the medium term notes from the MTN
issuer on or about 23 November, 1999 -- called the "closing date".
20
<PAGE>
Expenses Loan Agreement
On the closing date, the issuer -- as borrower -- will enter into a loan
agreement with Barclays -- as lender -- under which Barclays will lend to the
issuer up to a maximum amount of L2,000,000 to be used by the issuer to meet
its costs and expenses relating to issuing the notes. This loan agreement is
called the "expenses loan agreement". The amounts outstanding under the
expenses loan agreement will bear interest at the rate of three-month sterling
LIBOR plus a margin of 1.35 per cent. per annum. The payment of interest under
the expenses loan agreement will be paid monthly on each distribution date. To
the extent the issuer has insufficient funds left after making all payments of
principal and interest on the notes, the amount of that interest will be
deferred until the next distribution date. The principal amount outstanding
under the expenses loan agreement will not fall due for repayment until all
principal, interest and other amounts due on the notes have been paid in full.
The MTN Issuer
The MTN issuer was formed in England and Wales on 13 August, 1990 as
Barshelfco (No. 28) Limited. It re-registered as a public limited company and
changed its name to Barclaycard Funding PLC on 19 October, 1999. Its registered
office and principal place of business are located at 54 Lombard Street, London
EC3P 3AH, United Kingdom.
The MTN issuer has a fiscal year end of 31 December.
The MTN issuer was formed principally to:
* issue the medium term notes;
* enter into the financial arrangements to issue the medium term
notes;
* purchase investor certificates representing a beneficial interest
in the receivables trust; and
* enter into the documents and exercise its powers connected to the
above.
The MTN issuer has not engaged in any activities since its incorporation
other than the above.
Barclays holds 75 per cent. of the issued share capital of the MTN issuer,
representing 51 per cent. of the issued voting share capital and a 49 per cent.
entitlement to distributable profits. The remaining share capital is held by the
Royal Exchange Trust Company Limited.
Directors and Secretary
The following sets out the directors of the MTN issuer and their business
addresses and principal activities. Because the MTN issuer is organised as a
special purpose company and will be largely passive, it is expected that the
directors of the MTN issuer in that capacity will participate in its management
to a limited extent.
Name Nationality Business Address Principal
Activities
- ------------------ ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
Peter Stuart Crook British 1234 Pavilion Finance Director
Drive,
Northampton NN4
7SG
David Roger Finney British 155 Bishopsgate, Trust Official
London EC2M 3TG
Bryan Donald British 155 Bishopsgate, Trust Official
Needham London EC2M 3TG
Peter Michael British 155 Bishopsgate, Trust Official
Hills (alternate London EC2M 3TG
director)
The secretary of the MTN issuer is:
Name Business Address
- ------------------ -----------------------------------------------
Barcosec Limited 54 Lombard Street, London EC3P 3AH
The proceeds of the sale of the medium term notes will be used by the MTN
issuer to acquire certificates representing a beneficial interest in series 99-
1 of the receivables trust -- called the "investor certificates".
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition
Sources of Capital and Liquidity
The MTN issuer's source of capital will be the proceeds of the offering of
the medium term notes.
The MTN issuer's primary source of liquidity will be payments of principal
and interest on the investor certificates.
21
<PAGE>
Results of Operations
As of the date of this prospectus, the MTN issuer does not have an
operating history. Because the MTN issuer does not have an operating history,
we have not included in this prospectus any historical or pro forma ratio of
earnings to fixed charges. The earnings on series of investor certificates, the
interest costs of series of medium term notes and the related operating
expenses will determine the MTN issuer's results of operations in the future.
The income generated on the investor certificates for series 99-1 will be used
to pay principal and interest on the medium term notes.
The Receivables Trustee
The receivables trustee was formed under the laws of Jersey, Channel
Islands. Its registered office is at Normandy House, Grenville Street, St
Helier, Jersey JE2 4UF and you can inspect its memorandum and articles of
association at the offices of Clifford Chance at 200 Aldersgate Street, London
EC1A 4JJ, United Kingdom.
All of the issued share capital of the receivables trustee is held by a
trust company formed in Jersey, Bedell & Cristin Trustees Limited, on the terms
of a general charitable trust.
The receivables trustee was formed principally to:
* act as trustee of the receivables trust;
* purchase and accept transfer of the receivables from the
transferor;
* issue investor certificates on behalf of the receivables trust;
and
* to enter into transaction documents incidental to or relating to
those activities.
Bedell & Cristin Trust Company Limited, a company formed under the laws of
Jersey provides the receivables trustee with company secretarial, registrar and
company administration services. Its fees for providing these services are
included in the fees paid to the receivables trustee. See the section "The
Receivables Trust: Trustee Payment Amount".
Two of the directors of the receivables trustee are also directors of
Bedell & Cristin Trustees Limited and Bedell & Cristin Trust Company Limited
and partners in the law firm Bedell & Cristin.
Barclays Bank PLC does not own, directly or indirectly, any of the share
capital of the receivables trustee.
Management and Activities
The receivables trustee has been established specifically to act as
trustee of the receivables trust. Its activities are restricted by the
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement and the related
supplements.
Since it was formed, the receivables trustee has:
* engaged in activities incidental to the declaration of the
receivables trust;
* obtained the necessary consumer credit licence and data protection
registrations in the United Kingdom and/or Jersey;
* authorised and executed the documents that it is a party to in
order to establish the receivables trust;
* engaged in activities incidental to the anticipated transfer to it
of receivables under the designated accounts; and
* authorised the other documents to which it is a party.
The receivables trustee will make a number of covenants in the declaration
of trust and trust cash management agreement, including that it will not
without the prior written consent of each of the beneficiaries of the
receivables trust:
* carry on any business other than as trustee of the receivables
trust and will not engage in any activity or do anything at all
except:
(1) hold and exercise its rights in the trust property of the
receivables trust and perform its obligations for the
receivables trust's property;
(2) preserve, exercise and enforce any of its rights and
perform and observe its obligations under the declaration
of trust and trust cash management agreement, the
receivables sale
22
<PAGE>
agreement, the master definitions schedule, each supplement
and each other related document, including any documents
secured directly or indirectly by a series of investor
certificates issued under the receivables trust, any
mandate and other agreement about a Trust Account or a bank
account in which the receivables trustee has a beneficial
interest, the trust section 75 indemnity, and any other
document contemplated by and executed in connection with
any of the preceding documents. We refer to these documents
collectively as "relevant documents";
(3) pay dividends or make other distributions to the extent
required by applicable law;
(4) use, invest or dispose of any of its property or assets in
the manner provided in or contemplated by the relevant
documents; and
(5) perform any and all acts incidental to or otherwise
necessary in connection with (1), (2), (3) or (4) above;
* incur any debt other than debt that is described by this
prospectus or a supplement or contemplated by the relevant
documents;
* give any guarantee or indemnity in respect of any debt;
* create any mortgage, charge, pledge, lien or other encumbrance
securing any obligation of any person or other type of
preferential arrangement having similar effect, over any of its
assets, or use, invest, sell or otherwise dispose of any part of
its assets, including any uncalled capital, or undertaking,
present or future, other than as expressly contemplated by the
relevant documents;
* consolidate or merge with any other person or convey or transfer
its properties or assets to any person;
* permit the validity or effectiveness of the receivables trust to
be supplemented, amended, varied, terminated, postponed or
discharged -- other than as expressly contemplated in the
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement or in any
supplement;
* have any subsidiary; and
* have an interest in any bank account other than a Trust Account
and its own bank account opened for the purpose of receiving and
making payments to be made otherwise than in its capacity as
receivables trustee -- including paying the servicing fee to the
servicer or cash management fee to the trust cash manager and the
annual fee due to Bedell & Cristin Trust Company Limited for the
provision of corporate services to the receivables trustee.
Barclays Bank PLC
Barclays Bank PLC will perform the following roles in connection with the
issuance of the notes:
* initial transferor;
* servicer;
* cash manager for the receivables trust and the medium term notes;
* transferor beneficiary and excess interest beneficiary;
* swap counterparty; and
* lender under the expenses loan agreement.
Business
Barclays Bank PLC is a public limited company registered in England and
Wales under number 1026167. The liability of the members of Barclays Bank PLC
is limited. It has its registered and head office at 54 Lombard Street, London
EC3P 3AH. Barclays Bank PLC was incorporated on 7 August, 1925 under the
Colonial Bank Act 1925 and on 4 October, 1971 was registered as a company
limited by shares under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1967. Under the Barclays
Bank Act 1984, on 1 January, 1985 Barclays Bank PLC was re-registered as a
public limited company and its name was changed from "Barclays Bank
International Limited" to "Barclays Bank PLC".
Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiary undertakings are, together, called
the Barclays group. The Barclays group is a UK based financial services group
which undertakes mainly banking and investment banking business. In terms of
assets employed, it is one of the largest financial services groups in the
United Kingdom. The Barclays group also operates in the financial markets of
many other countries around the world. As well as servicing
23
<PAGE>
domestic markets, it provides co-ordinated global services to multinational
corporations and financial institutions from group operations in the world's
main financial centres. Its principal activities include retail and corporate
banking, investment banking and insurance. The whole of the issued ordinary
share capital of Barclays Bank PLC is owned by Barclays PLC which is the
ultimate holding company of the Barclays group.
The short-term unsecured debt obligations of Barclays Bank PLC are rated
A-1+ by Standard and Poor's, P-1 by Moody's and F-1+ by Fitch IBCA and the
long-term unsecured debt obligations of Barclays Bank PLC are rated AA by
Standard & Poor's, Aa2 by Moody's and AA+ by Fitch IBCA.
As of 30 June, 1999, Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries had total
assets of $397,436 million -- including total net loans and advances of
$240,613 million, total liabilities of $383,323 million -- including total
deposits of $257,013 million, and shareholders' funds or shareholders' equity
of $13,994 million -- comprising called-up share capital of $3,421 million,
equity reserves of $10,116 million and non-equity reserves of $456 million.
Barclays profit on ordinary activities before tax for the first half of 1999
was $1,598 million. As of 31 December, 1998, Barclays Bank PLC and its
subsidiaries had total assets of $361,572 million -- including total net loans
and advances of $218,633 million, total liabilities of $348,137 million --
including total deposits of $235,935 million, and shareholders' funds or
shareholders' equity of $13,351 million -- comprising called-up share capital
of $3,420 million, equity reserves of $9,498 million and non-equity reserves of
$433 million. Barclays profit on ordinary activities before tax for the full
year 1998 was $3,122 million.
The annual report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December, 1998 and
the interim report on Form 6-K for the semi-annual period ended 30 June, 1999
of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are on file with the Securities and
Exchange Commission. Barclays will provide, without charge to each person to
whom this prospectus is delivered, on the request of that person, a copy of the
Form 20-F and Form 6-K referred to in the previous sentence. Written requests
should be directed to: Barclays Bank PLC, 54 Lombard Street, London, EC3P 4AH,
England, Attention: Barclays Group Corporate Secretariat.
Neither the class A notes nor the class B notes will be obligations of
Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays PLC or any of their affiliates.
Year 2000 Readiness Disclosure
The Barclays Group Year 2000 Programme, initiated in 1996, is responsible
for Year 2000 projects across the Barclays group world-wide and is sponsored by
John Varley, Chief Executive, Retail Financial Services, who reports directly
to Matthew Barrett, Chief Executive of the Barclays group. A Programme Board of
executives representing all Barclays group businesses is chaired by David
Weymouth, the Managing Director, Barclays Service Provision, who reports
directly to the programme sponsor. The Barclays Group Year 2000 Programme
includes planning at the Barclaycard level.
Barclays has continued working to ensure that its mission critical
systems, those which could have an immediate and observable impact on the
Barclays group's customers and therefore its ability to continue to operate
effectively, can deal satisfactorily with the Year 2000 problem. All mission
critical information technology systems for its Barclaycard business, including
embedded systems, have now been tested and are Year 2000 ready.
Together with other banks and external network providers, Barclays has
taken part in successful testing of the key industry infrastructure in the
United Kingdom, including the cheque clearing and electronic payment systems,
credit cards and automatic teller machines. Barclays will continue to
participate in industry-wide testing throughout the remainder of 1999. Where
appropriate, similar joint testing is undertaken in other countries in which it
operates.
As a result of working closely with key suppliers the Barclays group has
been able to satisfy itself as to their current, or planned, state of readiness
and the support arrangements required for the cutover to the new year. The Year
2000 readiness of approximately 1,500 of Barclays' most critical counterparties
is being assessed centrally and procedures are in place to ensure that credit
exposure to those, and other banks with whom the Barclays group, has a
relationship, is managed with Year 2000 readiness in mind.
The Barclays group collates and analyses information on specific aspects
of the preparedness of countries in which it operates using data from a variety
of sources. Barclays continues to evaluate significant potential Year 2000
impacts on its funding capability and incorporates such risks into its capital
and liquidity plans.
Despite all these actions Barclays is not taking its progress for granted.
All systems changes are now subject to "Clean Management" processes in order to
prevent the Year 2000 problem being reintroduced. In order to further mitigate
the risk associated with the introduction of new systems a "Change Freeze"
regime has been implemented across the Barclays group, the first element of
which began in July.
It is a prudent planning scenario that there could be some disruption
caused directly or indirectly by the Year 2000 problem. Contingency plans
across the Barclays group -- including the business of Barclaycard -- are
24
<PAGE>
therefore being reviewed and updated, and are being augmented with continuity
plans to mitigate the possible effects of the Year 2000 problem. At the end of
July 1999, Barclays had completed an initial cutover plan which defines how the
Barclays group will operate across the change from 1999 into 2000. This includes
the establishment and testing of a network of command centres, internal and
external communications and participation in industry testing during the
non-business days. This work will continue to be refined during the remainder of
1999 incorporating market requirements.
The total cost of the Year 2000 Programme is estimated not to exceed $412
million, including $33 million of capitalised costs, for the four year period
ending December 2000. The total amount spent on the Year 2000 Programme to the
end of June 1999 was about $297 million, including $25 million of capitalised
costs, of which $58 million was incurred in the half year to June 1999. Year
2000 costs include correction, testing, third party assurance and contingency
planning.
Barclays expectations about completion of its Year 2000 remediation and
testing efforts, the anticipated costs to complete the project and anticipated
business, operational and financial risks to the Barclays group are subject to
a number of uncertainties. Barclays estimates of the cost of preparing for the
Year 2000 are based on numerous assumptions regarding future events including,
among others, expectations of third party modification plans and the nature and
amount of fixing and testing which may be required as well as continued
availability of trained personnel. For example, if the Barclays group is
affected by the inability of suppliers, service providers, counterparties,
customers, payment and settlement networks or market exchanges to deal
satisfactorily with the Year 2000 problem and to continue operations, or the
Barclays group is unsuccessful in identifying or finding all Year 2000 problems
in its critical operations, or if the Barclays group is unable to retain the
staff or third party consultants necessary to implement its Year 2000 Programme
at currently projected costs and timetables, the Barclays group's operations or
financial results could be materially affected.
Credit Card Usage in the United Kingdom
The United Kingdom credit card market is the largest and most developed in
Europe. The adult population of the United Kingdom is 45 million, and the total
population is 59 million. It is estimated that 41 per cent. of the adult
British population holds at least one credit card.
The number of credit, charge and corporate cards in issue in the UK has
grown steadily since 1976, and exceeded 42 million in August 1999. Of these, 26
million carried the VISA service mark and 16 million the MasterCard service
mark, with the remainder comprised of corporate and charge cards.
In the last five years, the number of cards in issue has risen sharply
with 16 million new cards issued in this period. Purchases in the UK, in the
twelve months to August 1999, totalled almost $128.5 billion. UK plastic card
borrowings have more than doubled since 1994, and were approximately $44.5
billion at the end of August 1999.
UK consumers use their card in a variety of ways. Figures from a trade
organisation in England show that in the year to August, the average
transaction was $87, with a high of $261 in the "Travel" sector, and low of $55
in "Food/drink". These two sectors account for, respectively, 13.7 per cent.
and 12.9 per cent. of total credit card spending.
Barclaycard and the Barclaycard Card Portfolio
General
Barclaycard, a division of Barclays Bank PLC, is the largest credit card
issuer in the UK. Barclaycard is based in Northampton, England and has in
excess of 4,000 employees in the UK and the rest of Europe. In 1966,
Barclaycard issued the UK's first credit card and today has the largest credit
card market share in the UK with $10,065,057,565 of billed balances as of 30
September, 1999. Barclaycard offers over 12 credit card products and services
to individual and corporate customers. The average customer has had a
Barclaycard for 13 years.
In September 1998, Barclaycard announced a three year cost efficiency
programme designed to meet world benchmarking standards. The programme, which
included the announcement of the loss of 1,100 jobs over a three year period of
which 800 are in the card issuing business, involves a major investment in
front office telephony systems. Also, Barclaycard is implementing plans to
invest in information based customer management technology and skills to
complement its brand-name led strategy.
25
<PAGE>
The receivables being securitised come from transactions made by
MasterCard and VISA card accountholders. These include premium accounts and
standard accounts from Barclaycard's portfolio of card accounts. Premium
accounts may carry higher credit limits and may offer different services to the
cardholders.
A cardholder may use his or her card for both purchases and cash advances.
A purchase is when cardholders use their cards to acquire goods or services. A
cash advance is when cardholders use their cards to get cash from a financial
institution or automated teller machine or using credit card cheques issued by
Barclaycard drawn against their VISA credit lines. Cardholders may draw against
their MasterCard or VISA credit lines by transferring balances owed to other
creditors to their Barclaycard accounts.
See "Servicing of Receivables and Trust Cash Management" for a description
of how Barclaycard services receivables. Barclaycard undertakes all the
processing and administering of accounts apart from cardholder payment
processing, which is done for Barclaycard by Great Universal Stores Home
Shopping Ltd., a company not affiliated with Barclaycard.
Description of Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd.
Barclaycard is a party to an agreement with Great Universal Stores Home
Shopping Ltd., under which they provide Barclaycard with certain processing
services. Under this agreement, Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd.
collects and processes all remittances arising from Barclaycard's credit and
charge card portfolio through facilities located in Bolton, England. Great
Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd. has been providing these services to
Barclaycard since February 1996. The Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd.
contract with Barclaycard is scheduled to expire in February 2001. At this
time, Barclaycard believes that, at the expiration of the contract, it will be
able either to enter into a comparable agreement at comparable pricing with
Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd. or with another qualified entity or
to take this function back within Barclaycard or another Barclays Bank PLC
division or affiliate.
Acquisition and Use of Card Accounts
Barclaycard uses a brand led value driven marketing strategy to focus new
origination campaigns. This process is assisted by the use of financial
forecasting models for each method it uses to solicit cardholders. The main way
Barclaycard recruits its customers is by introductions from Barclays branches,
but it also uses targeted mailing, media inserts and, in the last year, the
internet. In the future, the internet may increase substantially as a means of
recruiting new cardholders, although we are unable to predict how cardholders
recruited in this way will perform relative to those recruited by traditional
means.
When received, credit application details are screened by a combination of
system based checking, external credit bureau data and manual verification,
where appropriate.
Barclaycard uses a range of application scorecards to assess the credit
quality of new account applications, each tailored towards different market
segments. Scorecards are derived using a combination of factors including
Barclays account history, annual income, time in and place of residence,
current employment and credit bureau data. A proprietary cash flow model is
used to help determine the acceptance score levels for each scorecard.
Acceptance score levels are reviewed at least quarterly by committee.
Barclaycard aims to maximise enterprise value through managing the
relationship between volumes and margins. Recent yield experience reflects
adjustments to interest rate discounts and fee waiver thresholds to optimise
this position.
The initial limit of an account is determined using credit score and
income matrices. Initial limits are set at comparatively low levels. Limits are
increased in a controlled and regular manner using behaviour score and credit
bureau data. Behaviour scoring was introduced in 1989 and is one of the key
tools used by Barclaycard in risk management and underpins all risk decisions
applied to accounts once they have been opened. Barclaycard currently uses
behaviour scorecards developed in conjunction with the Fair, Isaacs
International UK Corporation, an independent firm experienced in developing
credit scoring models.
The behaviour scorecards are monitored using retrospective sampling which
allows a comparison of actual to expected performance over predetermined time
periods. This analysis allows the effectiveness of the scorecards to be
measured on a regular basis, and underpins the decisions on scorecard
development.
Credit limits are adjusted based upon Barclaycard's continuing evaluation
of an account holder's credit behaviour and suitability using Triad V, the
latest account management system developed by the Fair, Isaacs Companies.
Each cardholder has a card agreement with Barclaycard governing the terms
and conditions of their MasterCard or VISA account. Under each card agreement,
Barclaycard is able, if it gives advance notice to the cardholder, to add or
change any terms, conditions, services or features of the MasterCard or VISA
accounts at any time. This includes increasing or decreasing periodic finance
charges, or minimum payment terms. Each card agreement enables Barclaycard to
apply charges to current outstanding balances as well as to future
transactions.
26
<PAGE>
Barclaycard regularly reviews its credit and charge card agreement forms
to determine their compliance with applicable law and the suitability of their
terms and conditions. If they need to be updated or amended, this will be done
on a timetable consistent with the issues identified.
Description of Processing
Barclaycard settlement systems have links to VISA, MasterCard and Europay
to enable cardholder transactions to be transferred. MasterCard owns 15 per
cent. of Europay and Europay's members own the rest of Europay. Barclaycard
also acquires transactions from merchants. Transactions acquired in this way
relating to Barclaycard cardholders are passed to the card account processing
systems directly rather than via VISA or Europay.
Billing and Payment
Barclaycard generates and mails monthly statements to cardholders which
give details of the transactions for that account.
Cardholders can get up to 56 days interest free on purchases.
At the moment, cardholders must make a monthly minimum payment which is at
least equal to the greater of:
* 3 per cent. of the statement balance; and
* the stated minimum payment, which is currently approximately $8.
Notwithstanding the above, in the case of the Premier Card, Barclaycard's
charge card product, cardholders must pay the statement balance in full, which
is collected via direct debit 14 days after the date of the statement.
Certain eligible cardholders may be given the option to take a payment
holiday.
Barclaycard charges an annual fee on accounts which ranges from $16 to
$132 depending on the card product. In order to retain customers, Barclaycard
may waive this fee. Barclaycard also assesses a cash advance fee which is 1.5
per cent. of the cash advance with a minimum of $2.47.
The finance charges on purchases assessed monthly are calculated by
multiplying the account's average daily purchase balance over the billing
period by the applicable monthly rate. Finance charges are calculated on
purchases from the date the purchase is debited to the relevant account.
Monthly periodic finance charges are not assessed on purchases if all balances
shown in the billing statement are paid by the date they are due. This is
usually 25 days after the billing date.
The finance charges on cash advances assessed monthly are calculated by
multiplying the account's average daily balance of cash advances over the
billing period by the applicable monthly rate. Finance charges are calculated
on cash advances from the date of the transaction -- except for cash advances
by use of credit card cheques, where finance charges are usually calculated
from the date the transaction is debited to the relevant account.
The interest rates on Barclaycard's credit card accounts may be changed by
Barclaycard and are not linked to any index. This is market practice in the
United Kingdom. At the moment, the standard annual percentage rate of charge on
accounts ranges from 14.9 to 19.9 per cent., which includes the annual fee.
Barclaycard may sometimes offer temporary promotional rates. Barclaycard also
offers activation programmes and other incentives.
Barclaycard has an established pricing committee, consisting of senior
directors, which meets monthly and determines the pricing on Barclaycard's
credit and charge card accounts. The timing of meetings is broadly aligned to
meetings of the Bank of England monetary policy committee. Pricing decisions
are based upon:
* actual and anticipated movements in underlying interest rates;
* marketing strategies and recruitment campaigns; and
* competitive environment.
The committee considers pricing in its broadest sense covering interest
rates, annual fees, minimum payment amounts and other factors.
English law does not prescribe a maximum rate that may be charged as
interest for a debt. However, the obligation to make interest payments will not
be enforceable to the extent that the interest rate is extortionate. An
interest rate will be extortionate if it requires the debtor or a relative of
the debtor to make payments -- whether unconditionally or on certain
contingencies -- which are grossly exorbitant, or which otherwise grossly
contravene ordinary principles of fair dealing. Barclaycard believes that the
interest rates charged on its cards do not contravene any laws relating to
extortionate credit agreements.
27
<PAGE>
Delinquency and Loss Experience
An account is contractually delinquent if the minimum payment is not
received by the due date indicated on the customer's statement. Once an account
is recognised as delinquent a determination is made of the timing and type of
initial contact. This initial contact is typically between 5 and 60 days after
an account becomes delinquent and may be by statement, letter or telephone. The
basis for determining the timing of initial contact may include the age of the
account, the amount outstanding, the past account performance and behaviour
score and any external credit bureau information available.
Efforts to deal with delinquent receivables occur at each stage of
delinquency. Activities include statement messages, telephone calls and formal
letters. This process is normally completed after anywhere between 120 and 180
days of delinquency, at which point an account is charged-off. There is no
specific period of delinquency at the end of which an account must be charged-
off. The decision to charge-off is based upon an assessment of the likelihood
of recovery and rehabilitation of the individual account and may occur at any
point in the process. In certain circumstances, in particular where
notification of bankruptcy is received, charge-off occurs sooner and may be
immediate. In addition, there are instances where accounts are not charged-off
after 180 days of delinquency, including where an outstanding payment
protection insurance claim or voucher dispute exists.
A charge-off team within the relevant unit undertakes a review of all
accounts which have been flagged for charge-off to ensure that all possible
steps have been taken to bring the account current. Once charged-off, the
receivables are typically assigned to debt collection agencies to maximise
recoveries. Post charge-off account rehabilitation may occur where improved
credit circumstances and significant recovery occurs. However, charging
privileges can only be re-instated once the cardholder has been accepted for a
new account.
The following tables set forth the delinquency and loss experience of
Barclaycards portfolio of VISA and MasterCard credit and charge card accounts
denominated in pounds sterling -- called the "bank portfolio" -- for each of
the periods shown. The information in the tables is presented in U.S. dollars.
The bank portfolio includes platinum, gold and classic VISA and MasterCard
credit cards and the Premier VISA charge card. Because the receivables in the
securitised accounts -- called the "securitised portfolio" -- may in the future
only represent a portion of the bank portfolio, and because the economic
environment may change, we cannot assure you that the delinquency and loss
experience of the securitised portfolio will be the same as the historical
experience set forth below.
28
<PAGE>
Delinquency Experience
Bank Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
As of 30 September 1999 As of 30 June 1999 As of 31 March 1999
--------------------------- -------------------------- -------------------------
Percentage Percentage Percentage
Total of Total Total of Total Total of Total
Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables
-------------- ----------- ------------- ----------- ------------- ----------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Receivables Outstanding(1).... $10,065,057,565 $9,499,099,323 $8,973,349,282
Receivables Delinquent:
30--59 Days................... $176,466,009 1.75% $169,372,926 1.78% $159,005,521 1.77%
60--89 Days................... 89,957,585 0.89 91,169,176 0.96 82,383,378 0.92
90--119 Days.................. 59,125,523 0.59 58,347,562 0.61 50,775,261 0.57
120--149 Days................. 41,614,119 0.41 38,913,715 0.41 34,086,303 0.38
150 Days or more.............. 83,695,102 0.83 67,768,641 0.71 53,544,066 0.60
-------------- ----------- ------------- ----------- ------------- ----------
Total......................... $450,858,338 4.48% $425,572,021 4.48% $379,794,529 4.23%
============== =========== ============= =========== ============= ==========
Repayment Programme Accounts(2) $130,426,511 1.30% $112,231,351 1.18% $93,493,821 1.04%
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
As of 31 December 1998 As of 31 December 1997 As of 31 December 1996
---------------------------- --------------------------- --------------------------
Percentage Percentage Percentage
Total of Total Total of Total Total of Total
Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables
------------- ------------- ------------ ------------- ----------- -------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Receivables Outstanding(1).... $9,055,290,590 $7,930,756,625 $7,140,888,786 $6,461,648,431
Receivables Delinquent:
30--59 Days................... $158,440,195 1.75% $102,971,647 1.30% $88,452,853 1.24%
60--89 Days................... 79,645,343 0.88% 42,549,610 0.54 39,576,828 0.55
90--119 Days.................. 47,733,162 0.53 27,953,051 0.35 26,966,780 0.38
120--149 Days................. 32,505,994 0.36 19,006,742 0.24 18,138,477 0.25
150 Days or more.............. 48,724,641 0.54 51,654,124 0.65 4,958,264 0.07
------------- ------------- ------------ ------------- ----------- -------------
Total......................... $367,049,335 4.05% $244,135,174 3.08% 178,093,203 2.49%
============= ============= ============ ============= =========== =============
Repayment Programme Accounts(2) $74,566,479 0.82% $34,850,751 0.44% $21,883,597 0.31%
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
As of 31 December 1995 As of 31 December 1994
--------------------------- -----------------------
Percentage Percentage
Total of Total Total of Total
Receivables Receivables Receivables Receivables
------------ ------------- ----------- -----------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Receivables Outstanding(1).... $5,700,933,862
Receivables Delinquent:
30--59 Days................... 82,072,543 1.27% $55,220,426 0.97%
60--89 Days................... 33,175,988 0.51 20,306,886 0.36
90--119 Days.................. 23,202,032 0.36 11,534,906 0.20
120--149 Days................. 15,649,102 0.24 6,521,262 0.11
150 Days or more.............. 4,338,728 0.07 1,431,146 0.03
------------ ------------- ----------- -----------
Total......................... $158,438,394 2.45% $95,014,627 1.67%
============ ============= =========== ===========
Repayment Programme Accounts(2) $19,993,871 0.31% $23,551,052 0.41%
</TABLE>
(1) The receivables outstanding on the accounts consist of all amounts due
from cardholders as posted to the accounts as of the date shown.
(2) Repayment programmes are arrangements that are made with customers who
fall into financial difficulty. They are agreed as part of a customer
assistance tool set which is targeted at managing the risk on those
customers who are in difficulty whilst maintaining the customer
relationship. They are subject to minimum regular monthly payments.
In 1997, the introduction of the Triumph computer system combined with a
re-engineering of the collection process, resulted in increased flexibility in
the management of 150 or more days past due. The new system allowed the
tracking and managing of accounts further into their delinquency profile as
opposed to the historic practice of charging-off accounts at this stage of
delinquency.
29
<PAGE>
Loss Experience
Bank Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Quarter Ended
--------------------------------------------------------
30 September
1999 30 June 1999 31 March 1999
---------------- ---------------- ----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Average receivables outstanding(1). $9,939,601,739 $9,379,117,500 $8,943,070,232
Total gross charge-offs(2)......... 92,939,579 90,392,464 122,399,583
Recoveries(3)...................... 26,443,617 26,696,866 24,253,420
Total net charge-offs(4)........... 66,495,962 63,695,597 98,146,163
---------------- ---------------- ----------------
Total net charge-offs as a
percentage of average 2.68% 2.72% 4.39%
receivables outstanding (5)........
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended 31 December
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
--------------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Average receivables outstanding(1). $8,226,003,597 $7,175,924,182 $6,592,008,620 $5,950,392,038 $5,176,315,073
Total gross charge-offs(2)......... 290,734,015 185,815,933 223,311,193 164,835,454 137,627,293
Recoveries(3)...................... 93,454,157 82,096,147 90,092,899 85,799,144 85,135,953
Total net charge-offs(4)........... 197,279,858 103,719,786 133,218,293 79,036,310 52,491,340
--------------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
Total net charge-offs as a
percentage of average
receivables outstanding (5)........ 2.40% 1.45% 2.02% 1.33% 1.01%
</TABLE>
(1) Average receivables outstanding is the average monthly receivable balance
during the periods indicated.
(2) Total gross charge-offs are total principal and interest charge-offs
before recoveries and do not include the amount of any reductions in
average receivables outstanding due to fraud, returned goods, customer
disputes or other miscellaneous credit adjustments.
(3) Recoveries include all monies received after charge-off, including any
monies received as a result of any sale or other disposition of
receivables in charged-off accounts.
(4) Total net charge-offs are total gross charge-offs less recoveries.
(5) All percentages shown are annualised.
In Barclaycard's opinion, the causes of the increase in delinquency and
net charge-off experience during 1998 and the first quarter of 1999 are
twofold:
* In late 1997, Barclaycard introduced a customer relationship-based
approach to delinquency, driven by Barclaycard's perception of the
associated credit risk of a customer rather than the time period
of delinquency. Low credit risk accounts are actioned later,
resulting in increased portfolio delinquency levels up to 90 days
past due. High risk accounts, however, are actioned at an earlier
stage of delinquency, resulting in short term delinquencies being
weighted towards lower credit risk accounts.
* Since the first quarter of 1998, and markedly since the third
quarter of 1998, Barclaycard have experienced adverse economic
conditions as a result of a slowdown in the UK economy. The
delinquency and net charge-off experience during 1998 and the
first quarter of 1999 reflects this economic deterioration.
Provision for Bad and Doubtful Debt
Bank Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Quarter Ended
--------------------------------------------------
30 September
1999 30 June 1999 31 March 1999
-------------- -------------- --------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Average receivables outstanding(1)........... $9,939,601,739 $9,379,117,500 $8,943,070,232
Net charge(2)................................ 57,594,372 59,835,278 88,843,383
Net charge as a percentage of
average receivables outstanding(3)........... 2.32% 2.55% 3.97%
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended 31 December
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
-------------- -------------- -------------- -------------- --------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Average receivables outstanding(1)........... $8,226,003,597 $7,175,924,182 $6,592,008,620 $5,950,392,038 $5,176,315,073
Net charge(2)................................ 189,666,854 232,527,088 166,021,366 108,213,906 86,444,674
Net charge as a percentage of
average receivables outstanding(3)........... 2.31% 3.24% 2.52% 1.82% 1.67%
</TABLE>
(1) Average receivables outstanding is the average monthly receivable balance
during the period indicated.
(2) The net charge includes both specific and general charges and releases for
the provision for bad and doubtful debt on the bank portfolio. As general
provisions are normally adjusted on a semi-annual basis, not quarterly,
the total general release undertaken in the first half of 1999 has been
evenly reapportioned in accordance with Barclaycard management's judgement
in order to more fully reflect the quarterly positions.
(3) All percentages shown are annualised.
30
<PAGE>
The Receivables
Assignment of Receivables to the Receivables Trustee
Barclaycard as the initial transferor will offer on the closing date to
the receivables trustee an assignment of all receivables that have arisen or
will arise in all designated accounts as of 31 October, 1999 -- called the
"pool selection date". An account of the initial transferor will be designated
as a "designated account" if the account has been originated under and
continues to conform to the credit and charge card products described in this
prospectus and has not been identified on the initial transferor's system as
being excluded from the offer. Only credit and charge card products available
to the transferor's individual accountholders may be designated.
If for any reason there are receivables from designated accounts that
cannot be assigned to the receivables trustee, the transferor will hold those
receivables, and any collections on those receivables, on trust for the
receivables trustee. These collections will be treated as if the receivables
had been properly assigned.
Under the terms of the receivables securitisation agreement, the
transferor also has the right to select accounts that conform to the conditions
in the second paragraph above and that are not designated and nominate them as
designated accounts by offering the receivables trustee an assignment of all
future and existing receivables in these accounts. These accounts are called
"additional accounts". An additional account will be treated as a designated
account from the date on which its receivables are offered to the receivables
trustee. This date is called the "addition date". When additional accounts are
nominated the transferor must, amongst other things:
* provide the receivables trustee with a certificate stating that it
is solvent;
* confirm, in the document that offers to assign the receivables in
the additional accounts to the receivables trustee, that:
(1) the offer of the receivables in the additional accounts
meets the Maximum Addition Amount criteria; or
(2) if the offer does not meet the Maximum Addition Amount
criteria, the rating agencies have confirmed that the
designation of additional accounts will not result in a
reduction or withdrawal of the current rating of any
outstanding debt that is secured directly or indirectly by
the receivables in the receivables trust, including your
notes.
* obtain a legal opinion addressed to the receivables trustee about
any receivables from a jurisdiction outside of the United Kingdom.
Any of these preconditions may be waived by the receivables trustee if the
rating agencies confirm in writing that the waiver will not result in the
reduction or withdrawal of their rating on any related beneficiary debt. At the
time that it is nominated, each additional account must also meet the
eligibility criteria as at the time of its designation. These criteria are
explained in "-- Representations" below. Additional accounts may have been
originated or purchased using underwriting standards that are different from
the underwriting standards used by Barclaycard in selecting the original
designated accounts. As a result, additional accounts that are selected in
future may not have the same credit quality.
"Maximum Addition Amount" means, for any addition date, the number of
additional accounts originated by the transferor after the pool selection date
and nominated as additional accounts without prior rating agency confirmation
that would not either:
* for any three consecutive monthly periods starting with the
monthly period beginning on the first day of the month before the
pool selection date, exceed 15 per cent. of the number of
designated accounts at the end of the ninth monthly period before
the start of such three monthly periods;
* for any twelve-month period, be equal to 20 per cent. of the
designated accounts as of the first day of the twelve-month period
or, if later, as of the cut-off date.
Notwithstanding what we just said, if the total principal balance of
receivables in the additional accounts described in either of the two prior
bullet points is more than either:
(1) 15 per cent. of the total amount of eligible principal receivables
determined as of the later of the pool selection date and the
first day of the third preceding monthly period, minus the amount
of eligible principal receivables in each additional account that
was nominated since the later of the closing date and the first
day of the third preceding monthly period -- calculated for each
additional account on its addition date; or
(2) 20 per cent. of the total amount of eligible principal receivables
as of the later of the closing date and the first day of the
calendar year in which the addition date occurs, minus the total
amount
31
<PAGE>
of eligible principal receivables in each additional account that
was nominated since the later of the closing date and the first
day of the calendar year, calculated for each additional account
as of its addition date,
then the Maximum Addition Amount will be the lesser of (1) or (2) above.
Every offer of receivables to the receivables trustee under the
receivables securitisation agreement will comprise offers of the following:
* all existing receivables in the designated accounts;
* all future principal receivables under the designated accounts,
until the first to occur of (1) the time a designated account
becomes a redesignated account, (2) the receivables trust is
terminated or (3) an Insolvency Event occurs;
* all future finance charge receivables under those designated
accounts that have accrued on receivables that have been assigned
to the receivables trustee as described in the two prior bullet
points;
* all amounts recoverable on future receivables -- including from
the reassignment of charged-off receivables to Barclaycard;
* if capable of being assigned, the benefit of any guarantee or
insurance policy obtained by the transferor for any obligations
owed by a cardholder on a designated account; and
* in the case of the initial offer only, the benefit of all amounts
representing Acquired Interchange.
The transferor will ensure that each redesignated account is identified
on the transferor's computer system on the date that a designated account
becomes a redesignated account.
Throughout the term of the receivables trust, the designated accounts from
which the receivables will arise will be the designated accounts plus any
additional accounts designated by the transferor from time to time, minus any
redesignated accounts.
Existing receivables and future receivables arising under the designated
accounts will be principal receivables or finance charge receivables. Principal
receivables are receivables that are not finance charge receivables. Principal
receivables are amounts owing by cardholders for the purchase of merchandise or
services and from cash advances, including foreign exchange commissions charged
for merchandise and services payable, or cash advances denominated in, a
currency other than sterling. They are reduced by any credit balance on the
designated account on that day.
"Finance charge receivables" are amounts owing from cardholders for
transaction fees, periodic finance charges, charges for credit insurance,
special fees and annual fees -- see "-- Special Fees" and "-- Annual Fees"
below -- and any interchange and Discount Option Receivables.
Under the receivables securitisation agreement, each offer of receivables
made by the transferor will be accepted by paying the purchase price for the
offered receivables. Payment for existing receivables will have to be made no
later than the business day following the date on which the offer is made.
Alternatively, the parties can agree to a longer period of time for payment.
Payment for future receivables will be made no later than two business days
after the date of processing for those receivables. Alternatively, the parties
can agree to a longer period if the rating agencies consent. This payment will
also include payment for the assignment of the benefit of Acquired Interchange
to the receivables trustee.
A "business day" will be a day other than a Saturday, a Sunday or a day on
which banking institutions in London, England or New York, New York are
authorised or obliged by law or executive order to be closed.
It has been agreed between the transferor and the receivables trustee
that, for the purposes of the offer made on the closing date:
(1) the receivables trustee will be entitled to use the collections in
the designated accounts before the date that the offer is accepted
as if the offer had been accepted on the closing date;
(2) the amount payable on the closing date for the designated accounts
will equal the outstanding face amount of all existing principal
receivables, together with an obligation of the receivables
trustee to pay for all future receivables generated on the
designated accounts that are part of the offer on an ongoing,
daily basis when those future receivables are generated.
The payments in (2) will be net of any payments made in (1), subject to a
minimum of L1.
32
<PAGE>
The amount payable by the receivables trustee to the transferor if it
chooses to accept an offer or to make payment for any future receivables, will
be reduced by the amount of any shortfall in the amount funded by the
transferor as a beneficiary, providing that the Transferor Interest is
increased accordingly.
Redesignation and Removal of Accounts
Each designated account will continue to be a designated account until
such time as the transferor reclassifies it as being no longer a designated
account -- called a "redesignated account".
A designated account becomes a redesignated account on the date specified
by the transferor. No designated account will become a redesignated account
this way unless (1) it has become a cancelled account, a defaulted account or a
zero balance account or (2) the transferor delivers an officer's certificate
confirming the following conditions are satisfied:
* the redesignation will not cause a pay out event to occur;
* the transferor has represented that its selection procedures for
the selection of designated accounts for redesignation are not
believed to have any material adverse effect on any investor
beneficiary;
* the rating agencies have confirmed that the action will not result
in a downgrade in rating of any outstanding debt that is secured
directly or indirectly by the receivables in the receivables
trust; and
* the transferor and the servicer can certify that collections equal
to the outstanding face amount of each principal receivable and
the outstanding balance of each finance charge receivable have
been received by the receivables trustee on all receivables
assigned for that account other than any receivables charged off
as uncollectable.
A "cancelled account" is a designated account that has had its charging
privileges permanently withdrawn. A "defaulted account" is a designated account
where the receivables have been charged off by the servicer as uncollectable in
line with the credit card guidelines or the usual servicing procedures of the
servicer for similar credit and charge card accounts. A "zero balance account"
is a designated account that has had a nil balance of receivables for a
considerable period of time and has been identified by the servicer as a zero
balance account under the credit and charge card guidelines or the usual
servicing procedures of the servicer.
Redesignated accounts will include all accounts that become cancelled
accounts, defaulted accounts and zero balance accounts from the date on which
they are redesignated in any of these ways. The principal receivables that
exist before the date of redesignation will be paid for by the receivables
trustee. Any future receivables that come into existence after that time will
not be assigned to the receivables trustee as set out in the receivables
securitisation agreement. No receivable that has been assigned to the
receivables trustee will be reassigned to the transferor except in the limited
circumstances described under the heading "-- Representations".
Until money has been received for the assigned receivables, that have not
been charged off, a reassigned account wil not be identified as having been
removed. The amount identified will be equal to the outstanding face amount of
each principal receivable and finance charge receivable. Once these payments
have been received or any reassignment has occurred, the account will be
identified to indicate that it has become a removed account.
Discount Option Receivables
The transferor may, by giving at least thirty days' prior notice to the
servicer, the receivables trustee and the rating agencies, nominate a fixed or
variable percentage -- called the "Discount Percentage" -- of principal
receivables in the designated accounts. If a Discount Percentage has been
nominated previously, an extension to that period can be applied for in this
way. From the date and for the length of time stated in the notice:
* the amount payable by the receivables trustee to accept an offer
of receivables will be reduced by a percentage amount equal to the
Discount Percentage; and
* a percentage of the principal receivables equal to the Discount
Percentage will be treated by the receivables trustee as finance
charge receivables. These are called "Discount Option
Receivables".
The nomination of a Discount Percentage or increase in the time it is in
place will be effective only if the rating agencies consent to the proposed
nomination or increase and confirm that it will not result in the downgrade or
withdrawal of the current rating of any debt that is secured directly or
indirectly by the receivables in the receivables trust, including your notes.
The transferor must also provide the receivables trustee with a certificate
confirming:
33
<PAGE>
* that the performance of the portfolio of designated accounts, in
their reasonable opinion, is not generating adequate cash flows
for the beneficiaries of the receivables trust and the size of the
Discount Percentage is not intended solely to accelerate
distributions to the excess interest beneficiary; and
* that the transferor is solvent and will remain so following the
nomination or increase.
The transferor may have different reasons to designate a Discount
Percentage. The finance charge collections on the designated accounts may
decline for various reasons or may stay constant. The notes have interest rates
that are variable and that could increase. Any of these variables could cause a
Series 99-1 Pay Out Event to occur based in part on the amount of finance
charge collections and the interest rate on the notes. The transferor could
avoid the occurrence of this Series 99-1 Pay Out Event by designating a
Discount Percentage, causing an increase in the amount of finance charge
collections. The transferor, however, is under no obligation to designate a
Discount Percentage and we cannot assure you that the transferor would
designate a Discount Percentage to avoid a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event.
Special Fees
The transferor may in the future charge special fees on its credit or
charge card accounts. These special fees may be assessed at one time or on an
ongoing basis. Any special fees that are charged on designated accounts will be
regarded as finance charge receivables and collections of these special fees
will be treated as finance charge collections. The transferor may, however,
decide that these special fees will be viewed as principal receivables and
collections on them will be allocated accordingly. This can be done only if the
transferor certifies that it has an opinion from legal counsel that the special
fees amount to repayment, for United Kingdom tax purposes, in whole or in part
of an advance to a cardholder.
Interchange
Members participating in the VISA and MasterCard associations receive fees
called "interchange" as partial compensation, for amongst other things, taking
credit risk and absorbing fraud losses. Under the Visa and MasterCard systems,
interchange is passed from the banks that clear the transactions for merchants
to card issuing banks. Interchange fees are calculated as a percentage of the
amount of a credit or charge card transaction for the purchase of goods or
services. This percentage varies from time to time.
On each transfer date the transferor will deposit into the Trustee
Collection Account an amount equal to the interchange received for the
preceding monthly period. This amount is called the "Acquired Interchange" and
is calculated as follows:
Acquired Interchange = A X B
where
A = total interchange paid or payable to the transferor for that period,
and
B = total charges eligible for interchange in designated accounts for
that period
-----------------------------------------------------------------
total charges eligible for interchange in all card accounts
owned by the transferor for that period
Annual Fees
Receivables assigned or to be assigned to the receivables trustee include
annual fees on the designated accounts. All annual fees are and will be treated
as finance charge receivables. The transferor may, however, by notice to the
servicer, the receivables trustee and the rating agencies designate in a
certificate to the receivables trustee that annual fees will be treated as
principal receivables. No designation of annual fees as principal receivables
will be effective unless the transferor has certified that it has received
legal advice that these annual fees will amount, for United Kingdom tax
purposes, to repayment of an advance to a cardholder. For the purposes of
series 99-1, all annual fees are treated as finance charge receivables.
Reductions in Receivables, Early Collections and Credit Adjustments
If a principal receivable that has been assigned to the receivables
trustee is reduced -- for reasons other than because of Section 75 of the
Consumer Credit Act or a credit adjustment -- after the offer date, because of
set-off, counterclaim or any other matter between the cardholder and the
transferor, and the transferor has received a benefit, then the transferor will
pay an amount equal to that reduction to the receivables trustee. Similarly, if
an existing receivable has already been assigned and the transferor has
received full or partial payment of that receivable before the date that the
receivable was purportedly assigned, then the transferor will pay the amount of
that collection to the receivables trustee.
34
<PAGE>
If any principal receivable assigned to the receivables trustee is reduced
for credit adjustment reasons after the offer date, then the transferor will
pay that amount to the receivables trustee. A credit adjustment is the
outstanding face amount of a principal receivable that:
* was created by virtue of a sale of merchandise that was
subsequently refused or returned by a cardholder or against which
the cardholder has asserted any defence, dispute, set-off or
counterclaim;
* is reduced because the cardholder had received a rebate, refund,
charge-back or adjustment; or
* is fraudulent or counterfeit.
Alternatively, instead of paying these amounts to the receivables trustee,
the transferor can reduce the Transferor Interest by the amount of the credit
adjustment, but not below zero.
Representations
Each offer of receivables to the receivables trustee will include
representations by the transferor about the offer of the existing receivables
and the future receivables. The representations for the existing receivables
will be given as of pool selection date or an addition date, as applicable, and
the representations for the future receivables will be given on the date they
are processed, and will include, in each case, that:
* the receivable is an eligible receivable and has arisen from an
eligible account in the amount specified in the offer or daily
activity report, as applicable;
* each assignment passes good and marketable title for that
receivable to the receivables trustee, together with the benefit of
all collections and other rights in connection with it, free from
encumbrances of any person claiming on it through the transferor to
the receivables and, unless such receivable does not comply with
the Consumer Credit Act, nothing further needs to be done to
enforce these rights in the courts of England and Wales, Scotland
or Northern Ireland, or any permitted additional jurisdiction,
without the participation of the transferor, except for payment of
any United Kingdom stamp duty and giving a notice of assignment to
the cardholders and subject to any limitations arising on
enforcement in the jurisdiction of the relevant cardholder;
* the assignment complies with all applicable laws on the date of
assignment; and
* the transferor did not use any procedures adverse to the
beneficiaries of the receivables trust in selecting the designated
accounts from Barclaycard's portfolio of card accounts.
If a representation relating to the eligibility criteria given in
connection with any principal receivable proves to be incorrect when made, then
the transferor is obliged to pay the receivables trustee an amount equal to the
face value of that receivable on the following business day. A receivable of
this type will afterwards be treated as an ineligible receivable.
The transferor's obligation to pay amounts due as a result of any breach
of a representation can be fulfilled, in whole or in part, by a reduction in
the amount of the Transferor Interest. The Transferor Interest, however, may
not be reduced below zero. If the transferor meets a payment obligation of this
type, the receivables trustee will have no further claim against the transferor
for the breached representation. However, a breach of a representation may
result in a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event.
If:
* all principal receivables arising under a designated account
become ineligible as a result of incorrect representations;
* that account has become a redesignated account; and
* the transferor has complied with the payment obligations for the
principal receivables;
then the transferor can require the receivables trustee to reassign all those
receivables to the transferor.
The receivables trustee has not made and will not make any initial or
periodic examination of the receivables to determine if they are eligible
receivables or if the transferor's representations and warranties are true.
The term "eligible account" means, as of the pool selection date or on an
addition date, a credit or charge card account:
* where the cardholder is not a company or partnership for the
purposes of Section 349(2) of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act
1988;
* which was in existence and maintained with the transferor before
it became a designated account;
* which is payable in pounds sterling or the currency of the
permitted additional jurisdiction where the account is in a
permitted additional jurisdiction, as applicable;
35
<PAGE>
* which is governed by one of the transferor's standard form card
agreements or, if it was acquired by the transferor, it is
originated on contractual terms not materially different from the
standard form;
* which is governed in whole or in part by the Consumer Credit Act
and creates legal, valid and binding obligations between the
transferor and the cardholder which, except in the case of an
account on which restricted eligible receivables arise, is
enforceable, subject to bankruptcy laws, general principles of
equity and limitations on enforcement in any cardholder
jurisdiction and was otherwise created and complies with all other
applicable laws;
* where the cardholder's most recent billing address is located in
England, Wales, Scotland, Northern Ireland, or a permitted
additional jurisdiction or a restricted additional jurisdiction;
* which has not been classified by the transferor as counterfeit,
cancelled, fraudulent, stolen or lost;
* which has been originated or purchased by the transferor;
* which has been operated in all material respects in accordance
with the transferor's policies and procedures and usual practices
for the operation of its credit and charge card business; and
* the receivables in respect of which have not been charged off by
the transferor on the date the account is specified as a
designated account.
If all these conditions have not been satisfied, then an account may still
be an eligible account if each rating agency gives their approval.
A "restricted eligible receivable" is a receivable arising on an eligible
account, the terms of which fail to comply with the Consumer Credit Act, such
that a court would have no discretion to grant a court order.
A "permitted additional jurisdiction" is a jurisdiction -- other than
England and Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland -- agreed by the transferor
and the receivables trustee, and which each rating agency has confirmed in
writing that its inclusion as a permitted additional jurisdiction will not
result in its withdrawing or reducing its rating on any related beneficiary
debt.
A "restricted additional jurisdiction" is a jurisdiction -- other than
England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland or a permitted additional
jurisdiction -- which together with each other account with a billing address
in that jurisdiction and any other jurisdiction other than England, Wales,
Scotland, Northern Ireland or a permitted additional jurisdiction represent
less than 5 per cent. by outstanding receivables balance.
A "notice of assignment" means a notice given to a cardholder of the
assignment of the receivables -- and the benefit of any guarantees -- to the
receivables trustee.
An "eligible receivable" means a receivable that:
* has arisen under an eligible account;
* was originated under one of the transferor's standard form credit
or charge card agreements and is governed, in whole or in part, by
the Consumer Credit Act, or else, if the related account was
acquired by the transferor, contractual terms that are materially
the same as the standard form credit or charge card agreements and
are governed, in whole or in part, by the Consumer Credit Act;
* was otherwise created in compliance with all other applicable
laws;
* was originated in accordance with the transferor's policies and
procedures and usual practices for its credit and charge card
business;
* is not a defaulted receivable as at the pool selection date or
addition date, as applicable;
* is free of any encumbrances exercisable against the transferor
arising under or through the transferor or any of its affiliates;
* to which the transferor has good and marketable title;
* is the legal obligation of the cardholder, enforceable -- except
in the case of restricted eligible receivables -- in accordance
with the terms of the credit or charge card agreement, subject to
bankruptcy, general principles of equity and limitations on
enforcement in any cardholder jurisdiction; and
* is not currently subject to any defence, dispute, event, set-off,
counterclaim or enforcement order.
As is market practice in the United Kingdom for credit and charge card
securitisation transactions, principal receivables that are delinquent will
still constitute eligible receivables if they comply with the eligibility
requirements. See the table captioned: "Delinquency Experience -- Bank
Portfolio" in "Barclaycard and the Barclaycard Card Portfolio -- Delinquency
and Loss Experience" below for data showing the percentage of delinquent
receivables.
36
<PAGE>
"Ineligible receivables" means principal receivables which arise under a
designated account but which do not comply with all the criteria set out in the
definition of eligible receivables as at the pool selection date or an addition
date, as applicable.
Amendments to Card Agreement and Card Guidelines
The transferor may amend the terms and conditions of its standard form
card agreements or change its policies and procedures and usual practices for
its general card business. These amendments may include reducing or increasing
the amount of monthly minimum required payments required or may involve changes
to periodic finance charges or other charges that would apply to the designated
accounts. See "Risk Factors: A Change in the Terms of the Receivables May
Adversely Affect the Amount or Timing of Collections and Could Cause an Early
Redemption or a Downgrade of Your Notes".
Summary of Securitised Portfolio as of 30 September, 1999
The tables that follow summarise the securitised portfolio by various
criteria as of the billing dates of accounts in the month ending on 30
September, 1999. Because the future composition of the securitised portfolio
may change over time, these tables are not necessarily indicative of the
composition of the securitised portfolio at any time after 30 September, 1999.
Composition by Account Balance
Securitised Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Percentage of
Total Number of Total Number of Percentage of
Account Balance Range Accounts Accounts Total Receivables Total Receivables
- ------------------------------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Credit Balance................................ 160,237 1.88% $(17,289,623) (0.18)%
No Balance.................................... 2,879,091 33.80 0 0.00
$00.01 to $5,000.00........................... 5,045,876 59.24 6,413,167,437 65.75
$5,000.01 to $10,000.00....................... 360,481 4.23 2,424,488,810 24.86
$10,000.01 to $15,000.00...................... 58,916 0.69 694,502,073 7.12
$15,000.01 to $20,000.00...................... 9,325 0.11 156,582,981 1.61
$20,000.01 to $25,000.00...................... 2,019 0.02 44,436,059 0.46
$25,000.01 to $30,000.00...................... 632 0.01 17,111,085 0.18
$30,000.01 to $35,000.00...................... 274 0.00 8,774,712 0.09
$35,000.01 to $40,000.00...................... 112 0.00 4,190,686 0.04
$40,000.01 to $45,000.00...................... 67 0.00 2,843,619 0.03
$45,000.01 to $50,000.00...................... 33 0.00 1,571,977 0.02
$50,000.01 and over........................... 51 0.00 3,949,575 0.04
----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
TOTAL......................................... 8,517,114 100.00% $9,754,329,392 100.00%
================= ================= ================= =================
</TABLE>
Composition by Credit Limit
Securitised Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Percentage of
Total Number of Total Number of Percentage of
Credit Limit Range Accounts Accounts Total Receivables Total Receivables
- ----------------------------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Less than $5,000.00........................... 5,737,719 67.37% $3,550,352,336 36.40%
$5,000.01 to $10,000.00....................... 1,974,103 23.18 3,522,997,275 36.12
$10,000.01 to $15,000.00...................... 543,308 6.38 1,798,721,150 18.44
$15,000.01 to $20,000.00...................... 193,329 2.27 586,507,984 6.01
$20,000.01 to $25,000.00...................... 41,479 0.49 166,561,871 1.71
$25,000.01 to $30,000.00...................... 15,802 0.19 61,590,172 0.63
$30,000.01 to $35,000.00...................... 7,270 0.09 35,522,596 0.36
$35,000.01 to $40,000.00...................... 1,446 0.02 8,398,308 0.09
$40,000.01 to $45,000.00...................... 1,380 0.02 9,613,627 0.10
$45,000.01 to $50,000.00...................... 583 0.01 5,447,231 0.06
$50,000.01 and over........................... 695 0.01 8,616,842 0.09
----------------- ----------------- ----------------- -----------------
TOTAL......................................... 8,517,114 100.00% $9,754,329,392 100.00%
================= ================= ================= =================
</TABLE>
37
<PAGE>
Composition by Account Age
Securitised Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Percentage of
Total Number of Total Number of Percentage of
Account Age Accounts Accounts Total Receivables Total Receivables
----------------------------- ------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Not more than 2 Years....................... 1,245,685 14.63% $ 1,178,432,715 12.08%
Over 2 Years to 4 Years..................... 1,102,321 12.94 1,160,674,307 11.90
Over 4 Years to 8 Years..................... 1,810,457 21.26 1,908,461,212 19.57
Over 8 Years to 12 Years.................... 1,270,942 14.92 1,198,338,702 12.29
Over 12 Years to 16 Years................... 931,716 10.94 1,377,029,619 14.12
Over 16 Years to 20 Years................... 808,899 9.50 1,166,112,612 11.95
Over 20 Years............................... 1,347,094 15.82 1,765,280,225 18.10
------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
TOTAL....................................... 8,517,114 100.00% $ 9,754,329,392 100.00%
================== ================== ================== ==================
</TABLE>
Geographic Distribution of Accounts
Securitised Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Percentage of
Total Number of Total Number of Percentage of
Region Accounts Accounts Total Receivables Total Receivables
----------------------------- ------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
London...................................... 2,938,805 34.50% $ 3,595,813,966 36.86%
Central Midlands............................ 1,042,966 12.25 1,142,177,199 11.71
Lancashire.................................. 709,807 8.33 824,490,450 8.45
East........................................ 601,116 7.06 655,494,414 6.72
Yorkshire................................... 549,187 6.45 621,142,900 6.37
South....................................... 556,675 6.54 604,524,051 6.20
Wales....................................... 564,373 6.63 590,675,460 6.06
Northeast................................... 367,388 4.31 411,253,846 4.22
West Country................................ 286,823 3.37 293,611,393 3.01
Scotland.................................... 222,433 2.61 303,235,228 3.11
Southwest................................... 145,629 1.71 166,942,392 1.71
Southeast................................... 123,663 1.45 145,854,590 1.50
Border Regions.............................. 93,952 1.10 98,588,374 1.01
Northern Ireland............................ 51,036 0.60 65,748,174 0.67
Other....................................... 59,592 0.70 69,527,187 0.71
Non UK...................................... 203,669 2.39 165,249,767 1.69
------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
TOTAL....................................... 8,517,114 100.00% $ 9,754,329,392 100.00%
================== ================== ================== ==================
</TABLE>
Composition by Product Line
Securitised Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Percentage of
Total Number of Total Number of Percentage of
Product Accounts Accounts Total Receivables Total Receivables
----------------------------- ------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Classic Visa................................ 5,902,944 69.31% $ 6,633,860,699 68.01%
Mastercard.................................. 2,027,774 23.81 1,468,560,343 15.06
Platinum.................................... 387,784 4.55 1,413,746,165 14.49
Premier..................................... 89,591 1.05 117,489,000 1.20
Gold Visa................................... 41,504 0.49 79,673,803 0.82
Other....................................... 67,517 0.79 40,999,381 0.42
------------------ ------------------ ------------------ ------------------
TOTAL....................................... 8,517,114 100.00% $ 9,754,329,392 100.00%
================== ================== ================== ==================
</TABLE>
38
<PAGE>
Maturity Assumptions
The Series 99-1 Supplement to the declaration of trust and trust cash
management agreement will provide that the MTN issuer will not receive
distributions of principal collections on the Class A Investor Interest, for
payment of principal on the class A MTN, until the series 99-1 scheduled
redemption date or earlier if a Pay Out Event results in the start of the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period. The MTN issuer
will also not begin to receive distributions of principal collections on the
Class B Investor Interest, for payment of principal on the class B MTN, until
the final payment of principal on the class A MTN has been made, and will not
begin to receive distributions of principal collections on the Class C Investor
Interest, for payment of principal on the class C MTN, until the final payment
of principal on the class B MTN has been made.
On each transfer date during the Controlled Accumulation Period, an amount
equal to the Controlled Deposit Amount will be deposited in the Principal
Funding Account until the balance of the Principal Funding Account equals the
Investor Interest. Although it is anticipated that principal collections will
be available on each transfer date during the Controlled Accumulation Period to
make a deposit of the Controlled Deposit Amount and that the Investor Interest
will be paid to the MTN issuer on the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date,
allowing the MTN issuer to fully redeem each class of the MTNs outstanding, no
assurance can be given that sufficient principal collections will be available.
If the amount required to pay the Investor Interest in full is not available on
the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date, a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event will
occur and the Rapid Amortisation Period will begin.
If a Regulated Amortisation Trigger Event occurs during the Controlled
Accumulation Period, the Regulated Amortisation Period will begin. If any other
Pay Out Event occurs during the Controlled Accumulation Period, the Rapid
Amortisation Period will begin. In each case, any amount on deposit in the
Principal Funding Account will be paid to the MTN issuer for the Investor
Interest on the first interest payment date relating to the Regulated
Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period. In addition, to the
extent that the Investor Interest for each class has not been distributed in
full, the MTN issuer will be entitled to monthly distributions of principal
collections during the Rapid Amortisation Period equal to the Available
Investor Principal Collections until first the Class A Investor Interest, then
the Class B Investor Interest and then the Class C Investor Interest have been
distributed in full or, during the Regulated Amortisation Period, an amount
equal to the Controlled Deposit Amount until the Investor Interest for each
class has been distributed in full. A Pay Out Event occurs, either
automatically or after specified notice, after a Trust Pay Out Event or a
Series 99-1 Pay Out Event occurs. See "The Receivables Trust: Trust Pay Out
Events" and "Series 99-1: Series 99-1 Pay Out Events". If a Series 99-1 Pay Out
Event occurs, it will automatically trigger an early redemption event under the
medium term notes.
The following table presents the highest and lowest cardholder monthly
payment rates for the bank portfolio during any month in the period shown and
the average cardholder monthly payment rates for all months during the periods
shown. These are calculated as a percentage of total opening receivables
balances during the periods shown. The payment rates are based on amounts which
would be deemed principal collections and finance charge collections for the
related accounts.
Cardholder Monthly Payment Rates
Bank Portfolio
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Quarter Ended Year Ended 31 December
-------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------
30 September 30 June 31 March
1999 1999 1999 1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Lowest Month.. 25.00% 22.01% 24.57% 25.09% 26.64% 29.27% 30.34% 30.55%
Highest Month. 26.08% 27.97% 28.94% 31.02% 36.47% 39.13% 34.75% 36.37%
Monthly Average 25.62% 25.40% 26.89% 28.80% 32.01% 33.03% 32.94% 34.04%
</TABLE>
39
<PAGE>
Collections may vary from month to month due to:
* seasonal variations;
* promotional offerings -- such as payment holidays;
* general economic conditions; and
* payment habits of individual cardholders.
There is no guarantee that the future monthly payment rates for the
securitised portfolio will be similar to the historical experience set forth in
the table above or that there will be enough principal collections to deposit
the Controlled Deposit Amount into the Principal Funding Account each month to
fully redeem your notes by the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date. If a Pay
Out Event occurs, the average life and maturity of your notes could be
significantly reduced, since you may start receiving principal distributions
before the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date.
Because there may be a slowdown in the payment rate below the payment
rates used to determine the Controlled Deposit Amount or a Pay Out Event may
occur which would start the Rapid Amortisation Period or the Regulated
Amortisation Period, there is no guarantee that the actual number of months
elapsed from the closing date to the final distribution date for your notes
will equal the expected number of months. As described under "Series 99-1:
Postponement of Controlled Accumulation Period", if the servicer shortens the
Controlled Accumulation Period there is no guarantee that there will be enough
time to accumulate all amounts necessary to fully pay the Investor Interest on
the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date. See "Risk Factors: Principal on Your
Notes May Be Paid Earlier Than Expected Creating a Reinvestment Risk to You or
Later Than Expected".
Receivables Yield Considerations
The gross revenues from finance charges and fees billed to accounts in
the portfolio of credit and charge card accounts for each of the calendar years
ended 31 December, 1998, 31 December, 1997, 31 December, 1996, 31 December,
1995, 31 December, 1994 and for each of the three months ended 31 March, 1999,
30 June, 1999 and 30 September, 1999, are presented in the following table.
The historical yield figures in the following table are calculated on
an accrual basis. Collections of receivables included in the receivables trust
will be on a cash basis and may not be the same as historical yields set forth
in the table. During periods of increasing delinquencies or an increase in
periodic payment deferral programmes, accrual yields may exceed cash amounts
accrued and billed to cardholders. Conversely, as delinquencies decrease or the
use of periodic payment deferral programmes decreases, cash yields may exceed
accrual yields as amounts collected in a current period may include amounts
accrued during prior periods. However, the transferor believes that during the
periods referred to in the table set forth below, the yield on an accrual basis
closely approximated the yield on a cash basis. The yield on both an accrual
and a cash basis will be affected by many factors, including the monthly
periodic finance charges on the receivables, the amount of the annual fees and
other fees, changes in the delinquency rate on the receivables and the
percentage of cardholders who pay their balances in full each month and do not
incur monthly periodic finance charges. For example, the transferor could
change the monthly interest rate applied to the accounts or reduce or eliminate
fees on the accounts. See "Risk Factors: A Change in the Terms of the
Receivables May Adversely Affect the Amount or Timing of Collections and May
Cause an Early Redemption or a Downgrade of Your Notes".
The following table sets forth the revenue for the bank portfolio of card
accounts. The revenue is comprised of monthly periodic finance charges, card
fees, annual fees and interchange. These revenues vary for each account based
on the type and volume of activity for each account. See "Barclaycard and the
Barclaycard Card Portfolio".
40
<PAGE>
Yield Experience
Bank Portfolio(1)
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Quarter Ended
--------------------------------------------------------
30 September
1999 30 June 1999 31 March 1999
---------------- ---------------- ----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Accrued finance charges $1,458,857,084 $1,432,869,747 $1,462,740,870
and fees(2)(3)..................
Average receivables
outstanding(4).................. $9,939,601,739 $9,379,117,500 $8,943,070,232
Yield from finance
charges and fees(5)............. 14.68% 15.28% 16.36%
Yield from interchange(6)........ 3.03% 3.06% 2.93%
---------------- ---------------- ----------------
Yield from finance charges
fees and interchange............ 17.71% 18.34% 19.28%
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Year ended 31 December
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1998 1997 1996 1995 1994
---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Accrued finance charges $1,422,798,428 $1,251,325,492 $1,150,098,564 $1,048,564,748 $874,940,096
and fees(2)(3)..................
Average receivables
outstanding(4).................. $8,226,003,597 $7,175,924,182 $6,592,008,620 $5,950,392,038 $5,176,315,073
Yield from finance
charges and fees(5)............. 17.30% 17.44% 17.45% 17.62% 16.90%
Yield from interchange(6)........ 3.39% 3.78% 3.94% 4.05% 4.26%
---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
Yield from finance charges
fees and interchange............ 20.68% 21.22% 21.38% 21.67% 21.16%
</TABLE>
(1) All percentage data are presented on an annualised basis.
(2) Finance charges and fees are comprised of monthly periodic finance
charges, annual fees and other card fees.
(3) Accrued finance charges and fees are presented net of adjustments made
pursuant to Barclaycard's normal servicing procedures.
(4) Average receivables outstanding is the average monthly receivable balance
during the periods indicated.
(5) Yield from finance charges and fees is the result of dividing the
annualised accrued finance charges and fees by the average receivables
outstanding for the period.
(6) Yield from Interchange is the result of dividing annualised revenue
attributable to interchange received during the period by the average
receivables outstanding for the period.
Revenues vary for each account based on type and volume of activity for
each account. See "Barclaycard and the Barclaycard Portfolio".
41
<PAGE>
The Receivables Trust
General Legal Structure
The receivables trust is a trust formed under English law by the
receivables trustee as trustee and Barclays as trust cash manager, initial
transferor beneficiary and excess interest beneficiary. The receivables trust
has been declared for the financings described in this prospectus. The terms and
conditions of the receivables trust are contained in the declaration of trust
dated 1 November, 1999 as it will be amended and restated by the declaration of
trust and trust cash management agreement, which will be governed by English
law. This section will describe to you the material terms of the receivables
trust and declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement. The terms of
the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement may be varied or
added to by executing a supplement -- but only for the series of investor
certificates issued under the supplement. A precondition to the receivables
trustee entering into a supplement is obtaining confirmation from the rating
agencies that entering into the supplement will not result in any rating agency
withdrawing or downgrading its rating of any debt that is ultimately secured by
the receivables in the receivables trust. Under the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement, the receivables trustee will hold all of the
receivables trust's property on trust for:
* the initial transferor beneficiary and the excess interest
beneficiary as the initial beneficiaries of the trust; and
* for any other person who may become an additional transferor
beneficiary or additional beneficiary of the trust as allowed by
the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement.
Other than the excess interest beneficiary and the transferor beneficiary,
the two categories of beneficiary are:
* an investor beneficiary, which may include any investor
beneficiary subordinate to another investor beneficiary as a
provider of credit enhancement; or
* an enhancement provider for a series of investor certificates, if
provided for in the supplement for that series.
The excess interest beneficiary and the initial transferor beneficiary
will be the initial beneficiaries of the receivables trust. Any subsidiary of
the initial transferor that, with the prior written consent of all existing
beneficiaries of the receivables trust, accedes to the receivables
securitisation agreement as an additional transferor will upon its accession
become an additional transferor beneficiary of the receivables trust.
By making payments to the receivables trustee as a contribution to the
receivables trust's property, as set out in the declaration of trust and trust
cash management agreement, other persons can form a series of the receivables
trust. These persons are called additional beneficiaries. When payment is made,
the additional beneficiaries will be given a certificate evidencing a
beneficial interest in the receivables trust to show that they are an investor.
This process is called an acquisition and the certificate is called an investor
certificate. When an acquisition takes place a notice will be given that will
list the parties to the acquisition and anyone who is providing credit
enhancement for the series of investor certificates, called an enhancement
provider. A new supplement to the declaration of trust and trust cash
management agreement will govern each new series of the receivables trust that
is created.
Two types of acquisition may be made:
* The transferor beneficiary, upon receiving payment from a new
series of additional beneficiaries, may direct the receivables
trustee to trade the certificate it holds showing its entitlement
to the receivables trust's property -- called the "transferor
certificate" -- for a new series of investor certificates and a
reissued transferor certificate evidencing the transferor's
reduced beneficial entitlement to the receivables trust's
property. This is known as a "transferor acquisition".
Series 99-1 will be the first series of investor certificates
issued by the receivables trust and will be created by a
transferor acquisition occurring on the closing date.
* The second type of acquisition which may be made is an investor
acquisition where, if the supplement permits, an investor
beneficiary together with the transferor beneficiary may direct
the receivables trustee to trade their investor certificates and
the transferor certificate for one or more new investor
certificates and a reissued transferor certificate. The supplement
for series 99-1 does not permit for an investor acquisition.
The receivables trustee will authenticate and deliver a series of investor
certificates only when it has first received:
42
<PAGE>
* a supplement signed by the parties to the new series,
including the receivables trustee and the transferor
beneficiary, specifying the principal terms of the series;
* the credit enhancement, if any, and any agreement by which
an enhancement provider agrees to provide credit
enhancement -- series 99-1 has subordination as credit
enhancement and will not have an enhancement provider or an
enhancement agreement;
* a solvency certificate from the transferor and any
additional transferors;
* written confirmation from the rating agencies that the
proposed acquisition will not result in the reduction or
withdrawal of their ratings on any notes issued by the
issuer or any other issuer of further series of notes that
is ultimately secured by the receivables in the receivables
trust -- called "related beneficiary debt";
* written confirmation from each additional beneficiary and
enhancement provider, if any, that:
(1) its usual place of abode is in the United Kingdom and
it will be liable for United Kingdom corporation tax
for all amounts regarded as interest for UK tax
purposes received by it under the transactions
contemplated by the series of investor certificates;
or
(2) it is a bank, as defined for purposes of Section
349(3)(a) of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act
1988, and it will be liable for United Kingdom
corporation tax for all amounts regarded as interest
for UK tax purposes received by it under the series
of investor certificates;
* the existing transferor certificate and, if it is an
investor acquisition, the applicable investor certificates;
* an officer's certificate provided by the transferor
certifying either:
(1) that:
* each class of related beneficiary debt issued
as part of the acquisition and described in
the related supplement will be rated in one of
the three highest rating categories by at
least one rating agency recognised in the
United Kingdom;
* each investor beneficiary -- other than any
enhancement provider -- will have associated
with it, either directly or indirectly, a
class of related beneficiary debt; and
* the enhancement for each series will be
provided by any combination of subordination,
a letter of credit, a cash collateral loan, a
surety bond, an insurance policy, or a spread
or reserve account funded from excess finance
charge collections ultimately reverting to the
excess interest beneficiary to the extent not
utilised as enhancement, but through no other
means; or
(2) it has determined that, based on legal advice, the
acquisition is in the best interests of the
transferor beneficiary and its affiliates.
Each supplement to the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement will specify the principal terms for its series of investor
certificates, including the accumulation period or amortisation period for the
payment of principal. For each series these may be of different lengths and
begin on different dates. Enhancement is specific to each series and will be
held and used by the receivables trustee only for the benefit of the relevant
series. Certain series may be subordinated to other series, and classes within
a series may have different priorities. Whether or not a series or class is
subordinated will be set out in the related supplement. Series 99-1 will not be
subordinate to any other series, but will have classes of investor certificates
that are subordinated to other classes of investor certificates. There will be
no limit on the number of acquisitions that may be performed.
The receivables trustee will not be able to arrange for additional
supplements without obtaining the consent of all the beneficiaries constituting
each existing series. Even if the receivables trustee receives all these
consents, no acquisition will be effective unless the rating agencies confirm
that the additional supplement will not result in the reduction or withdrawal
of their rating of any related beneficiary debt.
43
<PAGE>
The Receivables Trust's Property
The property of the receivables trust will include all present and future
receivables arising under all MasterCard and VISA credit and charge card
accounts of Barclaycard's individual cardholders that have not been identified
as non-designated accounts and that are denominated in pounds sterling with a
billing address within England, Wales, Scotland, Northern Ireland or a
permitted additional jurisdiction or a restricted additional jurisdiction. We
refer to these accounts as the "designated accounts". See "The Receivables:
Representations". The receivables will be assigned to the receivables trustee
under the receivables securitisation agreement between Barclaycard as
transferor and the receivables trustee. The receivables securitisation
agreement will be governed by English law. Occasionally some accounts may be
removed from the pool of designated accounts. These accounts we refer to in
this prospectus as the "redesignated accounts".
The transferor is required to ensure that any of Barclaycard's credit and
charge card accounts that are to be excluded from the offer to the receivables
trustee under the receivables securitisation agreement or that are to be
removed from the pool of designated accounts are identified on its computer
system prior to the date of offer or the date of removal.
The property of the receivables trust will also include:
* all monies due in payment of the receivables under designated
accounts from time to time;
* all proceeds of the receivables and proceeds of any guarantees and
insurance policies for the receivables -- to the extent that they
are capable of assignment -- including proceeds of disposals by
the receivables trustee of charged-off receivables to Barclaycard;
* the benefit of any Acquired Interchange; see "The Receivables:
Interchange";
* all monies on deposit in the Trust Accounts -- including any
permitted investments in which the monies are invested but
excluding investment earnings on these monies;
* any credit enhancement for the benefit of any series or class of
beneficiary;
* all monies provided by beneficiaries of the receivables trust to
fund the purchase of receivables, until these monies are applied
as intended; and
The receivables are divided into eligible receivables and ineligible
receivables. Each investor beneficiary, the excess interest beneficiary and the
transferor beneficiary are beneficially entitled to interests in the pool of
eligible receivables.
The transferor beneficiary is beneficially entitled to the entire pool of
ineligible receivables and is solely entitled to all collections of ineligible
receivables.
The total principal amount of the interest of the investor beneficiary in
a series is called the "investor interest" of that series and reflects the
total amount of the proportional entitlement to principal receivables allocated
to that series.
The total amount of the transferor beneficiary in the receivables trust is
called the "Transferor Interest" and is based on the total amount of the
proportional entitlement to principal receivables not allocated to each
outstanding series.
General Entitlement of Beneficiaries to Trust Property
The transferor beneficiary and each investor beneficiary will acquire
undivided interests in the receivables trust by making payments in favour of
the receivables trustee. Some of the receivables trust's property that will
constitute credit enhancement may be specified as being the beneficial
entitlement of particular beneficiaries or particular series only. The
beneficiaries of the receivables trust are each beneficially entitled to share
in the receivables trust's property and each beneficiary, other than an
enhancement provider, has or will acquire interests in the pool of eligible
receivables -- called the "Eligible Receivables Pool". See "Series 99-1" for a
description of the beneficial entitlement of the issuer to receivables and for
a description of the manner in which collections will be allocated to the
issuer.
The beneficial entitlement of Barclaycard as the excess interest
beneficiary to the property of the receivables trust at any time is called the
"Excess Interest". The Excess Interest consists of a beneficial entitlement to
the finance charge collections and Acquired Interchange for each monthly period
which can be allocated to any series after finance charge collections are
allocated to each beneficiary forming part of that series or group of series,
if applicable, and have been used to make payments to the enhancement provider,
if it is not a beneficiary. These payments will include amounts deemed to
represent finance charge collections as stated in the supplement for the
series.
44
<PAGE>
To understand the beneficial entitlement of the transferor beneficiary and
each additional transferor beneficiary you have to understand the definition of
"Transferor Percentage". The Transferor Percentage is the percentage equal to
100 per cent. less the sum of the applicable Investor Percentages of each
outstanding series.
The aggregate beneficial entitlement of the transferor beneficiary at any
time consists of the following:
* the Transferor Percentage of eligible principal receivables; the
Transferor Percentage is calculated for this purpose using the
Floating Investor Percentage as the Investor Percentage of each
series;
* the Transferor Percentage of finance charge receivables; the
Transferor Percentage is calculated for this purpose using the
Floating Investor Percentage as the Investor Percentage for each
series;
* all ineligible receivables; and
* all monies held in the Trust Accounts that represent investment
earnings on permitted investments made using monies deposited in
those Trust Accounts, unless something else is provided for in the
supplement; the supplement for series 99-1 does not provide for
something else.
"Permitted investments" means the following:
* demand or time deposits, certificates of deposit and other short-
term unsecured debt obligations at or of any institution that has
unsecured and unguaranteed debt obligations of A-1+ and P-1 by
Standard & Poor' and Moody's; and
* short-term unsecured debt obligations -- including commercial
paper -- issued or guaranteed by any body corporate whose
unsecured and unguaranteed debt obligations are A-1+ and P-1 by
Standard & Poor's and Moody's.
The aggregate beneficial entitlement of the transferor beneficiary to any
other trust property at any time is equal to the proportion that the Transferor
Interest bears to the amount of eligible principal receivables at that time.
The initial transferor beneficiary's and each additional transferor
beneficiary's entitlement to the aggregate beneficial entitlement of the
transferor beneficiary will be equal to its proportionate share described in
the transferor certificate.
Allocation and Application of Collections
Initially, the following accounts will be opened by the receivables
trustee at 1234 Pavillion Drive, Northampton, NN4 7SG, England:
* a collection account called the "Trustee Collection Account",
which is where principal collections and finance charge
collections are credited; and
* the acquisition account called the "Trustee Acquisition Account",
which is where amounts are credited that can be used to purchase
beneficial interests in receivables for the investor or transferor
beneficiaries.
The Trustee Acquisition Account, the Trustee Collection Account and any
additional bank accounts of the receivables trust that the receivables trustee
may open for particular beneficiaries are collectively called "Trust Accounts".
The receivables trustee will have legal title to the funds on deposit in each
Trust Account.
Collections from cardholders for designated accounts and cardholders for
other card accounts of Barclaycard are initially paid to Barclaycard's bank
accounts before being cleared on a same-day basis to a bank account called the
"Barclaycard Operating Account". Initially, the Barclaycard Operating Account
will be held by Barclaycard at its branch located at 1234 Pavillion Drive,
Northampton NN4 7SG, England. The transferor has declared a trust over the
Barclaycard Operating Account.
All money in the Barclaycard Operating Account will be held on trust for
the receivables trustee and transferred to the Trustee Collection Account
within two business days after processing. All money in the Trustee Collection
Account will be treated as collections from receivables of designated accounts
unless it has been incorrectly paid into the account. Incorrect payments will
be deducted from the appropriate collections on the business day on which the
error is notified to the receivables trustee.
Amounts incorrectly categorised as principal collections of eligible
receivables but which are really collections of ineligible receivables will be
given back to the transferor beneficiary, after making adjustments for errors
but before allocating amounts of principal collections that are property of the
receivables trust. The receivables trustee will treat all money deposited in
the Trustee Collection Account as property of the receivables trust unless
notified otherwise by the trust cash manager.
The Eligible Receivables Pool and the Transferor Interest are increased or
decreased, as applicable, to account for the errors made.
45
<PAGE>
Eligible principal receivables in defaulted accounts are allocated between
the transferor beneficiary and each series of investor certificates in
accordance with their respective beneficial entitlements to the property of the
receivables trust at the time the account becomes a defaulted account. Credit
adjustments for principal receivables are allocated to the transferor
beneficiary as a reduction of the Transferor Interest until the Transferor
Interest reaches zero. Ineligible principal receivables in defaulted accounts
reduce the transferor's interest in ineligible receivables -- called the
"Transferor Ineligible Interest" -- until it reaches zero.
Collections that are property of the receivables trust are categorised as:
* principal collections;
* finance charge collections; or
* ineligible collections.
If a Discount Percentage is nominated by the transferor, the Discount
Percentage of principal collections will be treated as finance charge
collections. The transferor has no current intention to nominate a Discount
Percentage. See "The Receivables: Discount Option Receivables".
If the related supplement says so, each series will also be entitled to a
portion of Acquired Interchange. Series 99-1 will be allocated a portion of
Acquired Interchange as described in "Series 99-1". To the extent that any
Acquired Interchange is not allocated to any series, it will be allocated to
the transferor beneficiary.
Each series will be entitled to receive varying percentages of principal
collections, finance charge collections and receivables in defaulted accounts.
Each of these percentages is called an "Investor Percentage". The transferor
beneficiary will be entitled to its applicable Transferor Percentage of
principal collections and finance charge collections and receivables in
defaulted accounts. The excess interest beneficiary is entitled to finance
charge collections allocated to a series that are:
* not allocated to any other beneficiary, whether or not a member of
that series; or
* any enhancement provider, as set out in the supplement relating to
that series.
Each supplement will set out, for its series, the entitlement of each
investor beneficiary to principal collections, finance charge collections and
Acquired Interchange.
The transferor may fulfil any obligation to make payments to the
receivables trustee for principal receivables for which it has breached a
warranty by:
* reducing the Transferor Interest -- but not below zero; and
* increasing the Transferor Ineligible Interest.
However, if the Transferor Interest would be reduced below zero, the
transferor must make a similar payment in immediately available funds to the
receivables trustee under the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement and the receivables securitisation agreement.
The receivables trustee will pay the trust cash management fee to the
trust cash manager from payments made by the beneficiaries and this amount will
be deducted from the transferor beneficiary's and each series' portion of the
finance charge collections.
The receivables trustee will transfer money daily from the Trustee
Collection Account in the following priority:
(1) the amount of any incorrect payments notified to the receivables trustee
not previously allocated as collections, to the Barclaycard Operating
Account, after which the transferor beneficiary will own the money
absolutely;
(2) the amount of ineligible collections notified to the receivables trustee
not previously allocated as principal collections, to a bank account
opened in the name of the transferor to deposit the cash proceeds of the
purchase price of the receivables, called the "Barclaycard Proceeds
Account", after which the transferor beneficiary will own the money
absolutely;
(3) the total amount of principal collections allocated to the investor
interest of any outstanding series, minus the Investor Cash Available for
Acquisition of that series, from the Principal Collections Ledger to the
account specified in the supplement for that series;
(4) the total amount of Investor Cash Available for Acquisition and
Transferor Cash Available for Acquisition needed on that day from the
ledger of the Trustee Collection Account for principal collections --
called the "Principal Collections Ledger", to the Trustee Acquisition
Account;
(5) the Transferor Percentage of finance charge collections and the amount of
Acquired Interchange deposited in the Trustee Collection Account not
allocated to the investor interest of any outstanding
46
<PAGE>
series, from the ledger of the Trustee Collection Account for finance
charge collections -- called the "Finance Charge Collections Ledger", to
the Barclaycard Proceeds Account, or as the transferor beneficiary may
direct, after which the money will be owned by the transferor beneficiary
absolutely; and
(6) each finance charge amount and all Acquired Interchange allocable to any
outstanding series, from the Finance Charge Collections Ledger to any
account that may be specified in the supplement for that series.
Acquiring Additional Entitlements to Trust Property and Payments for
Receivables
To understand what a revolving period is, see "Series 99-1: Allocation,
Calculation and Distribution of Principal Collections to the MTN Issuer".
During the revolving period for a series, the receivables trustee will use
the portion of principal collections allocated to the investor beneficiaries of
that series and which is available to fund the acquisition of the beneficial
entitlement to receivables to pay for the purchase of the beneficial
entitlement to receivables that are eligible. These available principal
collections are called "Investor Cash Available for Acquisition". No Investor
Cash Available for Acquisition will be used to fund ineligible receivables.
On any day a series may be allocated more money for acquisitions than is
needed to purchase existing or future receivables that are eligible and
available for a series to fund. In that case, that series will use the excess
Investor Cash Available for Acquisition to acquire available Transferor
Interest from the transferor beneficiary and, if allowed under its supplement,
investor interest from other designated series. Any money left over will be
used to fund acquisitions on subsequent business days.
The transferor beneficiary will fund the amount payable by the receivables
trustee for all the existing and future receivables that all series are unable
to fund plus the amount of any ineligible receivables that need to be funded.
Consequently, the amount payable by the receivables trustee to the transferor
for all existing and future receivables it is purchasing on any business day
will be funded first by the series to the extent of all of the Investor Cash
Available for Acquisition and then by the transferor beneficiary to the extent
of the Transferor Cash Available for Acquisition. "Transferor Cash Available
for Acquisition" for any day means an amount equal to the Transferor Percentage
of principal collections processed on that day.
On each business day the beneficial interest of each series in the
Eligible Receivables Pool:
* will be decreased by the amount of principal collections allocated
to that series that constitutes Investor Cash Available for
Acquisition; and
* will be increased by the amount of Investor Cash Available for
Acquisition used by the receivables trustee to pay for existing
and future receivables and the amount of Investor Cash Available
for Acquisition allocated to the Transferor Interest or the
investor interest of other series to increase the proportion of
the beneficial interest of that series.
These changes will not effect the beneficial entitlement of:
* any beneficiary to monies credited to any Trust Account to which
it is beneficially entitled; or
* any series to monies credited to any Trust Account to which the
beneficiaries constituting that series are together beneficially
entitled.
On each business day after making all adjustments, the beneficial interest
of the transferor beneficiary in the Eligible Receivables Pool:
* will be decreased by the amount of principal collections and
Investor Cash Available for Acquisition allocated to the
transferor beneficiary; and
* will be increased by the amount of Transferor Cash Available for
Acquisition and the increase in the Transferor Interest resulting
from the decrease described in the prior bullet point.
However, any change in the beneficial interest of the transferor
beneficiary in the Eligible Receivables Pool will not affect the beneficial
entitlement of the transferor beneficiary to money credited to any Trust
Account to which it is beneficially entitled.
The investor interest of each series and the beneficial interest in the
receivables trust of each additional beneficiary will increase or decrease as
described in the related supplement.
On each business day, after making all adjustments, the Transferor
Interest:
* will be decreased by the amount of Transferor Cash Available for
Acquisition not used to pay for new receivables and Investor Cash
Available for Acquisition transferred to the transferor
beneficiary by credit to the Barclaycard Proceeds Account; and
47
<PAGE>
* will be increased by the purchase price payable to the transferor
by the receivables trustee to be funded by the transferor
beneficiary.
These changes will not affect the beneficial entitlement of the transferor
beneficiary to money credited to any Trust Account to which it is beneficially
entitled.
Other adjustments to the Transferor Interest are explained in "The
Receivables Trust: Allocation and Application of Collections".
Non-Petition Undertaking of Beneficiaries
Each beneficiary of the receivables trust, including Barclaycard as
transferor beneficiary and excess interest beneficiary, the transferor, the
trust cash manager and any successor trust cash manager, by entering into a
supplement, will agree with the receivables trustee for itself and as trustee
that it will not attempt to take any action or legal proceedings for the
winding up, dissolution or re-organisation of, or for the appointment of a
receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, trustee, liquidator,
sequestrator or similar officer for, any investor beneficiary, the receivables
trustee or the receivables trust. These parties will also agree not to seek to
enforce any judgements against any of those persons.
Trust Pay Out Events
The following is a list of what we refer to in this prospectus as the
"Trust Pay Out Events":
(1) the transferor consents or takes any corporate action to appoint a
receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator, trustee or
similar officer of it or over all or substantially all of its revenues
and assets;
(2) proceedings are started against the transferor under any applicable
liquidation, insolvency, composition or re-organisation or similar laws
for its winding up, dissolution, administration or re-organisation and
the proceedings are not discharged within 60 days, or a receiver,
administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator, trustee or similar
officer of it or relating to all or substantially all of its revenues and
assets is legally and validly appointed and is not discharged within 14
days;
(3) a duly authorised officer of the transferor admits in writing that the
transferor beneficiary or excess interest beneficiary is unable to pay
its debts when they fall due within the meaning of Section 123(1) of the
Insolvency Act 1986 or the transferor makes a general assignment for the
benefit of or a composition with its creditors or voluntarily suspends
payment of its obligations to generally readjust or reschedule its debt;
(4) the transferor cannot transfer receivables in the designated accounts to
the receivables trust in the manner described in the receivables
securitisation agreement;
(5) the transferor stops being either a resident in the United Kingdom for
tax purposes or liable for United Kingdom corporation tax; or
(6) either:
* a change in law or its interpretation or administration results in
the receivables trustee becoming liable to make any payment on
account of tax -- other than stamp duty payable in the United
Kingdom for the transfer of receivables under the receivables
securitisation agreement; or
* any tax authority asserts a tax liability or takes other actions
against Barclays or any of its subsidiaries in relation to the
transaction which would have an adverse affect on them which is
more than trivial, if Barclays obtains an opinion of counsel
stating that the tax liability would be due. This event will be
treated as occuring when Barclays, as transferor beneficiary,
gives written notice of it to the receivables trustee.
The Trust Pay Out Events in paragraphs (1), (2) and (3) are called
"Insolvency Events". If an Insolvency Event occurs, a pay out event will occur
for each series, each beneficiary within a series and for the transferor
beneficiary. If any other Trust Pay Out Event occurs, a pay out event will
occur for each series and each beneficiary within a series. Trust Pay Out
Events will occur without any notice or other action on the part of the
receivables trustee or any beneficiary, as soon as the event happens.
A "Pay Out Event" for series 99-1 means a Trust Pay Out Event or one of
the events listed in "Series 99-1: Series 99-1 Pay Out Events".
After an Insolvency Event, future receivables, other than finance charge
receivables accruing for principal receivables that have been assigned to the
receivables trustee, will no longer be assigned to the receivables trustee. The
receivables trustee will not be obligated or entitled to accept any more offers
of receivables after an Insolvency Event. Finance charge receivables accruing
on principal receivables that have been assigned to the receivables trustee
before the Insolvency Event will still be part of the receivables trust's
property and finance
48
<PAGE>
charge collections from them will continue to be allocated and applied as set
out in the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement and each
supplement.
The receivables trustee will notify each beneficiary if an Insolvency
Event occurs and will dispose of the receivables on commercially reasonable
terms, unless within 60 days of that notice beneficiaries representing more
than 50 per cent. of the investor interest of every series, both the transferor
beneficiary and the excess interest beneficiary -- in each case, if not subject
to an Insolvency Event -- and every other person identified in any supplement
disapproves of the liquidation of the receivables and wishes to continue with
the receivables trustee accepting offers and purchasing receivables under the
receivables securitisation agreement. Money from this sale will be treated as
collections on the receivables and will be distributed in accordance with the
provisions of the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement and
each supplement. See "Series 99-1".
Termination of the Receivables Trust
If the receivables trust has not already been dissolved after an
Insolvency Event, then, the transferor beneficiary can instruct the receivables
trustee to dissolve the receivables trust on any day on which:
* the total amount of all of the investor interests for each series
is reduced to zero;
* there are no finance charge collections or other trust property
allocated to any beneficiaries other than the transferor
beneficiary or the excess interest beneficiary; and
* no beneficiary is committed to fund payments to the transferor for
purchases of receivables by the receivables trust.
After the receivables trust is dissolved, all of the receivables trust's
property will be controlled by the transferor beneficiary as residual
beneficiary, and the receivables securitisation agreement will be terminated.
For the purposes of Section 1 of the Perpetuities and Accumulations Act
1964, the duration of the perpetuity period for the receivables trust's
property will be a period ending not later than 80 years from the date of
execution of the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement. Any
property of the receivables trust after this period will vest in the current
beneficiaries in accordance with their entitlements to the receivables trust's
property at that date.
Amendments to the Declaration of Trust and Trust Cash Management Agreement
The declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement may be
amended with the prior consent of each beneficiary. No amendment will be
effective unless each rating agency then rating the notes has confirmed that
the amendment will not result in a reduction or withdrawal of its then current
rating of any outstanding related beneficiary debt.
No investor beneficiary will consent to any proposed amendment unless
instructed to do so by noteholders holding in total not less than two thirds of
the medium term notes then outstanding of each outstanding series adversely
affected. The investor beneficiary may not consent to any proposed amendment
that would:
* reduce or delay required distributions to any investor beneficiary
for the affected series;
* change the definition or the manner of calculating the investor
interest, the Investor Percentage or the investor default amount
of the affected series or any class of the affected series; or
* reduce the percentage required to consent to any amendment unless
instructed to do so by all the noteholders of the medium term
notes then outstanding of the affected series.
Disposals
Beneficiaries may not transfer or dispose of their beneficial entitlements
in the receivables trust or create any encumbrance over its beneficial
entitlement, except that:
* the transferor beneficiary or the excess interest beneficiary may
dispose of the Transferor Interest or the Excess Interest by
transferring all or substantially all of its properties and assets
to any person, if that person also expressly assumes the duties and
obligations of the transferor, the transferor beneficiary and the
excess interest beneficiary under the relevant documents; after the
transfer, the new person will be the person used to determine if an
Insolvency Event has occurred;
* the transferor beneficiary or the excess interest beneficiary may
transfer or create any encumbrance over the whole or any part of
the Transferor Interest or the Excess Interest with the consent of
investor beneficiaries representing in total more than one-half of
the total investor interest of each series; however, the rating
agencies must first confirm that the transfer or
49
<PAGE>
encumbrance will not result in a downgrade or withdrawal of its
rating of any outstanding related beneficiary debt; and
* any beneficiary -- except for the transferor beneficiary or the
excess interest beneficiary -- may transfer all or any part of
their beneficial entitlement or grant an encumbrance over their
beneficial entitlement with the prior written consent of the
transferor beneficiary, which consent will not be unreasonably
withheld; however, the receivables trustee must first receive
confirmation in writing from the person to whom the transfer will
be made or for whom the encumbrance will be granted or created,
that it complies with the criteria referred to in the
prerequisites to the completion of an acquisition as referred to
in "-- General Legal Structure" above.
The receivables trustee will, upon the direction of all of the
beneficiaries, be authorised to reassign to Barclaycard the beneficial interest
in defaulted receivables for a purchase price equal to the amount received or
recovered, if any, by Barclaycard from those defaulted receivables less the
fees, costs and expenses incurred by Barclaycard in the recovery of that
amount.
Trustee Payment Amount
The receivables trustee will be paid its fees, costs and expenses --
including, value added tax on the sums it incurs, any expense incurred from
being indemnified under the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement -- out of the property of the receivables trust allocated to the
investor beneficiaries. The receivables trustee will be paid monthly in arrears
on each transfer date the amounts certified by the trust cash manager to the
receivables trustee by the end of any monthly period as being due to it for
that monthly period. This payment is called the "Trustee Payment Amount". The
allocation of the Trustee Payment Amount to series 99-1 and to the MTN issuer
is described in "Series 99-1: Trustee Payment Amount".
Servicing of Receivables and Trust Cash Management
General -- Servicing
Barclaycard will be appointed on the closing date by the beneficiaries of
the receivables trust as initial servicer under the terms of the beneficiaries
servicing agreement. Any additional transferor beneficiary or beneficiary must
accede to the beneficiaries servicing agreement. The servicer will service and
administer the receivables and request and receive payments on the receivables
using its usual procedures and practices for servicing credit and charge card
receivables comparable to the receivables in the designated accounts. The
servicer has full power and authority, acting alone or through any other party
properly designated, to undertake all actions concerning the management of the
receivables it considers necessary or desirable.
The servicer's duties will include carrying out all servicing,
administration and management functions in relation to the receivables and,
insofar as the interests of the beneficiaries are affected, the designated
accounts in accordance with Barclaycard's policies and procedures from time to
time and in accordance with normal market practice, so far as consistent with
Barclaycard's policy and procedures. These functions will include:
* carrying out valuations of receivables on designated accounts for
the purpose of determining whether any receivables should be
charged off as uncollectible;
* ensuring that the interests of the beneficiaries are taken into
account in making decisions regarding the granting of credit to
obligors;
* on its own behalf, preparing and keeping its own records as
regards all of these matters, including in particular but without
limitation, the matters referred to in the first two bullet points
above;
* monitoring payments by obligors and notifying obligors of overdue
payments; and
* crediting and debiting obligors' accounts as appropriate.
The servicer will at all times be required to take all practicable steps
to:
* ensure that payments made to the transferor by obligors are
received into the Barclaycard operating account;
* identify any funds in the Barclaycard operating account which are
required to be transferred to the trustee collection account for
the benefit of the beneficiaries; and
* ensure that such funds are so transferred when required.
The servicer will not resign from its obligations and duties as servicer
under the beneficiaries servicing agreement unless its performance is no longer
permitted under applicable law and there is no reasonable
50
<PAGE>
action that it can take to remedy the situation. The servicer's resignation will
not be effective until a successor servicer has been properly appointed.
Barclaycard, as initial servicer, performs account processing and administration
in-house, but has subcontracted some cardholder payment processing services,
which are undertaken on Barclaycard's behalf by Great Universal Stores Home
Shopping Ltd. See "Barclaycard and the Barclaycard Card Portfolio: Description
of Great Universal Stores Home Shopping Ltd.".
The servicer will indemnify each investor beneficiary and the receivables
trust against all reasonable loss, liability, expense, damage or injury caused
by the servicer's fraud, willful misconduct or gross negligence in performing
its servicing functions. However, the servicer will not indemnify any investor
beneficiary:
* if any acts or omissions are caused by the negligence, fraud or
willful misconduct of that investor beneficiary or its agents;
* for any liabilities, costs or other expenses of the receivables
trust for any action taken by the receivables trustee at the
request of any investor beneficiary of any series to which that
investor beneficiary belongs;
* for any loss or other claims that are incurred by them acting in
their capacity as beneficiaries, including those resulting from
defaulted accounts; or
* for any liabilities or other costs arising under any tax law or
any penalties or interest caused by a failure to comply with any
tax law, payable by it in connection with the beneficiaries
servicing agreement to any tax authority.
The directors, officers and other employees and agents of the servicer and
the servicer itself will not be under any liability to the receivables trustee,
the receivables trust, the investor beneficiaries, any enhancement provider or
any other person under the beneficiaries servicing agreement or under any other
document delivered pursuant to the beneficiaries servicing agreement, except in
the case of intentional wrongdoing, bad faith or gross negligence in performing
its duties under the beneficiaries servicing agreement.
Any person into which the servicer may be merged or consolidated, or any
person succeeding to or acquiring the business of the servicer in whole or in
part, after executing a supplemental agreement to the beneficiaries servicing
agreement and the delivery of a legal opinion, will become the successor to the
servicer or co-servicer with the servicer under the beneficiaries servicing
agreement.
General -- Trust Cash Management
Barclaycard will be appointed on the closing date by the receivables
trustee as initial trust cash manager under the terms of the declaration of
trust and trust cash management agreement. The trust cash manager will carry
out cash management functions in relation to the receivables on behalf of the
receivables trustee.
The trust cash manager's duties will include but are not confined to:
* making calculations on the allocations of receivables; and
* advising the receivables trustee to transfer money between the
Trust Accounts and to make withdrawals and payments from the Trust
Accounts as set forth in the declaration of trust and trust cash
management agreement.
The trust cash manager will not resign from its obligations and duties as
trust cash manager under the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement unless its performance is no longer permitted under applicable law
and there is no reasonable action that it can take to remedy the situation. The
trust cash manager's resignation will not be effective until a successor trust
cash manager has been properly appointed.
The trust cash manager will indemnify the receivables trustee and the
receivables trust against all reasonable loss, liability, expense, damage or
injury caused by its fraud, willful misconduct or gross negligence in
performing its cash management functions. However, the trust cash manager will
not indemnify the receivables trustee:
* if any acts or omissions are caused by the negligence, fraud or
willful misconduct of the receivables trustee or its agents;
* for any liabilities, costs or other expenses of the receivables
trust for any action taken by the receivables trustee at the
request of any investor beneficiary of any series to which that
investor beneficiary belongs; or
* for any liabilities or other costs of it or the receivables trust
arising under any tax law or any penalties or interest caused by a
failure to comply with any tax law, payable by it or the
receivables trust in connection with the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement to any tax authority.
51
<PAGE>
The directors, officers and other employees and agents of the trust cash
manager and the trust cash manager itself will not be under any liability to the
receivables trustee or the receivables trust or any other person under the
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement except in the case of
intentional wrongdoing, bad faith or gross negligence in performing its duties
under the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement.
Any person into which the trust cash manager may be merged or
consolidated, or any person succeeding to or acquiring the business of the
trust cash manager in whole or in part, after executing a supplemental
agreement to the trust and cash management agreement and the delivery of a
legal opinion, will become the successor to the trust cash manager or co-trust
cash manager under the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement.
Servicing and Trust Cash Manager Compensation
The servicer is entitled to receive a fee from the beneficiaries for each
monthly period. This fee is called the "servicing fee" and is payable monthly
on each transfer date, to the extent that those monies are available. Any
amounts payable in respect of servicing fee will be inclusive of VAT, if any.
The servicing fee will be equal to one-twelfth of the product of:
* the weighted average of the percentages specified in each
supplement as being the series servicing fee percentage for each
outstanding series -- weighted by the investor interest for each
series; and
* the average daily total outstanding face amount of principal
receivables during that monthly period.
The share of the servicing fee payable by the receivables trustee to the
servicer for series 99-1 on any transfer date is called the "investor servicing
fee" and will be equal to:
* one-twelfth of the product of:
(1) 0.75 per cent.; or
(2) another percentage agreed with the investor beneficiaries
as long as Barclaycard is the servicer provided that the
rating agencies confirm in writing that the new percentage
will not cause them to reduce or withdraw their then
current rating on any related beneficiary debt; and
* the Adjusted Investor Interest as of the last day of the monthly
period before that transfer date.
On the first transfer date, after the closing date, the investor servicing
fee will be L480,581.00.
The balance of the servicing fee not payable by series 99-1 or any other
series will be payable by the transferor and is called the "transferor
servicing fee". If the servicer is also the transferor beneficiary in any
monthly period, the transferor servicing fee for that monthly period will not
be paid.
The trust cash manager is entitled to receive a fee from the receivables
trustee for each monthly period. This fee is called the "trust cash management
fee" and is payable monthly on each transfer date, to the extent that those
monies have been received. Any amounts payable for the trust cash manager fee
will be inclusive of VAT, if any. The trust cash management fee will be equal
to one-twelfth of the product of the sum of the annual fees in each supplement
as being the investor trust cash management fees for each series.
The share of the trust cash management fee for which series 99-1 agrees to
indemnify the receivables trustee to the trust cash manager for series 99-1 on
any transfer date is called the "investor trust cash management fee" and will
be equal to one-twelfth of L6,000.00. The trust cash management fee can be any
other amount that the receivables trustee may agree to as long as Barclaycard
is the trust cash manager provided that the rating agencies confirm in writing
that the new amount will not cause them to reduce or withdraw their then
current rating on any related beneficiary debt.
On the first transfer date, after the closing date, the investor trust
cash management fee will be L633.00.
The balance of the trust cash management fee not payable by series 99-1 or
any other series will be payable by the transferor and is called the
"transferor trust cash management fee". If the trust cash manager is also the
transferor beneficiary in any monthly period, the transferor trust cash
management fee for that monthly period will not be paid.
The investor servicing fee allocable to the MTN issuer for each class of
medium term notes on any transfer date will be equal to one-twelfth of the
product of:
* the floating allocation for the relevant class;
52
<PAGE>
* 0.75 per cent.; and
* the Adjusted Investor Interest as of the last day of the prior
monthly period.
The investor servicing fee so allocated to the class A MTN, the class B
MTN and the class C MTN will be called the "class A servicing fee", the "class
B servicing fee" and the "class C servicing fee", respectively.
The investor trust cash management fee allocable to the MTN issuer for
each class of medium term notes on any transfer date will be equal to one-
twelfth of the product of:
* the floating allocation for the relevant class; and
* the investor trust cash management fee.
The investor trust cash management fee so allocated to the class A MTN,
the class B MTN and the class C MTN will be called the "class A cash management
fee", the "class B cash management fee" and the "class C cash management fee".
Termination of Appointment of Servicer
The appointment of the transferor as servicer under the beneficiaries
servicing agreement and the appointment of any person as joint servicer or to
replace anyone then acting as the servicer -- called a "successor servicer" --
will terminate when a servicer default occurs.
"Servicer default" means any one of the following events:
(1) failure on the part of the servicer duly to observe or perform in any
respect any other covenant or agreement of the servicer contained in the
beneficiaries servicing agreement, or any other relevant documents, that
has a material adverse effect on the interests of the investor
beneficiaries of any outstanding series; this failure will constitute a
servicer default only if it remains unremedied and continues to have a
material adverse effect on the interests of the investor beneficiaries
for 60 days after the receipt of a notice of the failure is given; the
notice of failure will be given by either (1) the receivables trustee to
the servicer, or (2) the investor beneficiaries to the receivables
trustee and the servicer; if the notice is given by the investor
beneficiaries it will be on the instruction of a group of holders of
medium term notes representing more than fifty per cent. of the total
face value of the medium term notes outstanding of any outstanding series
adversely affected;
(2) delegation by the servicer of its duties under the beneficiaries
servicing agreement to any other entity, except as permitted by the
beneficiaries servicing agreement;
(3) any relevant representation, warranty or certification made by the
servicer in the beneficiaries servicing agreement or in any certificate
delivered under the beneficiaries servicing agreement was incorrect when
made, which has a material adverse effect on the interests of the
investor beneficiaries of any outstanding series; this failure will only
be a servicer default if it remains unremedied and continues to have a
material adverse effect on the interests of the investor beneficiaries
for 60 days after the receipt of a notice of the failure is given; the
notice of the failure will be given by either (1) the receivables trustee
to the servicer, or (2) the investor beneficiaries to the receivables
trustee and the servicer; if the notice is given by the investor
beneficiaries it will be on the instruction of holders of MTNs
representing more than fifty per cent. of the total face value of the
MTNs outstanding of any outstanding series adversely affected;
(4) any of the following:
* the servicer agrees to or takes any corporate action to appoint a
receiver, administrative receiver, trustee or similar officer of
it or of substantially all of its revenues and assets; or
* an order of the court is made for its winding-up, dissolution,
administration or re-organisation that has remained in force
undischarged or unstayed for 60 days; or
* a receiver, administrative receiver, trustee or similar officer of
it or all of its revenues and assets, is appointed; and
(5) any of the following:
* a duly authorised officer of the servicer admits in writing that
the servicer is unable to pay its debts as they fall due within
the meaning of Section 123(1) of the Insolvency Act 1986; or
* the servicer makes a general assignment for the benefit of or a
composition with its creditors or it voluntarily suspends payment
of its obligations with a view to the general readjustment or
rescheduling of its indebtedness.
In the case of (1), (2) or (3) above the grace period will be 60 business
days. The grace period is the extra number of days before a servicer default
53
<PAGE>
can be called, allowing the servicer to remedy a servicer default that has been
caused by so-called acts of God or uncontrollable circumstances. These
circumstances are called force majeure events and are listed in the
beneficiaries serving agreement.
Within two business days after the servicer becomes aware of any servicer
default, the servicer must notify the beneficiaries, each rating agency, the
security trustee and any enhancement provider as soon as possible in writing.
The beneficiaries must give each rating agency notice of any removal of the
servicer or appointment of a successor servicer.
Investor beneficiaries acting on the instructions of holders of medium
term notes representing in total more than two-thirds of the total face value
of medium term notes then outstanding of each series adversely affected by any
default by the servicer or the transferor in the performance of its obligations
under the beneficiaries servicing agreement and any other relevant documents,
may waive the default unless it is a failure to make any required deposits, or
payments of interest or principal for the adversely affected series.
After the servicer receives a termination notice and a successor servicer
is appointed, the duties of acting as servicer of the receivables under the
beneficiaries servicing agreement will pass from the then servicer to the
successor servicer. The beneficiaries servicing agreement contains the
requirements for the transfer of the servicing role, including the transfer of
authority over collections, the transfer of electronic records and the
disclosure of information.
After it receives a termination notice, the servicer will continue to act
as servicer until agreed by it and the beneficiaries. The beneficiaries must
try to appoint a successor servicer that is an eligible servicer.
If the receivables trustee cannot appoint a successor servicer and the
servicer delivers a certificate that says it cannot in good faith cure the
servicer default, then the receivables trustee will start the process of
selling the receivables. The beneficiaries will notify any enhancement
providers of the proposed sale of the receivables by the receivables trustee to
a third party and will provide each enhancement provider an opportunity to bid
on purchasing the receivables.
The proceeds of the sale will be deposited in the Trust Accounts for
distribution to the beneficiaries as set out in the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement and the series supplements.
An "eligible servicer" means an entity that, when it is servicer:
* is servicing a portfolio of consumer revolving credit or charge
card accounts or other consumer credit accounts;
* is legally qualified and has the capacity to service the
designated accounts;
* is qualified or licensed to use the software that the servicer is
then currently using to service the designated accounts or obtains
the right to use, or has its own, software that is adequate to
perform its duties under the beneficiaries servicing agreement;
and
* has, in the opinion of each rating agency, demonstrated the
ability to service, professionally and competently, a portfolio of
similar accounts in accordance with customary standards of skill
and care.
Termination of Appointment of Trust Cash Manager
The appointment of the transferor as trust cash manager under the
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement and the appointment of
any person as joint trust cash manager or to replace anyone then acting as the
trust cash manager -- called a "successor cash manager" -- will terminate when
a trust cash manager default occurs.
"Trust cash manager default" means any one of the following events:
(1) any failure by the trust cash manager to direct the making of any
payment, transfer or deposit or to give instructions or notice to the
receivables trustee pursuant to an agreed schedule of collections and
allocations; any failure by the trust cash manager to advise the
receivables trustee to make any required drawing, withdrawal, or payment
under any credit enhancement; these events will be considered failures if
they do not happen within five business days after the date that they
were supposed to happen under the terms of the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement or any other relevant document;
(2) failure on the part of the trust cash manager duly to observe or perform
in any respect any other covenant or agreement of the trust cash manager
contained in the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement, or any other relevant documents, that has a material adverse
effect on the interests of the investor beneficiaries of any outstanding
series; this failure will constitute a servicer default only if it
remains unremedied and continues to have a material adverse effect on the
interests of the investor beneficiaries for 60 days after the receipt of
a notice of the failure is given; the notice of the
54
<PAGE>
failure will be given by either (1) the receivables trustee to the trust
cash manager, or (2) the investor beneficiaries to the receivables
trustee and the trust cash manager; if the notice is given by the
investor beneficiaries it will be on the instruction of a group of
holders of medium term notes representing more than fifty per cent. of
the total face value of the medium term notes outstanding of any
outstanding series adversely affected;
(3) delegation by the trust cash manager of its duties under the declaration
of trust and trust cash management agreement to any other entity, except
as permitted by the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement;
(4) any relevant representation, warranty or certification made by the trust
cash manager in the declaration of trust and trust cash management
agreement or in any certificate delivered under the declaration of trust
and trust cash management agreement was incorrect when made, which has a
material adverse effect on the interests of the investor beneficiaries of
any outstanding series; this failure will only be a trust cash manager
default if it remains unremedied and continues to have a material adverse
effect on the interests of the investor beneficiaries for 60 days after
the receipt of a notice of the failure is given; the notice of the
failure will be given by either (1) the receivables trustee to the trust
cash manager, or (2) the investor beneficiaries to the receivables
trustee and the trust cash manager; if the notice is given by the
investor beneficiaries it will be on the instruction of holders of medium
term notes representing more than fifty per cent. of the total face value
of the medium term notes outstanding of any outstanding series adversely
affected;
(5) any of the following:
* the trust cash manager agrees to or takes any corporate action to
appoint a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver,
liquidator, trustee or similar officer of it or of all of its
revenues and assets; or
* an order of the court is made for its winding-up, dissolution,
administration or re-organisation that has remained in force
undischarged or unstayed for 60 days; or
* a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator,
trustee or similar officer of it or all of its revenues and assets
is appointed; and
(6) any of the following:
* a duly authorised officer of the trust cash manager admits in
writing that the trust cash manager is unable to pay its debts as
they fall due within the meaning of Section 123(1) of the
Insolvency Act 1986; or
* the trust cash manager makes a general assignment for the benefit
of or a composition with its creditors it voluntarily suspends
payment of its obligations with a view to the general readjustment
or rescheduling of its indebtedness.
In the case of (1) above the grace period will be 10 business days and in
the case of (2), (3) or (4) above it will be 60 business days. The grace period
is the extra number of days before a trust cash manager default will be
effective, allowing the trust cash manager to remedy a trust cash manager
default that has been caused by so-called acts of God or uncontrollable
circumstances. These circumstances are called force majeure events and are
listed in the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement.
Within two business days after the trust cash manager becomes aware of any
trust cash manager default, the trust cash manager must notify the receivables
trustee, each rating agency, each investor beneficiary and any enhancement
provider as soon as possible in writing. The receivables trustee must give each
investor beneficiary and rating agency notice of any removal of the trust cash
manager or appointment of a successor cash manager. The receivables trustee
must give each rating agency notice of any removal of the trust cash manager.
Investor beneficiaries acting on the instructions of holders of medium
term notes representing in total more than two-thirds of the total face value
of medium term notes then outstanding of each series adversely affected by any
default by the trust cash manager or the transferor in the performance of its
obligations under the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement
and any other relevant documents, may waive the default unless it is a failure
to make any required deposits, or payments of interest or principal, for the
adversely affected series.
After the trust cash manager receives a termination notice and a successor
cash manager is appointed, the duties of acting as trust cash manager of the
receivables under the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement
will pass from the then trust cash manager to the successor cash manager. The
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement contains the
requirements for the transfer of the cash management role, including the
transfer of authority over collections, the transfer of electronic records and
the disclosure of information.
55
<PAGE>
After it receives a termination notice, the trust cash manager will
continue to act as trust cash manager until a date agreed by the receivables
trustee and the trust cash manager. The receivables trustee must try to appoint
a successor cash manager that is an eligible trust cash manager.
If the receivables trustee cannot appoint a successor cash manager and the
trust cash manager delivers a certificate that says it cannot in good faith
cure the trust cash manager default, then the receivables trustee will start
the process of selling the receivables. The receivables trustee will notify
each enhancement provider of the proposed sale of the receivables by the
receivables trustee to a third party and will provide each enhancement provider
an opportunity to bid on purchasing the receivables.
The proceeds of the sale will be deposited in the Trust Accounts for
distribution to the beneficiaries as set out in the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement and the series supplements.
An "eligible trust cash manager" means an entity that, when it is trust
cash manager:
* is legally qualified and has the capacity to carry out the cash
management functions as set forth in the declaration of trust and
trust cash management agreement;
* is qualified or licensed to use the software that the trust cash
manager is then currently using to carry out cash management of
the receivables or obtains the right to use, or has its own,
software that is adequate to perform its duties under the
declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement; and
* has, in the opinion of each rating agency, demonstrated the
ability to professionally and competently act as a cash manager
with customary standards of skill and care.
Series 99-1
General
The MTN issuer will be an investor beneficiary of the receivables trust
and a member of series 99-1. Series 99-1 will be constituted on the closing
date by a series supplement that is called the "Series 99-1 Supplement". The
parties to the Series 99-1 Supplement are the receivables trustee and
Barclaycard as the transferor beneficiary, the excess interest beneficiary, the
trust cash manager and the transferor and:
* the MTN issuer as the beneficiary of the class entitled to the
Class A Investor Interest -- called "Class A";
* the MTN issuer as the beneficiary of the class entitled to the
Class B Investor Interest -- called "Class B"; and
* the MTN issuer as the beneficiary of the class entitled to the
Class C Investor Interest -- called "Class C".
The MTN issuer will become the first investor beneficiary by making the
following payments to the receivables trustee on the closing date:
* for Class A, L546,345,000; we call this the "Class A Initial
Investor Interest";
* for Class B, L30,352,500; we call this the "Class B Initial
Investor Interest"; and
* for Class C, L30,352,500; we call this the "Class C Initial
Investor Interest".
The MTN issuer will receive an investor certificate for each class. These
certificates will be evidence of the initial investor beneficial interests for
series 99-1 in the receivables trust and will be governed by English law.
The MTN issuer will confirm the following in the Series 99-1 Supplement:
* that its usual place of abode is within the United Kingdom for the
purpose of Section 349 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act
1988; and
* that it has a business establishment -- as defined for the
purposes of the Value Added Tax Act 1994 -- in the United Kingdom
that is either its only business establishment or is its business
establishment at which the services received by it as contemplated
in the declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement
and any related document will be most directly used.
Series 99-1 will be included in group one and will not be subordinated to
any other investor beneficiary or series. See "-- Shared Principal Collections"
for the ramifications of series 99-1 being included in group one.
56
<PAGE>
Beneficial Entitlement of the MTN Issuer to Trust Property
In order to understand the beneficial entitlement of the MTN issuer to the
property of the receivables trust you will need to understand the following
definitions.
The "Class A Floating Allocation", the "Class B Floating Allocation" and
the "Class C Floating Allocation" will each be calculated the same way and will
be equal to, for each class and for each monthly period, the following fraction
expressed as a percentage:
The Adjusted Investor Interest for the relevant class
-----------------------------------------------------
Adjusted Investor Interest
where these amounts are calculated on the close of business on the last day of
the monthly period prior to the transfer date.
The floating allocation for each class for the first monthly period will
be calculated as follows:
The initial investor interest for the relevant class
----------------------------------------------------
Initial Investor Interest
"Class A Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal to:
(1) the Class A Initial Investor Interest, minus
(2) the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class A
investor certificates from the property of the receivables trust,
minus
(3) the total amount of Class A Investor Charge-Offs for all prior
transfer dates, plus
(4) the total amount of any reimbursements of Class A Investor Charge-
Offs on all prior transfer dates.
The Class A Investor Interest, however, may not be reduced below zero.
"Class A Adjusted Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal
to the Class A Investor Interest minus the balance on deposit in the Principal
Funding Account, but not more than the Class A Investor Interest.
"Class A Investor Charge-Off" means a reduction in the Class A Investor
Interest on any transfer date by the amount, if any, by which the Class A
Investor Default Amount exceeds the total amount of Class A Available Funds,
Excess Spread, Reallocated Class B Principal Collections, Reallocated Class C
Principal Collections, the Class C Investor Interest and the Class B Investor
Interest, in each case, available and allocated on that transfer date to fund
the Class A Investor Default Amount.
"Adjusted Investor Interest" means the sum of the Class A Adjusted
Investor Interest, the Class B Adjusted Investor Interest and the Class C
Adjusted Investor Interest.
"Investor Interest" means the sum of the Class A Investor Interest, the
Class B Investor Interest and the Class C Investor Interest.
"Initial Investor Interest" means L607,050,000. This equals the sum of the
Class A Initial Investor Interest, the Class B Initial Investor Interest and
the Class C Initial Investor Interest.
"Class B Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal to:
(1) the Class B Initial Investor Interest, minus
(2) the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class B
investor certificates from the property of the receivables trust,
minus
(3) the total amount of Class B Investor Charge-Offs for all prior
transfer dates, minus
(4) the total amount of Reallocated Class B Principal Collections
allocated on all prior transfer dates that have been used to fund
the Class A Required Amount, excluding any Reallocated Class B
Principal Collections that have resulted in a reduction in the
Class C Investor Interest, minus
(5) an amount equal to any reductions in the Class B Investor Interest
on all prior transfer dates to fund the Class A Investor Default
Amount, plus
(6) the total amount of Excess Spread allocated and available on all
prior transfer dates to reimburse amounts deducted under (3), (4)
and (5) above.
The Class B Investor Interest, however, may not be reduced below zero.
"Class B Adjusted Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal
to the Class B Investor Interest minus the balance on deposit in the Principal
Funding Account in excess of the Class A Investor Interest, but not more than
the Class B Investor Interest.
57
<PAGE>
"Class B Investor Charge-Off" means a reduction in the Class B Investor
Interest on any transfer date by the amount, if any, by which the Class B
Investor Default Amount exceeds the total amount of Excess Spread, Reallocated
Class C Principal Collections and the Class C Investor Interest, in each case
available and allocated on that transfer date to fund the Class B Investor
Default Amount.
"Class C Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal to:
(1) the Class C Initial Investor Interest, minus
(2) the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class C
investor certificates from the property of the receivables trust,
minus
(3) the total amount of Class C Investor Charge-Offs for all prior
transfer dates, minus
(4) the total amount of Reallocated Class B Principal Collections
allocable to the Class C Investor Interest and Reallocated Class C
Principal Collections on all prior transfer dates that have been
used to fund the Class A Required Amount and the Class B Required
Amount, minus
(5) any reductions in the Class C Investor Interest on all prior
transfer dates to fund the Class A Investor Default Amount and the
Class B Investor Default Amount, plus
(6) the total amount of Excess Spread allocated and available on all
prior transfer dates to reimburse amounts deducted under (3), (4)
and (5) above.
The Class C Investor Interest, however, may not be reduced below zero.
"Class C Adjusted Investor Interest" means, at any time, an amount equal
to the Class C Investor Interest minus the balance on deposit in the Principal
Funding Account in excess of the sum of the Class A Investor Interest and the
Class B Investor Interest, but not more than the Class C Investor Interest.
"Class C Investor Charge-Off" means a reduction in the Class C Investor
Interest on any transfer date by the amount, if any, by which the Class C
Investor Default Amount exceeds the amount of Excess Spread available and
allocated on that transfer date to fund the Class C Investor Default Amount.
The beneficial entitlement of the MTN issuer as the investor beneficiary
for series 99-1 to eligible principal receivables -- which includes principal
collections that are the property of the receivables trust but excludes the
amount on deposit in the Principal Funding Account -- is equal to the
proportion that the Adjusted Investor Interest bears to the amount of eligible
principal receivables assigned or purported to be assigned to the receivables
trust at any time. However, the beneficial entitlement for each class will not
exceed the Class A Adjusted Investor Interest, the Class B Adjusted Investor
Interest or the Class C Adjusted Investor Interest at any time.
The beneficial entitlement of the MTN issuer as the investor beneficiary
for series 99-1 to finance charge collections during any monthly period is equal
to the proportion that the floating allocation for each class bears to the
Investor Percentage of finance charge collections for such monthly period
credited to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger from time to time during that
monthly period. However, the beneficial entitlement will not exceed the sum of
the monthly required expense amount, the investor servicing fee, the investor
trust cash management fee and the Investor Default Amount for any class of
series 99-1 during any monthly period.
The beneficial entitlement of the MTN issuer as the investor beneficiary
for series 99-1 at any time to any other property of the receivables trust not
separately held or segregated for any other beneficiary or series will be equal
to the proportion that the Class A Adjusted Investor Interest, the Class B
Adjusted Investor Interest or the Class C Adjusted Investor Interest bears to
the amount of eligible principal receivables from time to time assigned or
purported to be assigned to the receivables trust. The MTN issuer will not be
entitled to the benefit of any credit enhancement for any class available only
for any other beneficiary, series other than series 99-1 or classes within a
series other than series 99-1, except to the extent it is an investor
beneficiary for another series.
The MTN issuer will be beneficially entitled to all monies held in any
Trust Account other than:
* the Trustee Collection Account -- except for the Distribution
Ledger for each class; or
* the Trustee Acquisition Account;
that are expressly segregated by separate account or by ledger entry or
otherwise, as allocated to the MTN issuer for each class.
Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of Finance Charge Collections to the
MTN Issuer
On each day on which collections are transferred to the Trustee Collection
Account during the Revolving Period, the Controlled Accumulation Period and, if
applicable, the Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period,
the receivables trustee will credit to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger
for series 99-1 an amount calculated as follows:
58
<PAGE>
A x B
Where:
A = Floating Investor Percentage; and
B = the total amount of finance charge collections processed on
that date.
"Floating Investor Percentage" means, for any monthly period, the
following fraction expressed as a percentage:
A
---------------------
The greater of B or C
Where:
A = the Adjusted Investor Interest;
B = the total balance of eligible principal receivables in the
receivables trust plus the Unavailable Principal
Collections standing to the credit of the Principal
Collections Ledger;
C = the sum of the numerators used to calculate the floating
investor percentages for all outstanding series.
These amounts will be calculated for any monthly period other than the
first monthly period as of the last day of the prior monthly period. For the
first monthly period, they will be calculated as of the closing date. The
Floating Investor Percentage will never exceed 100 per cent.
Notwithstanding the above, for a monthly period in which an addition date
occurs, B in the fraction used to calculate the Floating Investor Percentage
will be:
* for the period from the first day of the monthly period to the
addition date, the total balance of eligible principal receivables
in the receivables trust plus the Unavailable Principal
Collections standing to the credit of the Principal Collections
Ledger at the close of business on the last day of the prior
monthly period; and
* for the period from the addition date through the last day of the
monthly period, the total balance of eligible principal
receivables in the receivables trust plus the Unavailable
Principal Collections standing to the credit of the Principal
Collections Ledger on the addition date -- taking into account the
eligible principal receivables added to the receivables trust.
If, in any monthly period the Investor Interest would be zero if the
payments to be made on the distribution date in that monthly period were made
on the last day of the prior monthly period, the Floating Investor Percentage
will be zero.
Class A Investor Interest
To understand the amount of finance charge collections distributable to
the MTN issuer for Class A on any transfer date, you need to understand the
following definitions and cash flows.
The "Class A Monthly Required Expense Amount" for any transfer date will
be the sum of the following items:
* the Class A Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class A Trustee
Payment Amount from previous transfer dates; see "-- Trustee
Payment Amount";
* the MTN Issuer Costs Amount;
* the Class A Monthly Finance Amount;
* the Class A Deficiency Amount; and
* the Class A Additional Finance Amount.
"Class A Monthly Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period X The interest rate on X The Class A Debt Amount
-------------------------- the class A MTNs
365 (366 in a leap year)
</TABLE>
"Class A Deficiency Amount" is the excess, if any, of the Class A Monthly
Required Expense Amount for the prior transfer date -- disregarding for this
purpose the Class A Trustee Payment Amount and the MTN Issuer Costs Amount --
over the funds allocable to Class A actually credited to the Class A
Distribution Ledger for payment of the Class A Monthly Required Expense Amount
on that transfer date.
59
<PAGE>
"Class A Additional Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as
follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period The interest rate on Any unpaid Class A
-------------------------- X the class A MTNs plus X Deficiency Amount on
365 (366 in a leap year) 2.0 per cent. the prior transfer date
</TABLE>
The first "distribution date" or "interest payment date" will be 15
January, 2000 or, if that day is not a business day, the next business day
after the 15th, and each subsequent distribution date or interest payment date
will be the 15th day of each calendar month, or if that day is not a business
day, the next business day after the 15th.
"Calculation Period" means, for any distribution date, the period from and
including the previous distribution date or, in the case of the first
distribution date, from and including the closing date, to but excluding that
distribution date.
"Class A Debt Amount" means the Class A Initial Investor Interest minus
the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class A investor
certificates from the property of the receivables trust. On the series 99-1
termination date, the Class A Debt Amount will be zero.
"MTN Issuer Costs Amount" means the amounts certified by the security
trustee as being required to pay the fees, costs and expenses of the MTN issuer
accrued due and payable on a transfer date. This amount includes the fees,
costs and expenses of the security trustee and any receiver appointed pursuant
to the security trust deed, any fees, costs and expenses remaining unpaid from
previous transfer dates together with any VAT payable on any of the above
items, where relevant.
"Class A Available Funds" for any monthly period equals the sum of the
following amounts credited to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger for that
monthly period:
* the Class A Floating Allocation of finance charge collections
allocated to series 99-1;
* the Class A Floating Allocation of Acquired Interchange allocated
to series 99-1;
* for any monthly period during the Controlled Accumulation Period
before payment in full of the Class A Investor Interest, the
Principal Funding Investment Proceeds -- up to a maximum amount
equal to the Class A Covered Amount; see "-- Principal Funding
Account"; and
* any amounts withdrawn from the Reserve Account; see "-- Reserve
Account".
The amount of Acquired Interchange allocated to series 99-1 for any
monthly period will be the product of the Acquired Interchange and the Floating
Investor Percentage. This allocated Acquired Interchange will be credited to
the Finance Charge Collections Ledger.
On each transfer date, the receivables trustee will withdraw the Class A
Available Funds from the Finance Charge Collections Ledger, and they will be
distributed in the following order:
(1) the Class A Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class A Trustee
Payment Amounts from prior transfer dates will be used by the receivables
trustee to satisfy the Trustee Payment Amounts;
(2) the MTN Issuer Costs Amount will be credited to the Class A Distribution
Ledger;
(3) the sum of the Class A Monthly Finance Amount, the Class A Deficiency
Amount and the Class A Additional Finance Amount will be credited to the
Class A Distribution Ledger;
(4) the class A servicing fee and class A cash management fee and any due and
unpaid class A servicing fees or class A cash management fees from prior
transfer dates will be distributed to the servicer or trust cash manager,
as applicable;
(5) an amount equal to the Class A Investor Default Amount will be allocated
to Class A and treated as a portion of Investor Principal Collections
allocated to Class A and credited to the Principal Collections Ledger;
and
(6) the balance -- called "Class A Excess Spread" -- will be part of Excess
Spread and will be allocated as described in "-- Excess Spread".
On each distribution date, all amounts credited to the Class A
Distribution Ledger for the amounts in (2) and (3) above will be deposited into
the Series 99-1 Distribution Account and will be owned by the MTN issuer. The
amount in (3) above is called the "Class A Monthly Distribution Amount".
The "Series 99-1 Distribution Account" is a bank account in the name of
the MTN issuer that will be used to deposit amounts distributed to the MTN
issuer for the series 99-1 investor certificates from the receivables trust.
The "Class A Distribution Ledger" is a ledger for Class A in the Trustee
Collection Account.
See "-- Distribution Ledgers".
60
<PAGE>
Class B Investor Interest
To understand the amount of finance charge collections distributable to
the MTN issuer for Class B on any transfer date, you need to understand the
following definitions and cash flows.
The "Class B Monthly Required Expense Amount" for any transfer date will
be the sum of the following items:
* the Class B Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class B Trustee
Payment Amounts from previous transfer dates; see "-- Trustee
Payment Amount";
* the Class B Monthly Finance Amount;
* the Class B Deficiency Amount; and
* the Class B Additional Finance Amount.
"Class B Monthly Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period X The interest rate on X The Class B Debt Amount
-------------------------- the class B MTNs
365 (366 in a leap year)
</TABLE>
"Class B Deficiency Amount" is the excess, if any, of the Class B Monthly
Required Expense Amount for the prior transfer date -- disregarding for this
purpose the Class B Trustee Payment Amount -- over the funds allocable to Class
B actually credited to the Class B Distribution Ledger for payment of the Class
B Monthly Required Expense Amount on that transfer date.
"Class B Additional Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as
follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period The interest rate on Any unpaid Class B
-------------------------- X the class B MTNs plus X Deficiency Amount on
365 (366 in a leap year) 2.0 per cent. the prior transfer date
</TABLE>
"Class B Debt Amount" means the Class B Initial Investor Interest minus
the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class B investor
certificates from the property of the receivables trust. On the series 99-1
termination date, the Class B Debt Amount will be zero.
"Class B Available Funds" for any monthly period equals the sum of the
following amounts credited to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger for that
monthly period:
* the Class B Floating Allocation of finance charge collections
allocated to series 99-1; and
* the Class B Floating Allocation of Acquired Interchange allocated
to series 99-1.
On each transfer date, the receivables trustee will withdraw the Class B
Available Funds from the Finance Charge Collections Ledger, and they will be
distributed in the following order:
(1) the Class B Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class B Trustee
Payment Amounts from prior transfer dates will be used by the
receivables trustee to satisfy the Trustee Payment Amounts;
(2) the sum of the Class B Monthly Finance Amount, the Class B
Deficiency Amount and the Class B Additional Finance Amount will
be credited to the Class B Distribution Ledger;
(3) the class B servicing fee and class B cash management fee and any
due and unpaid class B servicing fees and class B cash management
fees from prior transfer dates will be distributed to the servicer
or trust cash manager, as applicable; and
(4) the balance -- called "Class B Excess Spread" -- will be part of
Excess Spread and will be allocated as described in "-- Excess
Spread".
On each distribution date, all amounts credited to the Class B
Distribution Ledger for the amounts in (2) above -- called the "Class B Monthly
Distribution Amount" -- will be deposited into the Series 99-1 Distribution
Account and will be owned by the MTN issuer.
The "Class B Distribution Ledger" is a ledger for Class B in the Trustee
Collection Account. See
"-- Distribution Ledgers".
Class C Investor Interest
To understand the amount of finance charge collections distributable to
the MTN issuer for Class C on any transfer date, you need to understand the
following definitions and cash flows.
61
<PAGE>
The "Class C Monthly Required Expense Amount" will be the sum of the
following items:
* the Class C Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class C Trustee
Payment Amounts from previous transfer dates; see "-- Trustee
Payment Amount";
* the Class C Monthly Finance Amount;
* the Class C Deficiency Amount; and
* the Class C Additional Finance Amount.
"Class C Monthly Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period X The interest rate on X The Class C Debt Amount
-------------------------- the class C MTNs
365 (366 in a leap year)
</TABLE>
"Class C Deficiency Amount" is the excess, if any, of the Class C Monthly
Required Expense Amount for the prior transfer date -- disregarding for this
purpose the Class C Trustee Payment Amount -- over the funds allocable to Class
C actually credited to the Class C Distribution Ledger for payment of the Class
C Monthly Required Expense Amount on that transfer date.
"Class C Additional Finance Amount" means the amount calculated as
follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period The interest rate on Any unpaid Class C
-------------------------- X the class C MTNs plus X Deficiency Amount on
365 (366 in a leap year) 2.0 per cent. the prior transfer date
</TABLE>
"Class C Debt Amount" means the Class C Initial Investor Interest minus
the total principal payments made to the MTN issuer on the class C investor
certificates from the property of the receivables trust. On the series 99-1
termination date, the Class C Debt Amount will be zero.
"Class C Available Funds" for any monthly period equals the sum of the
following amounts credited to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger for that
monthly period:
* the Class C Floating Allocation of finance charge collections
allocated to series 99-1; and
* the Class C Floating Allocation of Acquired Interchange allocated
to series 99-1.
On each transfer date, the receivables trustee will withdraw the Class C
Available Funds from the Finance Charge Collections Ledger, and they will be
distributed in the following order:
(1) the Class C Trustee Payment Amount plus any unpaid Class C Trustee
Payment Amounts from prior transfer dates will be used by the receivables
trustee to satisfy the Trustee Payment Amounts;
(2) the class C servicing fee and class C cash management fee and any due and
unpaid class C servicing fees or class C cash management fees from prior
transfer dates will be distributed to the beneficiaries servicer or trust
cash manager, as applicable; and
(3) the balance -- called "Class C Excess Spread" -- will be part of Excess
Spread and will be allocated as described in "-- Excess Spread".
The "Class C Distribution Ledger" is a ledger for Class C in the Trustee
Collection Account. See "-- Distribution Ledgers".
Revolving Period
The "Revolving Period" for series 99-1 is the period from the closing date
to the start of the Controlled Accumulation Period or, if earlier, the start of
the Rapid Amortisation Period or the Regulated Amortisation Period.
During the Revolving Period, principal collections allocable daily to the
Class A Investor Interest will be used by the receivables trustee as Shared
Principal Collections and, to the extent not used as Shared Principal
Collections, to make payments to the transferor:
* to accept new offers of receivables made by the transferor to the
receivables trustee, and
* to make payments to the transferor for future receivables assigned
by the transferor to the receivables trustee by offers that have
already been made and accepted.
Principal collections allocable to the Class B Investor Interest and the
Class C Investor Interest will be used by the receivables trustee as described
in the previous paragraph on the next following transfer date to the
62
<PAGE>
extent not required to fund shortfalls for the Class A Investor Interest and --
for principal collections allocable to the Class C Investor Interest -- the
Class B Investor Interest.
Controlled Accumulation Period
The "Controlled Accumulation Period" for series 99-1 is the period
scheduled to begin on the close of business on 31 October, 2001 and ending when
the Investor Interest is paid in full, unless a Pay Out Event occurs and the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period begins. If the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period begins before
the start of the Controlled Accumulation Period, there will not be a Controlled
Accumulation Period for series 99-1. The start of the Controlled Accumulation
Period may be delayed until no later than the close of business on 30
September, 2002. See "-- Postponement of Controlled Accumulation Period".
During the Controlled Accumulation Period the principal collections
allocated to the Investor Interest for series 99-1, up to the Controlled
Deposit Amount, will be accumulated by the receivables trustee in a trust
account called the "Principal Funding Account" for distribution to the MTN
issuer as the investor beneficiary for Class A, Class B and Class C on the
November 2002 distribution date -- called the "series 99-1 scheduled redemption
date". Any principal collections allocated to the Investor Interest for series
99-1 over the amount that will be deposited in the Principal Funding Account
will be used by the receivables trustee first as Shared Principal Collections
and then to make payments to the transferor as described above under "--
Revolving Period".
The "Controlled Deposit Amount" for any transfer date for the Controlled
Accumulation Period or the Regulated Amortisation Period will be L50,587,500,
which equals the Initial Investor Interest divided by 12, or for a Regulated
Amortisation Period, if greater, may be an amount not exceeding 1/12 of the
total sum of all investor interests of all series in group one -- except
Companion Series -- that are scheduled to be in their revolving periods. If the
start of the Controlled Accumulation Period is delayed as described in "--
Postponement of Controlled Accumulation Period", the Controlled Deposit Amount
will be greater than L50,587,500. This higher amount will be determined by the
servicer based on the principal payment rates on the designated accounts and on
the investor interests of series in group one -- except Companion Series --
that are scheduled to be in their revolving periods. In any case, during the
Controlled Accumulation Period, the Controlled Deposit Amount will be the
amount that, if deposited in the Principal Funding Account on each transfer
date for the Controlled Accumulation Period, will cause the balance of the
Principal Funding Account to equal the Investor Interest on the series 99-1
scheduled redemption date. The Controlled Deposit Amount for any transfer date
will include the amount of any shortfall in payment of the Controlled Deposit
Amount for the previous transfer date.
Regulated Amortisation Period
A "Regulated Amortisation Period" will start on the day, if there is one,
that any of the following Series 99-1 Pay Out Events occur, each of which we
refer to as a "Regulated Amortisation Trigger Event":
* the average Portfolio Yield for any three consecutive monthly
periods is less than the average Expense Rate for those periods
or, on any determination date before the end of the third monthly
period from the closing date, the Portfolio Yield is less than the
average Expense Rate for that period; or
* Either:
(1) over any period of thirty consecutive days, the Transferor
Interest averaged over that period is less than the Minimum
Transferor Interest for that period and the Transferor
Interest does not increase on or before the tenth business
day following that thirty day period to an amount so that
the average of the Transferor Interest as a percentage of
the Average Principal Receivables for such thirty day
period, computed by assuming that the amount of the
increase of the Transferor Interest by the last day of that
ten business day period, as compared to the Transferor
Interest on the last day of the thirty day period, would
have existed in the receivables trust during each day of
the thirty day period, is at least equal to the Minimum
Transferor Interest; or
(2) on the last day of any monthly period the total balance of
eligible principal receivables is less than the Minimum
Aggregate Principal Receivables, adjusted for any series
having a Companion Series as described in the supplement
for that series and the Companion Series, and the total
balance of eligible principal receivables fails to increase
to an amount equal to or greater than the Minimum Aggregate
Principal Receivables on or before the tenth business day
following that last day.
63
<PAGE>
The Regulated Amortisation Period will continue until the earlier of:
* the start of the Rapid Amortisation Period; and
* the series 99-1 termination date.
During the Regulated Amortisation Period the amount of principal
collections allocated to the Investor Interest for series 99-1, up to the
Controlled Deposit Amount, will be paid each month to the MTN issuer first for
the Class A Investor Interest, second for the Class B Investor Interest and
third for the Class C Investor Interest until the series 99-1 termination date.
Any principal collections allocated to the Investor Interest for series 99-1
over the Controlled Deposit Amount paid to the MTN issuer will be used by the
receivables trustee first as Shared Principal Collections and then to make
payments to the transferor as described above under "-- Revolving Period".
Rapid Amortisation Period
A "Rapid Amortisation Period" will start on the first day of the monthly
period next following the day on which any Pay Out Event other than a Regulated
Amortisation Trigger Event occurs.
The Rapid Amortisation Period will continue until the earlier of:
* the series 99-1 termination date; or
* the dissolution of the receivables trust following the occurrence
of an Insolvency Event; see "The Receivables Trust: Trust Pay Out
Events".
During the Rapid Amortisation Period, principal collections allocable to
the Investor Interest of series 99-1 will be paid each month to the MTN issuer
first for the Class A Investor Interest, second for the Class B Investor
Interest and third for the Class C Investor Interest until the series 99-1
termination date.
The "series 99-1 termination date" is the earlier of the distribution date
on which the Investor Interest has been reduced to zero and the November 2004
distribution date.
Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of Principal Collections to the MTN
Issuer
During the Revolving Period, principal collections will be allocated to
the Investor Interest on the basis of the Floating Investor Percentage. During
the Controlled Accumulation Period, the Regulated Amortisation Period and the
Rapid Amortisation Period, principal collections will be allocated to the
Investor Interest on the basis of the Fixed Investor Percentage. The amount of
principal collections allocated to the Investor Interest at any time will be
credited to the Principal Collections Ledger for series 99-1. The principal
collections credited to the Principal Collections Ledger from time to time that
will be allocated to the MTN issuer will be:
* during the Revolving Period, equal to the total of the floating
allocations for each class;
* during the Controlled Accumulation Period, the Regulated
Amortisation Period and the Rapid Amortisation Period, equal to
the total of the fixed allocations for each class.
"Fixed Investor Percentage" means, for any monthly period, the following
calculation expressed as a percentage:
A
---------------------
the greater of B or C
Where:
A = the Investor Interest calculated at the close of business
on the last day of the Revolving Period;
B = the total balance of eligible principal receivables in the
receivables trust plus the Unavailable Principal
Collections standing to the credit of the Principal
Collections Ledger; and
C = the sum of the numerators used to calculate the fixed
investor percentages for all outstanding series.
Items B and C above will be calculated for any monthly period as of the last
day of the prior monthly period. For the first monthly period, they will be
calculated as of the closing date. The Fixed Investor Percentage will never
exceed 100 per cent.
Notwithstanding the above, for a monthly period in which an addition date
occurs, B in the fraction used to calculate the Fixed Allocation Percentage
above, will be:
64
<PAGE>
* for the period from the first day of the monthly period to the
addition date, the total balance of eligible principal receivables
in the receivables trust plus the Unavailable Principal
Collections standing to the credit of the Principal Collections
Ledger at the close of business on the last day of the prior
monthly period; and
* for the period from the addition date to the last day of the
monthly period, the total balance of eligible principal
receivables in the receivables trust plus the the Unavailable
Principal Collections standing to the credit of the Principal
Collections Ledger on the addition date, taking into account the
eligible principal receivables added to the receivables trust.
If in any monthly period the Investor Interest would be zero if the
payments to be made on the distribution date during that monthly period were
made on the last day of the prior monthly period, the Fixed Investor Percentage
will be zero.
The "Class A Fixed Allocation", the "Class B Fixed Allocation" and the
"Class C Fixed Allocation" will each be calculated the same way and will be
equal to, for each class and for any monthly period after the end of the
Revolving Period, the following fraction expressed as a percentage:
Investor interest for the relevant class
------------------------------------------
Investor Interest
This percentage, never to exceed 100 per cent., will be calculated using
these amounts on the close of business on the last day of the Revolving Period.
On each business day during the Revolving Period which is not a transfer
date, the Reinvested Investor Principal Collections for that day will be
distributed in the following priority:
* the Reinvested Investor Principal Collections will be applied as
Shared Principal Collections and allocated to other outstanding
series in group one; see "-- Shared Principal Collections"; and
* the balance remaining will be applied as Investor Cash Available
for Acquisition in the manner described in "The Receivables Trust:
Acquiring Additional Entitlements to Trust Property and Payments
for Receivables".
"Reinvested Investor Principal Collections" means, for any business day:
* principal collections credited to the Principal Collections Ledger
identified for series 99-1, after adjustments for Unavailable
Principal Collections during the Controlled Accumulation Period,
the Regulated Amortisation Period and the Rapid Amortisation
Period -- for any day called the "Daily Investor Principal
Collections"; minus
* an amount equal to the product of the Class B Floating Allocation
and the Daily Investor Principal Collections; minus
* an amount equal to the product of the Class C Floating Allocation
and the Daily Investor Principal Collections.
"Available Investor Principal Collections" means, for any monthly period:
* the Investor Principal Collections; minus
* the Investor Cash Available for Acquisition that has been
calculated as being available to be used during that monthly
period; minus
* the Reallocated Class C Principal Collections that are required to
fund the Class A Required Amount or the Class B Required Amount;
minus
* the Reallocated Class B Principal Collections for that monthly
period that are required to fund the Class A Required Amount; plus
* the Shared Principal Collections allocated from other series in
group one that are allocated to series 99-1; plus
* for a monthly period in which the Rapid Amortisation Period
starts, any previously identified Investor Cash Available for
Acquisition that was not used to acquire receivables.
"Investor Principal Collections" means, for any monthly period, the sum
of:
* principal collections credited to the Principal Collections Ledger
identified for series 99-1, after adjustments for Unavailable
Principal Collections during the Controlled Accumulation Period,
the Regulated Amortisation Period and the Rapid Amortisation
Period; plus
65
<PAGE>
* amounts treated as Investor Principal Collections up to the Class
A Investor Default Amount and distributed out of Class A Available
Funds, Excess Spread, Reallocated Class C Principal Collections
and Reallocated Class B Principal Collections; plus
* amounts treated as Investor Principal Collections up to the Class
B Investor Default Amount and distributed out of Excess Spread and
Reallocated Class C Principal Collections; plus
* amounts treated as Investor Principal Collections up to the Class
C Investor Default Amount and distributed out of Excess Spread;
plus
* Excess Spread treated as Investor Principal Collections used to
reimburse Class A Investor Charge-Offs, any reductions in the
Class B Investor Interest and any reductions in the Class C
Investor Interest; plus
* Unavailable Principal Collections credited to the Principal
Collections Ledger and to be treated as Investor Principal
Collections; see "-- Unavailable Principal Collections".
On each transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period, the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period, the receivables
trustee will withdraw the Class A Monthly Principal Amount from the Principal
Collections Ledger and:
* for a transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period,
deposit it into the Principal Funding Account; or
* for a transfer date during the Rapid Amortisation Period or
Regulated Amortisation Period, credit it to the Class A
Distribution Ledger.
The "Class A Monthly Principal Amount" is the least of:
* the Available Investor Principal Collections standing to the
credit of the Principal Collections Ledger on that transfer date;
* for each transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period or
the Regulated Amortisation Period before the series 99-1 scheduled
redemption date, the Controlled Deposit Amount for that transfer
date; and
* the Class A Adjusted Investor Interest -- adjusted to account for
any unreimbursed Class A Investor Charge-Offs.
The first distribution date (1) for the Controlled Accumulation Period, on
which an amount equal to the Class A Investor Interest has been deposited in
the Principal Funding Account, or (2) during the Rapid Amortisation Period or
the Regulated Amortisation Period, on which the Class A Investor Interest is
paid in full, is called the "Class B Principal Commencement Date".
Starting with the Class B Principal Commencement Date, to the extent there
are funds remaining after distributing the Class A Monthly Principal Amount,
the receivables trustee will withdraw the Class B Monthly Principal Amount from
the Principal Collections Ledger and:
* for a transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period,
deposit it into the Principal Funding Account; or
* for a transfer date during the Rapid Amortisation Period or the
Regulated Amortisation Period, credit it to the Class B
Distribution Ledger.
The "Class B Monthly Principal Amount" is the lesser of:
* the Available Investor Principal Collections standing to the
credit of the Principal Collections Ledger on that transfer date
minus, if applicable, the Class A Monthly Principal Amount; and
* the Class B Adjusted Investor Interest -- adjusted to account for
any unreimbursed reductions in the Class B Investor Interest for
reasons other than principal payments.
The first distribution date (1) for the Controlled Accumulation Period, on
which an amount equal to the sum of the Class A Investor Interest and the Class
B Investor Interest has been deposited in the Principal Funding Account, or (2)
during the Rapid Amortisation Period or the Regulated Amortisation Period, on
which the Class B Investor Interest is paid in full, is called the "Class C
Principal Commencement Date".
Starting with the Class C Principal Commencement Date, to the extent there
are funds remaining after distributing the Class A Monthly Principal Amount and
the Class B Monthly Principal Amount, as applicable, the receivables trustee
will withdraw the Class C Monthly Principal Amount from the Principal
Collections Ledger and:
66
<PAGE>
* for a transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period,
deposit it into the Principal Funding Account; or
* for a transfer date during the Rapid Amortisation Period or the
Regulated Amortisation Period, credit it to the Class C
Distribution Ledger.
The "Class C Monthly Principal Amount" is the lesser of:
* the Available Investor Principal Collections standing to the
credit of the Principal Collections Ledger on that transfer date
minus, if applicable, the Class A Monthly Principal Amount and the
Class B Monthly Principal Amount; and
* the Class C Adjusted Investor Interest -- adjusted to account for
any unreimbursed reductions in the Class C Investor Interest for
reasons other than principal payments.
On the earlier of (1) the first distribution date during the Rapid
Amortisation Period or the Regulated Amortisation Period and (2) the series 99-
1 scheduled redemption date, and on each distribution date after that, the
receivables trustee will distribute the following amounts in the following
priority:
(1) from the Principal Funding Account, an amount equal to the lesser of:
* the amount on deposit in the Principal Funding Account; and
* the Class A Investor Interest,
will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for Class A and
will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this amount to
redeem the class A MTNs in whole, if the amount distributed is equal to
the Class A Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding on the
class A MTNs if the amount is less;
(2) from the Class A Distribution Ledger an amount equal to the lesser of:
* the amount credited to the Class A Distribution Ledger; and
* the Class A Investor Interest, after taking into account the
amount described in clause (1) above;
will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for class A and
will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this amount to
redeem the class A MTNs in whole, if the amount distributed is equal to
the Class A Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding on the
class A MTNs if the amount is less.
Starting on the earlier of (1) if the amount on deposit in the Principal
Funding Account exceeds the Class A Investor Interest, the series 99-1
scheduled redemption date and (2) during the Rapid Amortisation Period or the
Regulated Amortisation Period, the Class B Principal Commencement Date, and on
each distribution date after that, the receivables trustee will distribute the
following amounts in the following priority:
(1) from the Principal Funding Account, an amount equal to the lesser of:
* the amount on deposit in the Principal Funding Account in excess
of the Class A Investor Interest; and
* the Class B Investor Interest;
will be deposited to the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for Class B and
will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this amount to
redeem the class B MTNs in whole, if the amount distributed is equal to
the Class B Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding on the
class B MTNs if the amount is less;
(2) from the Class B Distribution Ledger an amount equal to the lesser of:
* the amount credited to the Class B Distribution Ledger; and
* the Class B Investor Interest, after taking into account the
amount described in clause (1) above;
this amount will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for
Class B and will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this
amount to redeem the class B MTNs in whole, if the amount distributed is
equal to the Class B Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding
on the class B MTNs if the amount is less.
Starting on the earlier of (1) if the amount on deposit in the Principal
Funding Account exceeds the sum of the Class A Investor Interest and the Class
B Investor Interest, the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date, and (2) during
the Rapid Amortisation Period or the Regulated Amortisation Period, the Class C
Principal
67
<PAGE>
Commencement Date, and on each distribution date after that, the receivables
trustee will distribute the following amounts in the following priority:
(1) from the Principal Funding Account, an amount equal to the lesser of:
* the amount on deposit in the Principal Funding Account in excess
of the sum of the Class A Investor Interest and the Class B
Investor Interest; and
* the Class C Investor Interest;
will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for Class C and
will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this amount to
redeem the class C MTNs in whole, if the amount distributed is equal to
the Class C Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding on the
class C MTNs if the amount is less;
(2) from the Class C Distribution Ledger, an amount equal to the lesser of;
* the amount credited to the Class C Distribution Ledger; and
* the Class C Investor Interest after taking into account the amount
described in clause (1) above;
will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Distribution Account for Class C and
will be owned by the MTN issuer. The MTN issuer will use this amount to
redeem the class C MTNs in whole if the amount distributed is equal to
the Class C Investor Interest, or to repay principal outstanding on the
class C MTNs, if the amount is less.
Postponement of Controlled Accumulation Period
The Controlled Accumulation Period is scheduled to begin on the close of
business on 31 October, 2001. If the Controlled Accumulation Period Length,
which is explained in the next paragraph, is less than 12 months, the Revolving
Period may be extended and the start of the Controlled Accumulation Period will
be postponed. The Controlled Accumulation Period will, in any event, begin no
later than the close of business on
30 September, 2002.
On the determination date right before the distribution date in July 2001,
and on each determination date after that, until the Controlled Accumulation
Period begins, the servicer will determine the "Controlled Accumulation Period
Length". This is the number of months that the servicer expects will be needed
to fully fund the Principal Funding Account no later than the series 99-1
scheduled redemption date. This calculation is based on:
* the expected monthly principal collections that the servicer
calculates will be available to the investor interests of all
series other than excluded series, assuming a principal payment
rate no greater than the lowest monthly principal payment rate on
the receivables for the twelve months before; and
* the amount of principal expected to be distributable to the
investor interests of all series in group one -- other than
Companion Series -- that are not expected to be in their revolving
periods during the Controlled Accumulation Period.
If the Controlled Accumulation Period Length is less than twelve months,
the servicer may, at its option, postpone the start of the Controlled
Accumulation Period such that the number of calendar months in the Controlled
Accumulation Period will be at least equal to the Controlled Accumulation
Period Length.
The effect of this is to permit the reduction of the length of the
Controlled Accumulation Period based on the investor interest of future series
that are scheduled to be in their revolving periods during the Controlled
Accumulation Period and on increases in the principal payment rate occurring
after the closing date. The length of the Controlled Accumulation Period will
not be less than one month.
Unavailable Principal Collections
If:
* during the Controlled Accumulation Period or the Regulated
Amortisation Period, the amount credited to the Principal
Collections Ledger identified for series 99-1 during any monthly
period minus the amount of Investor Cash Available for Acquisition
calculated for series 99-1 for that monthly period, exceeds the
sum of:
(1) the Adjusted Investor Interest as of the last day of the
prior monthly period, after taking into account any
deposits to be made to the Principal Funding Account on the
transfer date for that monthly period, any unreimbursed
Investor Charge-Offs for any class and any other
adjustments to the Investor Interest for that monthly
period; and
68
<PAGE>
(2) any Reallocated Class B Principal Collections or
Reallocated Class C Principal Collections on the transfer
date for that monthly period; or
* during the Rapid Amortisation Period, the amount credited to the
Principal Collections Ledger identified for series 99-1 during any
monthly period exceeds the sum of:
(1) the Investor Interest as of the last day of the prior
monthly period, after taking into account any deposits to
be made to the series 99-1 Distribution Account on the
transfer date for that monthly period, any unreimbursed
Investor Charge-Offs for any class and any other
adjustments to the Investor Interest for that monthly
period; and
(2) any Reallocated Class B Principal Collections or
Reallocated Class C Principal Collections on the transfer
date for that monthly period.
The amount of any excess will be allocated and transferred to the
transferor beneficiary only to the extent that the Transferor Interest on that
date is greater than zero. If the Transferor Interest on that date is not
greater than zero, the amount will be identified as unavailable transferor
principal collections credited to the Principal Collections Ledger. This sum,
together with any unavailable investor principal collections that have been
credited to the Principal Collections Ledger, will be identified as
"Unavailable Principal Collections". Unavailable investor principal collections
are principal collections identified for the transferor beneficiary but not
transferred to the transferor beneficiary because the Transferor Interest at
the relevant date is not greater than zero.
Unavailable Principal Collections will, to the extent they arise during
the Revolving Period, be allocated to the transferor beneficiary but will be
transferred to the transferor beneficiary only if and to the extent that the
Transferor Interest at that time is greater than zero. On each transfer date
for the Controlled Accumulation Period, Regulated Amortisation Period or the
Rapid Amortisation Period, any Unavailable Principal Collections which arise
after the end of the Revolving Period which are credited to the Principal
Collections Ledger will be allocated to the investor beneficiary and included
as Investor Principal Collections to be distributed as Available Investor
Principal Collections.
Shared Principal Collections
Principal collections for any monthly period allocated to the Investor
Interest of series 99-1 will first be used to cover:
* until the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date, for any monthly
period during the Controlled Accumulation Period, deposits of the
Controlled Deposit Amount to the Principal Funding Account;
* during the Regulated Amortisation Period, deposits of the
Controlled Deposit Amount to the Series 99-1 Distribution Account
for series 99-1; and
* during the Controlled Accumulation Period, on the series 99-1
scheduled redemption date, and during the Rapid Amortisation
Period, payments to the MTN issuer for series 99-1.
The receivables trustee will determine the amount of principal collections
for any monthly period allocated to the Investor Interest remaining after
covering required distributions to the MTN issuer for each class of series 99-1
and any similar amount remaining for any other outstanding series in group one.
These remaining principal collections are called "Shared Principal
Collections". The receivables trustee will allocate the Shared Principal
Collections to cover any scheduled or permitted principal distributions to
beneficiaries, and deposits to principal funding accounts, if any, for any
series in group one that have not been covered out of the principal collections
allocable to that series. These uncovered principal distributions and deposits
are called "Principal Shortfalls". Shared Principal Collections will not be
used to cover investor charge-offs for any class of any series.
If Principal Shortfalls exceed Shared Principal Collections for any
monthly period, Shared Principal Collections will be allocated in proportion
among the outstanding series in group one based on the amounts of Principal
Shortfalls for each series. To the extent that Shared Principal Collections
exceed Principal Shortfalls, the balance will in the normal course be paid to
the transferor beneficiary.
Defaulted Receivables; Investor Charge-Offs
On each transfer date, the receivables trustee will calculate the Investor
Default Amount for the previous monthly period. The "Investor Default Amount"
will be the total of, for each defaulted account, the product of the Floating
Investor Percentage and the default amount.
69
<PAGE>
The "default amount" for any defaulted account will be the amount of
eligible principal receivables in the defaulted account on the day the account
became a defaulted account.
The Investor Default Amount will be allocated to each class of series 99-1
based on its floating allocation during the monthly period. These allocations
will be called the "Class A Investor Default Amount," the "Class B Investor
Default Amount" and the "Class C Investor Default Amount."
On each transfer date, if the Class A Investor Default Amount for the
prior monthly period exceeds the sum of:
* Class A Available Funds;
* Excess Spread;
* Reallocated Class C Principal Collections; and
* Reallocated Class B Principal Collections;
in each case, to the extent available to cover the Class A Investor Default
Amount, then the Class C Investor Interest will be reduced by the amount of the
excess, but not by more than the remaining Class A Investor Default Amount.
This reduction to the Class C Investor Interest will be made only after giving
effect to reductions to the Class C Investor Interest for any Class C Investor
Charge-Offs, any Reallocated Class B Principal Collections and any Reallocated
Class C Principal Collections.
If this reduction would cause the Class C Investor Interest to be a
negative number, it will be reduced to zero. In this case, the Class B Investor
Interest will be reduced by the amount by which the Class C Investor Interest
would have been reduced below zero, but not by more than the Class A Investor
Default Amount not covered by a reduction in the Class C Investor Interest.
This reduction in the Class B Investor Interest will be made only after giving
effect to reductions for any Class B Investor Charge-Offs and Reallocated Class
B Principal Collections not covered by a reduction in the Class C Investor
Interest.
If this reduction would cause the Class B Investor Interest to be a
negative number, the Class B Investor Interest will be reduced to zero. In this
case, the Class A Investor Interest will be reduced by the amount by which the
Class B Investor Interest would have been reduced below zero, but not by more
than the remaining Class A Investor Default Amount not covered by a reduction
in the Class C Investor Interest or the Class B Investor Interest. This is
called a "Class A Investor Charge-Off" and may have the effect of slowing or
reducing the return of principal to the MTN issuer for Class A.
If the Class A Investor Interest has been reduced by any Class A Investor
Charge-Offs, it will be reimbursed on any transfer date by the amount of Excess
Spread allocated and available for that purpose, but not by more than the total
amount by which the Class A Investor Interest has been reduced. See "-- Excess
Spread".
On each transfer date, if the Class B Investor Default Amount for the
prior monthly period exceeds the sum of:
* Excess Spread; and
* Reallocated Class C Principal Collections;
in each case to the extent available to cover the Class B Investor Default
Amount, then the Class C Investor Interest will be reduced by the amount of the
excess, but not by more than the remaining Class B Investor Default Amount.
This reduction to the Class C Investor Interest will be made only after giving
effect to any reductions to the Class C Investor Interest for any Class C
Investor Charge-Offs, any Reallocated Class B Principal Collections, any
Reallocated Class C Principal Collections and any reductions in the Class C
Investor Interest to cover the Class A Investor Default Amount.
If this reduction would cause the Class C Investor Interest to be a
negative number, it will be reduced to zero. In this case, the Class B Investor
Interest will be reduced by the amount by which the Class C Investor Interest
would have been reduced below zero, but not by more than the remaining Class B
Investor Default Amount not covered by a reduction to the Class C Investor
Interest. This is called a "Class B Investor Charge-Off" and may have the
effect of slowing or reducing the return of principal to the MTN issuer for
Class B.
If the Class B Investor Interest has been reduced for any reasons other
than the payment of principal, it will be reimbursed on any transfer date by
the amount of Excess Spread allocated and available for that purpose, but not
by more than the total amount by which the Class B Investor Interest has been
reduced. See "-- Excess Spread".
On each transfer date, if the Class C Investor Default Amount for the
prior monthly period exceeds the amount of Excess Spread available to cover the
Class C Investor Default Amount, the Class C Investor Interest will
70
<PAGE>
be reduced by the amount of the excess, but not by more than the Class C
Investor Default Amount. This is called a "Class C Investor Charge-Off", which
may have the effect of slowing or reducing the return of principal to the MTN
issuer for Class C.
If the Class C Investor Interest has been reduced for any reasons other
than the payment of principal, it will be reimbursed on any transfer date by
the amount of Excess Spread allocated and available for that purpose, but not
by more than the total amount by which the Class C Investor Interest has been
so reduced. See "-- Excess Spread".
"Reallocated Class B Principal Collections" means, for any transfer date,
the principal collections allocable to the Class B Investor Interest for the
related monthly period in an amount not to exceed the Class A Required Amount,
after applying Excess Spread and Reallocated Class C Principal Collections to
cover the Class A Required Amount. Reallocated Class B Principal Collections
cannot exceed the Class B Investor Interest after giving effect to any
unreimbursed Class B Investor Charge-Offs. Reallocated Class B Principal
Collections not covered by a reduction in the Class C Investor Interest will
reduce the Class B Investor Interest.
"Reallocated Class C Principal Collections" means, for any transfer date,
the principal collections allocable to the Class C Investor Interest for the
related monthly period in an amount not to exceed the Class A Required Amount
and the Class B Required Amount after applying Excess Spread to cover the Class
A Required Amount and the Class B Required Amount. Reallocated Class C
Principal Collections cannot exceed the Class C Investor Interest after giving
effect to any unreimbursed Class C Investor Charge-Offs. Reallocated Class C
Principal Collections will reduce the Class C Investor Interest.
The "Class A Required Amount" for any transfer date will be the amount, if
any, by which the sum of:
* the Class A Monthly Required Expense Amount;
* the total amount of the class A servicing fee and the class A cash
management fee for the prior monthly period and any due and unpaid
class A servicing fees and class A cash management fees; and
* the Class A Investor Default Amount;
exceeds the Class A Available Funds.
The "Class B Required Amount" for any transfer date will be the sum of (1)
the amount, if any, by which the sum of:
* the Class B Monthly Required Expense Amount; and
* the total amount of the class B servicing fee and the class B cash
management fee for the prior monthly period, and any due and
unpaid class B servicing fees or class B cash management fees;
exceeds the Class B Available Funds, and (2) the Class B Investor Default
Amount.
Excess Spread
"Excess Spread" for any transfer date will be the sum of Class A Excess
Spread, Class B Excess Spread and Class C Excess Spread.
On each transfer date, the receivables trustee will apply Excess Spread to
make the following distributions in the following priority:
(1) an amount equal to the Class A Required Amount, if any, will be used to
fund the Class A Required Amount; if the Class A Required Amount is more
than the amount of Excess Spread, Excess Spread will be applied in the
order of priority in which Class A Available Funds are to be distributed;
(2) an amount equal to the total amount of Class A Investor Charge-Offs that
have not been previously reimbursed will be used to reinstate the Class A
Investor Interest, treated as a portion of Investor Principal Collections
allocated to Class A and credited to the Principal Collections Ledger;
(3) an amount equal to the Class B Required Amount will be used to fund the
Class B Required Amount; if the Class B Required Amount is more than the
amount of Excess Spread available, Excess Spread will be applied first in
the order of priority with which Class B Available Funds are to be
distributed on any transfer date and then to fund the Class B Investor
Default Amount; any amount available to pay the Class B Investor Default
Amount will be allocated to Class B and treated as a portion of Investor
Principal Collections allocated to Class B and credited to the Principal
Collections Ledger;
(4) an amount equal to the total amount by which the Class B Investor
Interest has been reduced below the Class B Initial Investor Interest for
reasons other than the payment of principal -- but not in excess of the
aggregate amount of such reductions which have not been previously
reimbursed -- will be used to
71
<PAGE>
reinstate the Class B Investor Interest, treated as a portion of Investor
Principal Collections and credited to the Principal Collections Ledger;
(5) an amount equal to any interest payment due and payable on any facility
entered into by or on behalf of the MTN issuer in respect of any
obligation to pay stamp duty will be used by the MTN issuer for the
payment of that interest;
(6) an amount equal to the sum of the Class C Monthly Finance Amount, the
Class C Deficiency Amount and the Class C Additional Finance Amount --
called the "Class C Monthly Distribution Amount" -- will be credited to
the Class C Distribution Ledger;
(7) an amount equal to any principal due and repayable on any facility
entered into by or on behalf of the MTN issuer in respect of an
obligation to pay stamp duty will be applied by the MTN issuer in the
repayment of that principal;
(8) an amount equal to the Class C Investor Default Amount will be allocated
to Class C and treated as a portion of Investor Principal Collections
allocated to Class C and credited to the Principal Collections Ledger;
(9) an amount equal to the total amount by which the Class C Investor
Interest has been reduced below the Class C Initial Investor Interest for
reasons other than the payment of principal -- but not in excess of the
total amount of the reductions that have not been previously reimbursed
-- will be used to reinstate the Class C Investor Interest, and treated
as a portion of Investor Principal Collections and credited to the
Principal Collections Ledger;
(10) on each transfer date from and after the Reserve Account Funding Date,
but before the date on which the Reserve Account terminates, an amount up
to the excess, if any, of the Required Reserve Account Amount over the
amount on deposit in Reserve Account will be allocated to the MTN issuer
and deposited into the Reserve Account;
(11) if the available spread account amount is less than the required spread
account amount, an amount up to any excess will be allocated to the MTN
issuer and deposited into the spread account, established for the benefit
of Class C;
(12) an amount equal to any Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount for series 99-
1 will be paid to the transferor and will then cease to be property of
the receivables trust; and
(13) the Series 99-1 Extra Amount will be paid into the Series 99-1
Distribution Account and will be owned by the MTN issuer; and
the balance, if any, after giving effect to the payments made under paragraphs
(1) through (13) above will be paid to the excess interest beneficiary and will
then cease to be property of the receivables trust.
Extra Amount
The "Series 99-1 Extra Amount" is calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period
-------------------------- X 0.02 per cent. X The Investor Interest
365 (366 in a leap year)
</TABLE>
Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount
By each transfer date, the receivables trustee will calculate the
Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount for each outstanding series. The "Aggregate
Investor Indemnity Amount" is the sum of all Investor Indemnity Amounts for the
related monthly period.
An "Investor Indemnity Amount" means for any series, the amount of any
Transferor Section 75 Liability claimed from the receivables trustee by the
transferor under the trust section 75 indemnity allocated to that series,
calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C>
Transferor Section 75 Liability X Floating Investor Percentage for that series
</TABLE>
The "Transferor Section 75 Liability" is the liability that the transferor
has for any designated account because of Section 75 of the Consumer Credit
Act. The Transferor Section 75 Liability cannot exceed the original outstanding
face amount of the principal receivable relating to the transaction giving rise
to the liability. See "Risk Factors: Application of the Consumer Credit Act
1974 May Impede Collection Efforts and Could Cause Early Redemption of Your
Notes or a Loss on Your Notes".
72
<PAGE>
Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amounts for series 99-1 will be payable only
if amounts are available from Excess Spread to pay them. See "-- Excess
Spread". If Excess Spread available on any transfer date is not enough to pay
the Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount for series 99-1 otherwise payable on
that date, the excess will be carried forward and paid on subsequent transfer
dates to the extent amounts of Excess Spread are available to pay them.
Principal Funding Account
The receivables trustee will establish and maintain the Principal Funding
Account at a Qualified Institution -- currently Barclays Bank PLC at its branch
located at 1234 Pavilion Drive Northampton NN4 7SG -- as a segregated Trust
Account held for the benefit of the MTN issuer as the investor beneficiary for
series 99-1. During the Controlled Accumulation Period, the receivables trustee
will transfer the amounts described under "-- Allocation, Calculation and
Distribution of Principal Collections to the MTN Issuer" to the Principal
Funding Account.
Funds on deposit in the Principal Funding Account will be invested to the
following transfer date by the receivables trustee in permitted investments.
Investment earnings, net of investment losses and expenses, on funds on deposit
in the Principal Funding Account are called "Principal Funding Investment
Proceeds".
Principal Funding Investment Proceeds will be used to pay the Class A
Covered Amount.
The "Class A Covered Amount" is calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C> <C> <C>
Days in Calculation Period The amount on deposit in the
------------------------- X the interest rate on the class A MTN X Principal Funding Account
365 (366 in a leap year)
</TABLE>
where the amount on deposit in the Principal Funding Account is calculated as
of the last day of the monthly period before the monthly period in which the
relevant transfer date occurs.
Principal Funding Investment Proceeds up to the Class A Covered Amount
will be transferred to the Trustee Collection Account by each transfer date and
credited to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger for application as Class A
Available Funds.
If on any transfer date during the Controlled Accumulation Period, the
Principal Funding Investment Proceeds exceeds the Class A Covered Amount, that
excess will be paid to the transferor beneficiary. If the Principal Funding
Investment Proceeds are less than the Class A Covered Amount, a withdrawal will
be made from the Reserve Account -- to the extent funds are available -- and
will be deposited in the Finance Charge Collections Ledger, for application as
Class A Available Funds. The amount of this withdrawal will be reduced to the
extent Excess Spread would be available for deposit in the Reserve Account. See
"-- Reserve Account" and "-- Excess Spread".
Reserve Account
The receivables trustee will establish and maintain a reserve account at a
Qualified Institution -- currently, Barclays Bank PLC at its branch located at
54 Lombard Street, London EC3P 3AH -- as a Trust Account segregated for the
benefit of series 99-1. This account is called the "Reserve Account". The
Reserve Account will be established to assist with the payment distribution of
the Class A Monthly Finance Amount to the MTN issuer during the Controlled
Accumulation Period.
On each transfer date from and after the Reserve Account Funding Date, but
before the termination of the Reserve Account, the receivables trustee will
apply Excess Spread in the order of priority described in "-- Excess Spread"
to increase the amount on deposit in the Reserve Account, up to the Required
Reserve Amount.
The "Reserve Account Funding Date" will be the transfer date that starts
no later than three months before the start of the Controlled Accumulation
Period. This date will be an earlier date if the Portfolio Yield decreases
below levels described in the Series 99-1 Supplement. In any case, this date
will be no earlier than 12 months before the start of the Controlled
Accumulation Period.
The "Required Reserve Amount" for any transfer date on or after the
Reserve Account Funding Date will be:
* 0.50 per cent. of the Class A Investor Interest; or
* subject to the conditions described in the next paragraph, any
other amount designated by the transferor beneficiary;
If, on or before the Reserve Account Funding Date, the transferor
beneficiary designates a lesser amount, it must provide the servicer and the
receivables trustee with evidence that each rating agency has notified the
73
<PAGE>
transferor, the servicer and the receivables trustee that that lesser amount
will not result in the rating agency reducing or withdrawing its then existing
rating of any outstanding related beneficiary debt. Also, the transferor
beneficiary must deliver to the receivables trustee an officer's certificate to
the effect that, based on the facts known to that officer at that time, in the
reasonable belief of the transferor beneficiary, the designation will not cause
a Pay Out Event to occur or an event that, after the giving of notice or the
lapse of time, would cause a Pay Out Event to occur.
On each transfer date, after giving effect to any deposit to be made to,
and any withdrawal to be made from, the Reserve Account on that transfer date,
the receivables trustee will withdraw from the Reserve Account an amount equal
to the excess, if any, of the amount on deposit in the Reserve Account over the
Required Reserve Amount. The receivables trustee will distribute this amount to
the transferor beneficiary and it will cease to be the property of the
receivables trust.
All amounts on deposit in the Reserve Account on any transfer date will be
invested by the receivables trustee in permitted investments to the following
transfer date. This will be done after giving effect to any deposits to, or
withdrawals from, the Reserve Account to be made on that transfer date. The
interest and other income -- net of investment expenses and losses -- earned on
the investments will be retained in the Reserve Account if the amount on
deposit in the Reserve Account is less than the Required Reserve Amount. If the
amount on deposit is equal to or more than the Required Reserve Amount, it will
be credited to the Finance Charge Collection Ledger to be included in Class A
Available Funds.
By each transfer date for the Controlled Accumulation Period before the
series 99-1 scheduled redemption date and on the first transfer date during the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period, the receivables
trustee will withdraw an amount from the Reserve Account and deposit it in the
Trustee Collection Account for credit to the Finance Charge Collections Ledger
to be included in Class A Available Funds. This amount will be equal to the
lesser of:
* the available amount on deposit in the Reserve Account; and
* the amount, if any, by which the Class A Covered Amount is greater
than the Principal Funding Investment Proceeds.
The amount of this withdrawal will be reduced to the extent Excess Spread
would be available for deposit in the Reserve Account.
The Reserve Account will be terminated following the earlier to occur of:
* the termination of the receivables trust; and
* the earlier of the first transfer date after the start of the
Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period and
the transfer date right before the series 99-1 scheduled
redemption date.
When the Reserve Account terminates, all amounts still on deposit in the
Reserve Account will be distributed to the transferor beneficiary and will no
longer be the property of the receivables trust.
Distribution Ledgers
The receivables trustee will establish Distribution Ledgers for each class
of series 99-1 in the Trustee Collection Account. On each transfer date it will
credit and debit amounts to these ledgers as described throughout this section
of this prospectus. All amounts credited to the Class A Distribution Ledger,
the Class B Distribution Ledger and the Class C Distribution Ledger will be
regarded as being segregated for the benefit of the MTN issuer.
Trustee Payment Amount
The share of the Trustee Payment Amount payable on any transfer date that
is allocable to series 99-1 -- called the "Investor Trustee Payment" -- will be
calculated as follows:
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C>
Investor Interest for series 99-1
--------------------------------- X Trustee Payment Amount
Total of Investor Interests of
series for which the Trustee Payment Amount was incurred
</TABLE>
The share of the Investor Trustee Payment allocable to the Investor
Interest for each class is equal to the product of:
* the floating allocation for the relevant class; and
* the Investor Trustee Payment.
This will be called the "Class A Trustee Payment Amount", the "Class B
Trustee Payment Amount" and the "Class C Trustee Payment Amount", respectively.
74
<PAGE>
The Investor Trustee Payment for any class will be payable from amounts
available for distribution for that purpose out of available funds for each
class and Excess Spread. See " -- Allocation, Calculation and Distribution of
Finance Charge Collections to the MTN Issuer" and -- "Excess Spread".
The portion of the Trustee Payment Amount not allocated to series 99-1
will be paid from cashflows under the receivables trust allocated to other
outstanding series, and in no event will series 99-1 be liable for these
payments.
Qualified Institutions
If the bank or banks at which any of the accounts listed below are held
cease to be a Qualified Institution, then the receivables trustee will, within
10 business days, establish a new account to replace the affected account or
accounts, and will transfer any cash and interest to that new account or
accounts. The accounts referred to above are:
* Trustee Collection Account;
* Trustee Acquisition Account;
* Reserve Account;
* Principal Funding Account; or
* Series 99-1 Distribution Account.
The receivables trustee may in its discretion elect to move any or all of
these accounts and the amounts credited to them from the Qualified Institution
at which they are kept as at the date of this document to another or other
Qualified Institutions.
"Qualified Institution" means (1) an institution which at all times has a
short-term unsecured debt rating of at least A-1+ by Standard & Poor's and P-1
by Moody's or (2) an institution acceptable to each rating agency.
Series 99-1 Pay Out Events
The events described below are called "Series 99-1 Pay-Out Events":
(1) failure on the part of the transferor:
* to make any payment or deposit required by the terms of the
receivables securitisation agreement within five business days
after the date that the payment or deposit is required to be made;
or
* duly to observe or perform any covenants or agreements of the
transferor in the receivables securitisation agreement or the
Series 99-1 Supplement that has a material adverse effect on the
interests of the MTN issuer in respect of series 99-1 and which
continues unremedied for a period of 60 days after the date on
which written notice of the failure, requiring it to be remedied,
is given to the transferor by the receivables trustee, or is given
to the transferor and the receivables trustee by the investor
beneficiary for series 99-1 acting on the instructions of holders
of MTNs representing together 50 per cent. or more of the total
balance of MTNs issued and outstanding at that time for series 99-
1, and which unremedied, continues during that 60 day period to
have a material adverse effect on the interests of the MTN issuer
in respect of series 99-1 for that period;
(2) any representation or warranty made by the transferor in the receivables
securitisation agreement or the Series 99-1 Supplement, or any
information contained in a computer file or microfiche list required to
be delivered by the transferor under the receivables securitisation
agreement:
* proves to have been incorrect in any material respect when made or
when delivered and continues to be incorrect in any material
respect for a period of 60 days after the date on which written
notice of the error, requiring it to be remedied, is given to the
transferor by the receivables trustee, or is given to the
transferor and the receivables trustee by the investor beneficiary
for series 99-1 acting on the instructions of holders of loan MTNs
representing together 50 per cent. or more of the total balance of
MTNs issued and outstanding in respect of series 99-1; and
* as a result of which there is a material adverse effect on the
interests of the MTN issuer in respect of series 99-1 and which
unremedied continues during that 60 day period to have a material
adverse effect for that period;
(3) the average Portfolio Yield for any three consecutive monthly periods is
less than the average Expense Rate for those periods or, on any
determination date before the end of the third monthly period from the
closing date, the Portfolio Yield is less than the average Expense Rate
for that period;
75
<PAGE>
(4) either:
* over any period of thirty consecutive days, the Transferor
Interest averaged over that period is less than the Minimum
Transferor Interest for that period and the Transferor Interest
does not increase on or before the tenth business day following
that thirty day period to an amount so that the average of the
Transferor Interest as a percentage of the Average Principal
Receivables for such thirty day period, computed by assuming that
the amount of the increase of the Transferor Interest by the last
day of the ten business day period, as compared to the Transferor
Interest on the last day of the thirty day period, would have
existed in the receivables trust during each day of the thirty day
period, is at least equal to the Minimum Transferor Interest; or
* on the last day of any monthly period the total balance of
eligible receivables is less than the Minimum Aggregate Principal
Receivables, adjusted for any series having a Companion Series as
described in the supplement for that series, and the total balance
of eligible receivables fails to increase to an amount equal to or
greater than the Minimum Aggregate Principal Receivables on or
before the tenth business day following that last day;
(5) any servicer default or trust cash manager default occurs that would have
a material adverse effect on the MTN issuer in respect of series 99-1;
(6) the Investor Interest is not reduced to zero on the series 99-1 scheduled
redemption date;
(7) the early termination, without replacement, of any of the swap agreements
as described in this prospectus under "The Swap Agreements: Common
Provisions of the Swap Agreements";
(8) the MTN issuer is required to withhold or deduct any amounts for or on
account of tax on the payment of any principal or interest in respect of
the medium term notes.
If any event described in paragraphs (1), (2) or (5) then, after the
applicable grace period, either (1) the receivables trustee or (2) the investor
beneficiary may declare that a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event has occurred if the
correct notice has been given. If the investor beneficiary declares that a
Series 99-1 Pay Out Event has occurred, it must have acted on the instructions
of holders of medium term notes representing, together, 50 per cent. or more of
the medium term notes issued and outstanding at that time in respect of series
99-1. The investor beneficiary must give a written notice to the transferor, the
servicer and the receivables trustee that a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event has
occurred. If the receivables trustee declares that a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event
has occurred it must give a written notice to this effect to the transferor, the
servicer and the trust cash manager. The Series 99-1 Pay Out Event will be
effective as of the date of the relevant notice. If any event in paragraphs (3),
(4), (6), (7) or (8) occurs, a Series 99-1 Pay Out Event will occur without any
notice or other action on the part of the receivables trustee or the investor
beneficiary.
"Portfolio Yield" means, for any monthly period:
(A+B+C+D) -- E
-------------- X 12
F
where:
A = the finance charge collections allocable to series 99-1;
B = Acquired Interchange allocable to series 99-1;
C = Principal Funding Investment Proceeds up to the Class A Covered
Amount;
D = the amount, if any, to be withdrawn from the Reserve Account that is
included in Class A Available Funds;
E = the Investor Default Amount; and
F = the Investor Interest.
"Expense Rate" means, for any transfer date:
A+B+C
----- X 12
D
where:
A = the sum of the Class A Monthly Required Expense Amount, the Class B
Monthly Required Expense
Amount and the Class C Monthly Required Expense Amount;
B = the investor servicing fee;
C = the investor trust cash management fee; and
D = the Investor Interest.
76
<PAGE>
"Minimum Transferor Interest" means 5 per cent. of the Average Principal
Receivables. The transferor may reduce the Minimum Transferor Interest in the
following circumstances:
* upon 30 days prior notice to the receivables trustee, each rating
agency and any enhancement provider entitled to receive notice
under its supplement;
* upon written confirmation from each rating agency that the
reduction will not result in the reduction or withdrawal of the
ratings of the rating agency for any outstanding related
beneficiary debt, including, for series 99-1, the notes; and
* delivery to the receivables trustee and each enhancement provider
of an officer's certificate stating that the transferor reasonably
believes that the reduction will not, based on the facts known to
the officer at the time of the certification, cause, at that time
or in the future, a pay out event to occur for any investor
beneficiary.
The Minimum Transferor Interest will never be less than 2 per cent. of the
Average Principal Receivables.
"Minimum Aggregate Principal Receivables" means, an amount equal to the
sum of the numerators used in the calculation of the investor percentages for
principal collections for all outstanding series on that date. For any series
in its rapid accumulation period, as defined in its supplement, with an
investor interest as of that date of determination equal to the balance on
deposit in the principal funding account for that series, the numerator used in
the calculation of the investor percentage for principal collections for that
eligible series will, only for the purpose of the definition of Minimum
Aggregate Principal Receivables, be zero.
"Average Principal Receivables" means, for any period, an amount equal to:
* the sum of the total balance of eligible principal receivables at
the end of each day during that period divided by;
* the number of days in that period.
"Companion Series" means:
* each series that has been paired with another series so that the
reduction of the investor interest of the paired series results in
the increase of the investor interest of the other series, as
described in the related supplements; and
* the other series.
Your Payment Flows
On any distribution date, the receivables trustee will transfer from
available funds in the Trustee Collection Account the sum of:
* the Class A Monthly Distribution Amount;
* the Class B Monthly Distribution Amount; and
* the Class C Monthly Distribution Amount;
and deposit that sum into the Series 99-1 Distribution Account held by the
MTN issuer.
The MTN issuer will credit the amount received in respect of the monthly
distribution amounts for each class to the respective MTN coupon ledger for
each class.
The MTN issuer will then transfer from the Series 99-1 Distribution
Account to the extent there are sufficient funds on deposit:
* first, the costs and expenses of the MTN issuer for the relevant
monthly period will be paid or reserved for within the MTN
issuer proportionately to the class A MTN's, class B MTN's and the
class C MTN's share of such payment to be used to pay, or reserve
for, the costs and expenses of the MTN issuer;
* second, the lesser of (1) the amounts credited to the class A MTN
coupon ledger, the class B MTN coupon ledger and the class C MTN
coupon ledger after paying or reserving for the MTN issuer's costs
and expenses described in the first bullet point above and (2) the
interest due and payable on the class A MTNs, the class B MTNs and
the class C MTNs will be deposited in the Series 99-1 Issuer
Account;
* third, an amount equal to 1/24 of the Series 99-1 Extra Amount
will be paid to the MTN issuer;
The "Series 99-1 Issuer Account" is a bank account in the name of the issuer
that will be used to deposit amounts distributed to the issuer for the medium
term notes from the MTN issuer.
The issuer will credit the amount received from the MTN coupon ledger for
each class to the notes coupon ledger for the respective class.
Before the termination of the swap agreements, on each interest payment
date, the issuer will pay:
77
<PAGE>
* first, the costs and expenses of the issuer for the relevant
monthly period will be paid or reserved for within the issuer
proportionately to the class A notes, the class B notes and the
class C notes share of such payment to be used to pay, or reserve
for, the costs and expenses of the issuer;
* second, from the class A notes coupon ledger, the lesser of the
amount credited to the class A notes coupon ledger after paying or
reserving for the class A notes proportionate share of the issuer's
costs and expenses and the interest due and payable to the swap
counterparty under the class A swap agreement for the relevant
Calculation Period, to the swap counterparty;
* third, from the class B notes coupon ledger, the lesser of the
amount credited to the class B notes coupon ledger after paying or
reserving for the class B notes proportionate share of the issuer's
costs and expenses and the interest due and payable to the swap
counterparty under the class B swap agreement for the relevant
Calculation Period, to the swap counterparty;
* fourth, from the class C notes coupon ledger, the lesser of the
amount credited to the class C notes coupon ledger after paying or
reserving for the class C notes proportionate share of the issuer's
costs and expenses and the interest due and payable to the swap
counterparty under the class C swap agreement in respect of the
relevant Calculation Period, to the swap counterparty; and
* fifth, the lesser of the remaining amount on deposit in the
Series 99-1 Issuer Account and an amount equal to 1/24 of the
Series 99-1 Extra Amount, will be paid to the issuer.
Under the terms of each swap agreement, the swap counterparty will pay to
the principal paying agent on each interest payment date an amount equal to the
interest on the applicable class of notes, converted into dollars, subject to
the deferral of interest as described in "Terms and Conditions of the Notes"
and "The Swap Agreements".
After the termination of the swap agreements, the note trustee will
withdraw the amounts on deposit in the class A notes coupon ledger, the class B
notes coupon ledger and the class C notes coupon ledger and convert those
amounts into dollars at the then prevailing spot exchange rate in London,
England for sterling purchases of dollars and distribute these dollar amounts
to the paying agent to make payments of interest on the class A notes, the
class B notes and the class C notes, respectively.
On the earlier of the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date and the first
distribution date for the Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid
Amortisation Period, and on each distribution date after that, the receivables
trustee will transfer the following amounts and deposit them into the Series
99-1 Distribution Account:
* from the Principal Funding Account, the lesser of (1) the amount
in the Principal Funding Account on that date and (2) the Class A
Investor Interest; and
* from the Class A Distribution Ledger, the lesser of (1) during the
Rapid Amortisation Period, the amount in the Class A Distribution
Ledger or, during the Regulated Amortisation Period, the
Controlled Deposit Amount, and (2) the Class A Investor Interest
-- after taking into account the amount distributed from the
Principal Funding Account as described above.
On the later to occur of the Class B Principal Commencement Date and the
series 99-1 scheduled redemption date and each distribution date after, the
receivables trustee will transfer the following amounts and deposit them into
the Series 99-1 Distribution Account:
* from the Principal Funding Account, the lesser of (1) the amount
on deposit in the Principal Funding Account in excess of the Class
A Investor Interest and (2) the Class B Investor Interest; and
* from the Class B Distribution Ledger, the lesser of the amount on
deposit in the Class B Distribution Ledger and the Class B
Investor Interest -- after taking into account the amount
distributed from the Principal Funding Accounts as described
above.
On the later to occur of the Class C Principal Commencement Date and the
series 99-1 scheduled redemption date and each distribution date after, the
receivables trustee will transfer the following amounts and deposit them into
the Series 99-1 Distribution Account:
* from the Principal Funding Account, the lesser of (1) the amount
on deposit in the Principal Funding Account in excess of the sum
of the Class A Investor Interest and the Class B Investor Interest
and (2) the Class C Investor Interest; and
* from the Class C Distribution Ledger, the lesser of the amount on
deposit in the Class C Distribution Ledger and the Class C
Investor Interest -- after taking into account the amount
distributed from the Principal Funding Account as described above.
The MTN issuer will credit the amount received for each class of Investor
Interest to the MTN Principal Ledger, for that respective class.
78
<PAGE>
On the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date and each distribution date
after, the MTN issuer will transfer for same day value from the Series 99-1
Distribution Account the amount in the medium term notes principal ledger, for
each class, respectively, and deposit them into the Series 99-1 Issuer Account.
The issuer will credit each amount received from the medium term notes
coupon ledger for each class respectively to the notes coupon ledger for that
class.
Before the termination of the swap agreements, on the Series 99-1
scheduled redemption date or any interest payment date after, the issuer will
pay:
* from the class A notes principal ledger, an amount equal to the
lesser of (1) the amount in the class A notes principal ledger;
and (2) the sterling equivalent of the principal due on the class
A notes, to the swap counterparty;
* from the class B notes principal ledger, an amount equal to the
lesser of (1) the amount in the class B notes principal ledger and
(2) the sterling equivalent of the principal due on the class B
notes, to the swap counterparty; and
* from the class C notes principal ledger, an amount equal to the
lesser of (1) the amount in the class C notes principal ledger and
(2) the sterling equivalent of the principal due on the class C
notes, to the swap counterparty.
The swap counterparty will pay to the principal paying agent, in dollars,
principal for distribution to the noteholders converted into dollars, at the
fixed exchange rate.
After the termination of the swap agreements, the note trustee will
withdraw the amounts on deposit in the class A notes principal ledger, the
class B notes principal ledger and the class C notes principal ledger and
convert those amounts into dollars at the then prevailing spot exchange rate in
London, England for sterling purchases of dollars and distribute those dollar
amounts to the paying agent to make payments of principal on the class A notes,
the class B notes and the class C notes, respectively.
The Trust Deed
The principal agreement governing the notes will be the trust deed. The
trust deed has five primary functions:
* it constitutes the notes;
* it sets out the covenants of the issuer in relation to the notes;
* it sets out the enforcement and post-enforcement procedures
relating to the notes;
* it contains provisions necessary to comply with the US Trust
Indenture Act of 1939; and
* it sets out the appointment, powers and responsibilities of the
note trustee.
Each function is summarised below.
The trust deed sets out the form of the global notes and the definitive
notes. It also sets out the terms and conditions of the notes, and the
conditions for the issue of definitive notes and/or the cancellation of any
notes. It stipulates that the notes will be deposited with the depository and
that the paying agents and the agent bank will be appointed. The UK detailed
provisions regulating these appointments are contained in the depository
agreement and the paying agency and agent bank agreement.
The trust deed also contains covenants made by the issuer in favour of the
note trustee and the noteholders. The main covenants are that the issuer will
pay interest and repay principal on each of the notes when due. Covenants are
included to ensure that the issuer remains insolvency remote, and to give the
note trustee access to all information and reports that it may need in order to
discharge its responsibilities in relation to the noteholders. Some of the
covenants also appear in the terms and conditions of the notes, see "Terms and
Conditions of the Notes". The issuer also covenants that it will do all things
necessary to maintain the listing of the notes on the London Stock Exchange and
to keep in place a depository, paying agents and agent bank.
The trust deed sets out the general procedures by which the note trustee
may take steps to enforce the security created by the issuer in the deed of
charge so that the note trustee can protect the interests of the noteholders in
accordance with the terms and conditions. The trust deed gives the note trustee
a general discretion to enforce the security, but also provides for meetings of
the noteholders at which the noteholders can determine the action taken by the
note trustee in relation to the enforcement of the notes. The trust deed
provides that the class A noteholders' interests take precedence for so long as
the class A notes are outstanding, and after that, the interests of the class B
noteholders take precedence over the interests of class C noteholders, until no
more class B notes remain outstanding. Certain basic terms of each class of
notes may not be amended
79
<PAGE>
without the consent of the majority of the holders of that class of note. This
is described further in the "Terms and Conditions of the Notes".
The trust deed also sets out the priority in which the note trustee will
pay out any monies that it receives under the notes after the security has been
enforced. This is also set out in the deed of charge and the priority of
payments is summarised in the terms and conditions of the notes.
The trust deed also sets out the terms on which the note trustee is
appointed, the indemnification of the note trustee, the payment it receives and
the extent of the note trustee's authority to act beyond its statutory
powers under English Law. The note trustee is also given the ability to appoint
a delegate or agent in the execution of any of its duties under the trust deed.
The trust deed also sets out the circumstances in which the note trustee may
resign or retire.
Finally, the trust deed includes certain provisions mandated by the Trust
Indenture Act. Generally, these provisions outline the duties, rights and
responsibilities of the note trustee and the issuer and the rights of the
noteholders. Specifically these include, but are not limited to:
* the maintenance of a noteholder list by the note trustee;
* the provision of financial statements and other information by the
issuer to the note trustee;
* the ability of noteholders to waive certain past defaults of the
issuer;
* the duty of the note trustee to use the same degree of care in
exercising its responsibilities as would by exercised by a prudent
person conducting their own affairs;
* the duty of the note trustee to notify all noteholders of any
events of default of which it has actual knowledge; and
* the right of the note trustee to resign at any time by notifying
the issuer in writing, and the ability of the issuer to remove the
note trustee under certain circumstances.
The trust deed is governed by English Law.
The Notes And The Global Notes
The issue of the notes will be authorised by a resolution of the board of
directors of the issuer passed prior to the closing date. The notes will be
constituted by a trust deed to be dated the closing date, between the issuer
and the note trustee, as trustee for, among others, the holders for the time
being of the notes. The trust deed includes provisions which enable it to be
modified or supplemented and any reference to the trust deed is a reference
also to the document as modified or supplemented in accordance with its terms.
The statements set out below include summaries of, and are subject to, the
detailed provisions of the trust deed. The trust deed will include the form of
the global notes and the form of definitive notes. The offered global notes
will be deposited on the closing date with The Bank of New York in New York,
acting as depository under the terms of the depository agreement. A paying
agency and agent bank agreement between the issuer, the note trustee, The Bank
of New York in London as "principal paying agent", the other paying agents --
together with the principal paying agent, called the "paying agent" and the
agent bank, regulates how payments will be made on the notes and how
determinations and notifications will be made. It will be dated as of the
closing date and the parties will include, on an ongoing basis, any successor
party appointed in accordance within its terms.
As a noteholder, you will be entitled to the benefit of, will be bound by
and will be deemed to have notice of, all the provisions of the trust deed, the
depository agreement and the paying agency and agent bank agreement. You can
see copies of these agreements at the principal office for the time being of
the note trustee, which is, as of the date of this document, One Canada Square,
London E145AL and at the specified office for the time being of each of the
paying agents.
The class A notes and the class B notes will be represented initially by
global notes in bearer form, without coupons, in the principal amount of
$900,000,000 and $50,000,000. The global notes will be deposited on your behalf
with The Bank of New York in New York, as the depository under the depository
agreement, on the closing date. The depository will issue certificateless
depository interests, representing interests in the class A notes and the class
B notes, to Cede & Co as nominee of the Depository Trust Company -- called
"DTC".
On confirmation from the depository that DTC holds the offered global
notes, DTC when it has accepted the certificateless depository interests --
which will be described in a letter called the DTC letter of representations
sent by the issuer and the depository to DTC -- will record book-entry
interests in your account or the participant account through which you hold
your interests in the notes. These book-entry interests will
80
<PAGE>
represent your beneficial entitlement to the certificateless depository interest
which in turn represent your interest in the offered notes.
When reference in this "The Notes And The Global Notes" section is made to
the notes or note owners it is to the beneficial ownership of them in the form
of certificateless depository interests.
You may hold your interests in the notes through DTC, in the United
States, or indirectly through Cedelbank or the Euroclear System, in Europe, or
indirectly through organizations that are participants in any of those systems.
Cede & Co., as nominee for DTC, will hold the certificateless depository
interests. Cedelbank and Euroclear will hold omnibus positions on behalf of
their respective participants, through customers' securities accounts in
Cedelbank's and Euroclear's names on the books of their respective
depositaries. The depositaries in turn will hold the positions in customers'
securities accounts in the depositaries' names on the books of DTC.
DTC has advised us and the underwriters that it is:
* A limited-purpose trust company organized under the New York
Banking Law;
* A "banking organization" within the meaning of the New York
Banking Law;
* A member of the Federal Reserve System;
* A "clearing corporation" within the meaning of the New York
Uniform Commercial Code; and
* A "clearing agency" registered under the provisions of Section 17A
of the Exchange Act.
DTC holds securities for its participants and facilitates the clearance
and settlement among its participants of securities transactions, including
transfers and pledges, in deposited securities through electronic book-entry
changes in its participants' accounts. This eliminates the need for physical
movement of securities certificates. DTC participants include securities
brokers and dealers, banks, trust companies, clearing corporations and other
organizations. Indirect access to the DTC system is also available to others
including securities brokers and dealers, banks, and trust companies that clear
through or maintain a custodial relationship with a participant, either
directly or indirectly. The rules applicable to DTC and its participants are on
file with the SEC.
Transfers between participants on the DTC system will occur under DTC
rules. Transfers between participants on the Cedelbank system and participants
on the Euroclear system will occur under their rules and operating procedures.
Cross-market transfers between persons holding directly or indirectly
through DTC, on the one hand, and directly or indirectly through Cedelbank
participants or Euroclear participants, on the other, will be effected by DTC
under DTC rules on behalf of the relevant European international clearing
system by that system's depositary. However, these cross-market transactions
will require delivery of instructions to the relevant European international
clearing system by the counterparty in that system under its rules and
procedures and within its established deadlines, European time. The relevant
European international clearing system will, if the transaction meets its
settlement requirements, deliver instructions to its depositary to take action
to effect final settlement on its behalf by delivering or receiving securities
in DTC, and making or receiving payment under normal procedures for same-day
funds settlement applicable to DTC. Cedelbank participants and Euroclear
participants may not deliver instructions directly to their system's
depositary.
Because of time-zone differences, credits of securities in Cedelbank or
Euroclear as a result of a transaction with a DTC participant will be made
during the subsequent securities settlement processing, dated the business day
following the DTC settlement date. The credits for any transactions in these
securities settled during this processing will be reported to the relevant
Cedelbank participant or Euroclear participant on that business day. Cash
received in Cedelbank or Euroclear as a result of sales of securities by or
through a Cedelbank participant or a Euroclear participant to a DTC participant
will be received and available on the DTC settlement date. However, it will not
be available in the relevant Cedelbank or Euroclear cash account until the
business day following settlement in DTC.
Purchases of notes under the DTC system must be made by or through DTC
participants, which will receive a credit for the notes on DTC's records. The
ownership interest of each actual note owner is in turn to be recorded on the
DTC participants' and indirect participants' records. Note owners will not
receive written confirmation from DTC of their purchase. However, note owners
are expected to receive written confirmations providing details of the
transaction, as well as periodic statements of their holdings, from the DTC
participant or indirect participant through which the note owner entered into
the transaction. Transfer of ownership interests in the notes are to be
accomplished by entries made on the books of DTC participants acting on behalf
of note owners. Note owners will not receive certificates representing their
ownership interest in notes unless use of the book-entry system for the notes
is discontinued.
81
<PAGE>
To facilitate subsequent transfers, all securities deposited by DTC
participants with DTC are registered in the name of DTC's nominee, Cede & Co.
The deposit of securities with DTC and their registration in the name of Cede &
Co. does not change beneficial ownership. DTC has no knowledge of the actual
note owners of the notes. DTC's records reflect only the identity of the DTC
participants to whose accounts the notes are credited, which may or may not be
the actual beneficial owners of the notes. The DTC participants will remain
responsible for keeping account of their holdings on behalf of their customers.
Conveyance of notices and other communications by DTC to DTC participants,
by DTC participants to indirect participants, and by DTC participants and
indirect participants to note owners will be governed by arrangements among
them and by any statutory or regulatory requirements in effect from time to
time.
Neither DTC nor Cede & Co. will consent or vote on behalf of the notes.
Under its usual procedures, DTC mails an omnibus proxy to the issuer as soon as
possible after the record date, which assigns Cede & Co.'s consenting or voting
rights to those DTC participants to whose accounts the notes are credited on
the record date, identified in a listing attached to the proxy.
Principal and interest payments on the notes will be made to DTC. DTC's
practice is to credit its participants' accounts on the applicable interest
payment date according to their respective holdings shown on DTC's records
unless DTC has reason to believe that it will not receive payment on that
interest payment date. Payments by DTC participants to note owners will be
governed by standing instructions, customary practice, and any statutory or
regulatory requirements as may be in effect from time to time. These payments
will be the responsibility of the DTC participant and not of DTC, the paying
agent or the issuer. Payment of principal and interest in DTC is the
responsibility of the paying agent, DTC is responsible for disbursing payments
made to it to DTC participants and indirect participants.
DTC management is aware that some computer applications, systems and the
like for processing data that are dependent upon calendar dates, including
dates before, on and after 1 January, 2000, may encounter year 2000 problems.
DTC has informed its participants and other members of the financial community
that it has developed and is implementing a program so that its systems
relating to the timely payment of distributions to securityholders, book-entry
deliveries, and settlement of trades within DTC will continue to function
appropriately. This program includes a technical assessment and a remediation
plan, each of which is complete. Additionally, DTC's program includes a testing
phase, which it expects to complete within appropriate time frames.
DTC's ability to perform its services properly is also dependent upon
other parties. Third parties include issuers and their agents, DTC's direct and
indirect participants, vendors from whom DTC's licenses software and hardware,
and vendors on whom DTC relies for information or services, including
telecommunication and electrical utility service providers. DTC has informed us
that it is contacting, and will continue to contact, third party vendors from
whom DTC acquires services to:
* impress upon them the importance of these services being Year 2000
compliant; and
* determine the extent of their efforts for Year 2000 remediation
and testing for their services.
Additionally, DTC is in the process of developing contingency plans as it
deems appropriate.
According to DTC, the foregoing information about DTC has been provided to
us for informational purposes only and is not a representation, warranty, or
contract modification of any kind.
Cedelbank is incorporated under the laws of Luxembourg as a professional
depositary. Cedelbank holds securities for its participating organizations and
facilitates the clearance and settlement of securities transactions between
Cedelbank participants through electronic book-entry changes in accounts of
Cedelbank participants, thereby eliminating the need for physical movement of
notes. Transactions may be settled in Cedelbank in any of 38 currencies,
including United States dollars.
Cedelbank participants are financial institutions around the world,
including underwriters, securities brokers and dealers, banks, trust companies,
and clearing corporations. Indirect access to Cedelbank is also available to
others, including banks, brokers, dealers and trust companies that clear
through or maintain a custodial relationship with a Cedelbank participant,
either directly or indirectly.
The Euroclear system was created in 1968 to hold securities for its
participants and to clear and settle transactions between Euroclear
participants through simultaneous electronic book-entry delivery against
payment. This eliminates the need for physical movement of certificates.
Transactions may be settled in any of 32 currencies, including United States
dollars.
The Euroclear System is operated by Morgan Guaranty Trust Company of New
York, Brussels, Belgium office, the Euroclear operator, under contract with
Euroclear Clearance System, Societe Cooperative, a Belgium
82
<PAGE>
co-operative corporation, the Euroclear co-operative. All operations are
conducted by the Euroclear operator. All Euroclear securities clearance accounts
and Euroclear cash accounts are accounts with the Euroclear operator, not the
Euroclear co-operative. The board of the Euroclear co-operative establishes
policy for the Euroclear System.
Euroclear participants include banks -- including central banks --
securities brokers and dealers and other professional financial intermediaries.
Indirect access to the Euroclear System is also available to other firms that
maintain a custodial relationship with a Euroclear participant, either directly
or indirectly.
Securities clearance accounts and cash accounts with the Euroclear
operator are governed by the Terms and Conditions Governing use of Euroclear
and the related Operating Procedures of the Euroclear System. These terms and
conditions govern transfers of securities and cash within the Euroclear System,
withdrawal of securities and cash from the Euroclear System, and receipts of
payments for securities in the Euroclear System. All securities in the
Euroclear system are held on a fungible basis without attribution of specific
certificates to specific securities clearance accounts. The Euroclear operator
acts under these terms and conditions only on behalf of Euroclear participants
and has no record of or relationship with persons holding through Euroclear
participants.
Distributions on the notes held indirectly through Cedelbank or Euroclear
will be credited to the cash accounts of Cedelbank participants or Euroclear
participants according to the relevant system's rules and procedures, to the
extent received by its depositary. These distributions must be reported for tax
purposes under United States tax laws and regulations. Cedelbank or the
Euroclear operator, as the case may be, will take any other action permitted to
be taken by a noteholder on behalf of its participants only as permitted by its
rules and procedures and only if its depositary is able to take these actions on
its behalf through DTC.
Although DTC, Cedelbank and Euroclear have agreed to these procedures to
facilitate transfers of notes among participants of DTC, Cedelbank and
Euroclear, they are not obligated to perform these procedures. Additionally,
these procedures may be discontinued at any time.
So long as the depository or its nominee is the holder of the offered
global notes underlying the book-entry interests, they will be considered the
global noteholder under the trust deed. Because of this, each person holding a
book-entry interest must rely on the procedures of the depository, DTC,
Euroclear and/or Cedelbank or other intermediary though which the interests are
held, to exercise any rights and obligations of noteholders under the trust
deed.
The certificateless depository interests held by DTC may not be
transferred, until they are exchanged for definitive certificates, unless as a
whole, to their respective successors, validly appointed.
Payment of principal and interest on the offered global notes will be
made, in U.S. dollars, by the swap counterparty on behalf of the issuer to the
depository as the global noteholder. You and any other beneficial owners of
notes must look only to DTC, Euroclear or Cedelbank, as applicable, for your
beneficial entitlement to the notes.
As the holder of book-entry interests you will not have the right under
the trust deed to act on solicitations by the issuer for action by noteholders.
You will only be able to act to the extent you receive the appropriate proxies
to do so from DTC, Euroclear or Cedelbank. No assurances are made about these
procedures or their adequacy for ensuring timely exercise of remedies under the
trust deed.
You and other holders of book-entry interests will be entitled to receive
definitive notes, in the form and under the circumstances, issued under the
trust deed and the terms and conditions of the notes.
If any of the following events occur, you will be entitled to receive
definitive notes for your book-entry interests:
* as a result of a change in UK law, the issuer or any paying agent
is or will be required to make any deduction or withholding on
account of tax from any payment on the notes that would not be
required if the notes were in definitive form; or
* DTC, has notified the issuer that is unwilling or unable to hold
the certificateless depository interests or to continue as a
clearing agency under the United States Securities Exchange Act of
1934 and the issuer cannot appoint a successor;
* if the depository notifies the issuer that it is at any time
unwilling or unable to continue as depository and the issuer
cannot appoint a successor;
* the principal amount of the notes is accelerated because an event
of default has occurred.
83
<PAGE>
Any definitive notes issued on exchange for book-entry interests will be
registered by a registrar as directed by the depository on instructions --
which are expected to be based on the ownership of the relevant book-entry
interests -- from DTC, Euroclear or Cedelbank.
You should be aware that, under current UK tax law, following the issuance
of definitive notes, payments of interest will be subject to UK withholding tax
- -- currently at a rate of 20 per cent. -- subject to the terms of any applicable
double tax treaty.
Terms and Conditions of the Notes
The material terms of the notes are described in the body of the
prospectus. The following is a summary of the material terms and conditions of
the notes, and is numbered 1 to 16. This summary does not need to be read with
the terms and conditions of the notes in order to learn all the material terms
and conditions of the offered notes.
The offered notes, together with the class C notes that are not being
offered in this prospectus, are the subject of the following documents:
* a trust deed dated the closing date between the issuer and the
note trustee;
* a paying agency and agent bank agreement dated the closing date
among the issuer, the principal paying agent and the agent bank,
the other paying agents, the transfer agent and the note trustee;
* a deed of charge dated the closing date among the lender under the
expenses loan agreement, the issuer, the swap counterparty and the
note trustee;
* a depositary agreement dated the closing date among the issuer,
the swap counterparty, the note trustee and the note depository;
and
* the class A swap agreement, the class B swap agreement and the
class C swap agreement, each between the issuer and the swap
counterparty.
When we refer to the parties to the documents listed above, the reference
includes any successor to that party validly appointed.
Initially the parties will be as follows:
* Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC as issuer;
* The Bank of New York as principal paying agent and agent bank,
transfer agent, depository and note trustee; and
* Barclays Bank PLC as lender under the expenses loan agreement and
swap counterparty.
You are bound by and deemed to have notice of all of the provisions of the
trust deed, the paying agency and agent bank agreement, the deed of charge, the
depository agreement, the expenses loan agreement and the swap agreements,
which are applicable to you. You can view drafts of those documents at the
principal place of business of the note trustee or the specified office of any
of the paying agents.
1. Form Denomination and Title
(1) The offered notes will be initially offered and sold globally in minimum
denominations of U.S.$1,000. They are initially in global bearer form,
without coupons attached. The class C notes are being offered and sold
outside the United States to non-U.S. persons in accordance with
Regulation S or inside the United States only to qualified institutional
buyers within the meaning of Rule 144A under the Securities Act in
transactions exempt from the Securities Act. If notes in definitive form
are issued in respect of the offered notes, they will be issued in an
aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount outstanding of
the relevant global notes, in registered form.
(2) Transfers and exchanges of beneficial interests in global notes are made
in accordance with the paying agency and agent bank agreement.
(3) Title to the global notes will pass by delivery. Title to definitive
notes will pass on registration in the register maintained by the
depository. The holder of any global or definitive note is the absolute
owner of that note unless, in the case of definitive notes, evidence to
the contrary can be shown by a duly executed transfer endorsed on the
note.
84
<PAGE>
2. Status
Payments on the offered notes will be made equally amongst all notes of
the same class.
3. Security and Swap Agreement
The security for the payment of amounts due under your notes, together
with the expenses which validly arise during the transaction, is created by the
deed of charge. The security is created in favour of the note trustee who will
hold it on your behalf and on the behalf of other secured creditors of the
issuer. The security consists of the following:
(1) an assignment by way of first fixed security of the issuer's right, title
and interest in and to the medium term notes for series 99-1;
(2) a charge by way of first fixed sub-charge of all of the issuers' right,
title and interest in the security interests created in favour of the
security trustee in respect of the medium term notes for series 99-1;
(3) an assignment by way of first fixed security of the issuer's right,
title, interest and benefit in and to the issuer related documents except
the trust deed and deed of charge
(4) an assignment by way of first fixed security of the issuer's right,
title, interest and benefit in and to all monies credited to the Series
99-1 Issuer Account or to any bank or other account in which the issuer
may at any time have any right, title, interest or benefit; and
(5) a first floating charge over the issuer's business and assets not charged
under (1), (2), (3) or (4) above,
The security is described in detail in the deed of charge.
The deed of charge sets out how money is distributed between the secured
parties if the security is enforced. The order of priority it sets out is as
follows:
* in no order of priority between them but in proportion to the
respective amounts due, to pay fees which are due to any receiver
appointed under the deed of charge or the trust deed and all
amounts due for legal fees and other costs, charges, liabilities,
expenses, losses, damages, proceedings, claims and demands which
have been incurred by the note trustee under the documents listed
in the third bullet point under number 4 below and in enforcing or
perfecting title to the security together with interest due on
these amounts;
* in order of priority between them, the respective amounts due:
in payment of all amounts due and unpaid, following the
applications in the first bullet point above, to the note trustee
and/or anyone appointed by them under the trust deed; and
towards payment of amounts due and unpaid on the class A notes, to
interest then to principal after having paid any amounts due to
the swap counterparty under the terms the class A swap agreement;
* towards payment of amounts due on the class B notes, having paid
any amounts due to the swap counterparty under the terms of class
B swap agreement, to interest then to principal;
* towards payments of amounts due on the class C notes, having paid
any amounts due to the swap counterparty under the terms of the
class C swap agreement, to interest then to principal;
* towards payment of any sums that the issuer must pay to any tax
authority;
* towards payment of any sums due to third parties under obligations
incurred in the course of the issuer's business;
* towards payment of any dividends due and unpaid to shareholders of
the issuer; and
* in payment of the balance, if any, to the liquidator of the
issuer.
The security becomes enforceable when an event of default occurs. These
events are described in number 9 below. If an event of default occurs, the
redemption of notes will not necessarily be accelerated as described in number
6 below.
The issuer will enter into three swap agreements the material terms of
which are described under the heading "The Swap Agreements" in this prospectus.
85
<PAGE>
4. Negative Covenants of the Issuer
If any note is outstanding, the issuer will not, unless it is permitted by
the terms of the issuer related documents or by the written consent of the
trustee:
* create or permit to subsist any mortgage, charge, pledge, lien or
other security interest, including anything which amounts to any
of these things under the laws of any jurisdiction, on the whole
or any part of its present or future business, assets or revenues,
including uncalled capital;
* carry on any business other than relating to the issue of the
notes, as described in this prospectus; in carrying on that
business, the issuer will not engage in any activity or do
anything at all except:
(1) preserve and/or exercise and/or enforce any of its rights and
perform and observe its obligations under the notes and
coupons, the deed of charge, the paying agency and agent bank
agreement, the trust deed, the depository agreement the
expenses loan agreement, each swap agreement, the series 99-1
medium term notes, the corporate services agreement, the
class A and class B underwriting agreement, the class C
subscription agreement, the bank agreement and any bank
mandate regarding the Series 99-1 Issuer Account --
collectively called the "issuer related documents".
(2) use, invest or dispose of any of its property or assets in
the manner provided in or contemplated by the issuer related
documents; or
(3) perform any act incidental to or necessary in connection with
(1) or (2) above;
* have any subsidiaries, subsidiary business, business of any other
kind, employees, premises or interests in bank accounts other than
the Series 99-1 Issuer Account unless the account is charged to
the note trustee on acceptable terms;
* have any indebtedness, other than indebtedness permitted under the
terms of its articles of association or any of the issuer related
documents;
* give any guarantee or indemnity in respect of any obligation of
any person;
* repurchase any shares of its capital stock or declare or pay any
dividend or other distributions to its shareholders;
* consolidate with or merge with or into any person or liquidate or
dissolve on a voluntary basis;
* be a member of any group of companies for the purposes of value
added tax;
* waive or consent to the modification or waiver of any of the
provisions of the issuer related documents without the prior
written consent of the note trustee; or
* offer to surrender to any company any amounts which are available
for surrender by way of group relief.
5. Interest
Each note will bear interest on its principal amount outstanding from, and
including, the closing date. Interest on the offered notes and the class C notes
is payable in arrear in U.S. dollars on each interest payment date.
If there is a shortfall between the amounts received by the issuer from the
swap counterparty and the amount of interest due on the relevant offered notes
on that interest payment date, that shortfall will be borne by each class of
note in a proportion equal to the proportion that the interest outstanding on
the relevant note bears to the total amount of interest outstanding on the notes
of the same class. This will be determined on the interest payment date on which
the shortfall arises. Payment of the shortfall will be deferred and will be due
on the next interest payment date on which funds are available to the issuer,
or, if earlier, 15 November, 2004 from payments made to it from the swap
counterparty on that interest payment date, to make the payment. The shortfall
will accrue interest at the rate described for each class of note below plus a
margin of 2.0 per cent. per annum, and payment of that interest will also be
deferred and will be due on the next interest payment date on which funds are
available to the issuer to make the payment or, if earlier, 15 November, 2004.
Each period beginning on, and including, the closing date or any interest
payment date and ending on, but excluding, the next interest payment date is
called an interest period. The first interest payment for the offered notes
will be made on 18 January, 2000 for the interest period from and including the
closing date to but excluding 18 January, 2000.
86
<PAGE>
Interest will stop accruing on any part of the principal amount
outstanding of a note from the date it is due to redeem unless, when it is
presented, payment of principal is improperly withheld or refused. If this
happens it will continue to bear interest in accordance with this condition,
both before and after any judgement is given, until whichever is the earlier of
the following:
* the day on which all sums due in respect of that note, up to that
day, are received by or on behalf of the relevant noteholder; and
* the day which is seven days after the principal paying agent or
the note trustee has notified the relevant class of noteholders,
either in accordance with number 14 or individually, that it has
received all sums due in respect of the relevant class of notes up
to that day, except to the extent that there is any subsequent
default in payment,
The rate of interest applicable to the notes for each interest period will
be determined by the agent bank on the following basis:
(1) on the quotation date for each class of note, the agent bank will
determine the offered quotation to leading banks in the London interbank
market for one-month U.S. dollar deposits.
This will be determined by reference to the British Bankers Association
LIBOR Rates display as quoted on the Dow Jones/Telerate Screen No. 3750. If the
Telerate Screen No. 3750 stops providing these quotations, the replacement
service for the purposes of displaying this information will be used. If the
replacement service stops displaying the information, any page showing this
information will be used. If there is more than one service displaying the
information, the one previously approved in writing by the note trustee will be
used;
In each case above, the determination will be made as at or about 11.00
a.m., London time, on that date. These are called the screen rates for the
respective classes;
A "quotation date" means the second business day before the first day of
an intererst period.
(2) if, on any interest determination date, the screen rate is unavailable,
the agent bank will:
* request the principal London office of each of four major banks --
called "reference banks" -- in the London interbank market
selected by the agent bank to provide the agent bank with its
offered quotation to leading banks of the equivalent of the screen
rate on that interest determination date in an amount that
represents a single transaction in that market at that time; and
* calculate the arithmetic mean, rounded upwards to four decimal
places of those quotations;
(3) if on any interest determination date the screen rate is unavailable and
only two or three of the reference banks provide offered quotations, the
rate of interest for that interest period will be the arithmetic mean of
the quotations as last calculated in (2) above; and
(4) if fewer than two reference banks provide quotations, the agent bank will
determine the arithmetic mean, rounded upwards to four decimal places of
the rates quoted by major banks in London, selected by the agent bank at
approximately 11.00 a.m. London time on the relevant quotations date, to
leading European banks for a period equal to the relevant interest period
and in an amount that is representative for a single transaction in that
market at that time, for loans in U.S. dollars.
The rate of interest for each interest period for the class A notes will
be the sum of:
* 0.18 per cent. per annum; and
* the screen rate or the arithmetic mean calculated to replace the
screen rate.
The rate of interest for each interest period for the class B notes will
be the sum of:
* 0.43 per cent. per annum; and
* the screen rate or the arithmetic mean calculated to replace the
screen rate.
The rate of interest for each interest period for the class C notes will
be the sum of:
* 0.90 per cent. per annum; and
* the screen rate or the arithmetic mean calculated to replace the
screen rate.
If the agent bank is unable to determine the screen rate or an arithmetic
mean to replace it, as described in (2) and (3), the rates of interest for any
interest period will be as follows:
* for the class A notes the rate will be the sum of 0.18 per cent.
per annum and the screen rate or arithmetic mean last determined
for the class A notes;
87
<PAGE>
* for the class B notes the rate will be the sum of 0.43 per cent.
per annum and the screen rate or arithmetic mean last determined
for the class B notes; and
* for the class C notes the rate will be the sum of 0.90 per cent.
per annum and the screen rate or arithmetic mean last determined
for the class C notes.
The agent bank will, as soon as it can after the quotation date for each
interest period, calculate the amount of interest payable on each note for that
interest period. The amount of interest will be calculated by applying the rate
of interest for that interest period to the principal amount outstanding of
that note during that interest period, multiplying the product by the actual
number of days in that interest period divided by 360 and rounding to the
nearest U.S. dollars 0.01, half a cent being rounded upwards.
On each interest payment date, the agent bank will determine the actual
amount of interest which will be paid on the notes on that interest payment
date and the amount of any shortfall on the notes for that interest period and
the amount of interest on any shortfall which will be paid on that interest
payment date. The amount of any interest on the shortfall will be calculated by
applying the relevant rate of interest for those notes, plus a margin of 2 per
cent. per annum, to the sum of the shortfall and accrued interest on shortfall
from prior interest periods which remains unpaid, multiplying by the actual
number of days in the relevant interest period and dividing by 360 and rounding
to the nearest U.S. dollars 0.01, half a cent being rounded upwards.
If, on any interest payment date, the amount received from the swap
counterparty is insufficient to pay in full the amount of interest due on the
relevant class of notes, any outstanding shortfall and accrued interest on
shortfall, due on that interest payment date, that amount will be applied first
to the payment of the interest due on the relevant class of notes, secondly to
the payment of any outstanding shortfall and thereafter to the payment of any
accrued interest on shortfall for that class of notes.
The rates and amounts determined by the agent bank will be notified to the
issuer, trustee and paying agent and published in accordance with number 14 as
soon as possible after these parties have been notified.
The issuer, the paying agents, the note trustee, the reference banks, the
agent bank and the noteholders will be bound by the determinations properly
made as described above and none of the reference banks, the agent bank or the
note trustee will be liable in connection with the exercise or non-exercise by
them of their powers, duties and discretions for those purposes.
If the agent bank fails to make a determination or calculation required as
described above, the note trustee, or its appointed agent, without accepting any
liability for it, will make the determination or calculation in as described
above. If this happens, the determination or calculation will be deemed to have
been made by the agent bank.
The issuer will ensure that there will be four reference banks while there
are notes outstanding.
6. Redemption and Purchase
The issuer is only entitled to redeem the notes as provided in paragraphs
(1), (2), and (3) below.
(1) Scheduled Redemption
Class A notes:
Unless previously purchased and cancelled or unless the Regulated
Amortisation Period or Rapid Amortisation Period has already started, all class
A notes will be redeemed on the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date, unless
there is a shortfall between the amount in the Series 99-1 Issuer Account and
the total amount payable to the swap counterparty under the class A swap
agreement. If there is such a shortfall, the class A notes will be redeemed
proportionately with the amount in the Series 99-1 Issuer Account after being
exchanged under the terms of the class A swap agreement. The Rapid Amortisation
Period will then begin. The payments will be made in no order of preference and
proportionately between all class A notes.
Class B notes:
Unless previously purchased and cancelled or unless the Regulated
Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period has already started, the
class B notes will be redeemed on the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date
unless there is a shortfall between the amount in the Series 99-1 Issuer
Account, after payment of all interest and principal due and payable on the
class A notes, and the amount due and payable to the swap counterparty under the
class B swap agreement. If there is such a shortfall, the class B notes will be
redeemed proportionately with the amount in the Series 99-1 Issuer Account after
being exchanged under the terms of the class B swap agreement. The Rapid
Amortisation Period will then begin. The payments will be made, in no order of
preference and proportionately between all class B notes.
88
<PAGE>
Class C notes:
Unless previously purchased and cancelled or unless the Regulated
Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period has already started, the
class C notes will be redeemed on the series 99-1 scheduled redemption date,
unless there is a shortfall between the amount in the Series 99-1 Issuer
Account, after payment of all interest and principal due and payable on the
class A notes and the class B notes, and the amount due and payable to the swap
counterparty under the class C swap agreement. If there is such a shortfall the
class C notes will be redeemed proportionately with the amount in the Series
99-1 Issuer Account after being exchanged under the terms of the class C swap
agreement. The Rapid Amortisation Period will then begin.
If the Rapid Amortisation Period begins as a result of there being
insufficient funds to repay principal and pay interest on the class A notes,
the class B notes or the class C notes, as described above, then on each
interest payment date after that, the class A notes, the class B notes or the
class C notes as applicable, will be redeemed in part, to the extent of amounts
paid to the swap counterparty, in the proportion that their principal amount
outstanding bears to the total principal amount outstanding of their class of
note. This will happen until the earlier of the time when each class of notes
has been paid in full and the November 2004 interest payment date.
On each interest payment date, the agent bank will determine the
following:
* the amount of each principal payment payable on each note; and
* the principal amount outstanding of each note of that class on the
first day of the next interest period, after deducting any
principal payment due to be made on each of that class of notes on
that interest payment date.
The amounts and dates determined by the agent bank will be notified to the
issuer, paying agents and note trustee and published in accordance with number
14 as soon as possible after these parties have been notified.
The issuer, the paying agents, the note trustee and the noteholders will
be bound by the determinations properly made as described above and neither the
agent bank nor the note trustee will be liable in connection with the exercise
or non-exercise by it of its powers, duties and discretions for those purposes.
If the agent bank fails to make a determination as described above, the
note trustee will calculate the principal payment or principal amount
outstanding as described above, and each of these determinations or
calculations will be deemed to have been made by the agent bank. If this
happens, the determination will be deemed to have been made by the agent bank.
(2) Mandatory Early Redemption
If the Regulated Amortisation Period or the Rapid Amortisation Period
begins in respect of any class of notes before the series 99-1 scheduled
redemption date, then on each interest payment date after that, during the
Regulated Amortisation Period or, as the case may be, the Rapid Amortisation
Period, each note of that class will be redeemed, in the proportion that its
principal amount outstanding bears to the total principal amount outstanding of
that class of note, to the extent of the amount which is deposited into the
Series 99-1 Issuer Account towards redemption of the corresponding class of
medium term note -- after the amount has been exchanged for dollars under the
relevant swap agreement. This will happen until the earliest of:
* the date on which the relevant class of notes has been redeemed in
full; or
* 15 November, 2004 -- or if that day is not a business day the next
following business day.
If the Rapid Amortisation Period begins as a result of the termination of
any or all of the swap agreements because withholding tax is imposed -- see
"Swap Agreements" -- then the absolute amount payable on redemption of each
note will be adjusted by an amount in dollars called the "Notional Swap
Termination Amount". This is an amount notionally payable on termination of a
hypothetical currency and rate transaction -- called the "Notional Swap" --
referable to that class of notes -- divided by the number of the relevant class
of notes outstanding. The Notional Swap referable to each class of notes --
will be deemed to be a "Swap Transaction" for the purpose of the 1991 ISDA
Definitions, as supplemented by the 1998 Supplement, and to have been entered
into between one party -- "Notional Party A" -- and the other party --
"Notional Party B" -- pursuant to a multicurrency -- cross border ISDA Master
Agreement, with an effective date notionally deemed to be the closing date, and
for the purpose of Section 6(e) of each Notional Swap, "Second Method and
Market Quotation" shall notionally apply. The form of schedule to each Notional
Swap will be deemed to be in identical form, so far as is possible, to the
schedule prepared in respect of the swap agreement referable to the class of
notes to which each Notional Swap is notionally deemed to refer. For the
purpose of each Notional Swap the issuer shall be deemed to be Notional Party
B.
If the Notional Swap termination payment in respect of any class of notes:
* equals zero, there will be no adjustment to the absolute amount payable
on redemption of that class; or
89
<PAGE>
* is a negative figure, which means that Notional Party A notionally owes a
payment to Notional Party B, then an amount in dollars equal to the
absolute value of that negative amount will be added to the absolute
amount payable on redemption of that class; or
* is a positive figure, which means that Notional Party B notionally owes a
payment to Notional Party A, then an amount in dollars equal to the
absolute value of that positive amount will be deducted from the absolute
amount payable on redemption of that class.
The resulting amount is called the "adjusted amount" for each relevant
class.
The terms of the Notional Swap for each class of notes are as follows:
* the effective date for each class is the closing date;
* the termination date for each class is 15 November, 2002, or the next
following business day if this is not a business day;
* in each case, Notional Party A will notionally pay Notional Party B on
the 15th day of each month, starting on 15 January, 2000 or the next
following business day if this is not a business day, an amount in
dollars calculated in accordance with the relevant Notional Swap at a
floating rate -- determined in accordance with one month USD-LIBOR-BBA
plus a margin of 0.18 per cent. for Class A, 0.43 per cent. for Class B
or 0.90 per cent. for Class C, per annum on a notional principal amount
equal to the principal amount outstanding of the relevant class of notes;
* in each case Notional Party B will notionally pay to Notional Party A on
the 15th day of each month, starting on 15 January, 2000 or the next
following business day if this is not a business day, an amount in
sterling calculated in accordance with the relevant Notional Swap at a
floating rate -- determined in accordance with one month GBP-LIBOR-BBA
plus a margin of 0.145 per cent. for Class A, 0.404 per cent. for Class B
or 0.884 per cent. for Class C, per annum on a notional sterling amount
of L546,345,000 for Class A, L30,352,500 for Class B or L30,352,000 for
Class C, as applicable.
The agent bank will cause the adjusted amount for any class to be published
in accordance with number 14 and to be notified to the note trustee and each of
the paying agents and to the noteholders of the relevant class as soon as
possible after determination. If the agent bank does not at any time for any
reason determine the adjusted amount for any class the note trustee will do so
and that determination will be deemed to have been made by the agent bank. In
doing so, the note trustee will apply all of the provisions described above, to
the extent that, in its opinion, it can do so. In all other respects it will do
so in the manner it deems fair and reasonable in all the circumstances. Any
determination or calculation made by the note trustee will be binding on the
relevant class of noteholders.
(3) Optional Redemption
The issuer may by not less than thirty and not more than sixty days prior
notice to the note trustee and without the need to obtain the prior consent of
the note trustee or the noteholders redeem all of the remaining notes on the
next following interest payment date together with all accrued interest,
deferred interest and additional interest if any if the principal balance of
the remaining notes is less than 10 per cent of their original principal
balance and the note trustee is satisfied that the issuer will have funds
available to it to make the required payment on that interest payment date.
(4) Final Redemption
If the notes have not previously been purchased and cancelled or redeemed
in full as described in number 6, the notes will be finally redeemed at their
then principal amount outstanding or, where applicable, their adjusted amounts
on 15 November, 2004 or the next following business day if this is not a
business day, together with, in each case, all accrued and unpaid interest,
shortfall and interest on shortfall, if any.
The issuer, and/or related companies of it may buy notes at any price. Any
notes that are redeemed or purchased pursuant to these provisions shall be
cancelled at that time and may not be reissued or resold.
You are required, at its request, to sell all of your notes to Gracechurch
Card (Holdings) Limited, pursuant to the option granted to it by the note
trustee, on your behalf. The option is granted to acquire all of the notes,
plus accrued interest on them, for one penny per note, on the earlier of the
following:
* any date falling on or after the interest payment date in 15
February 2005; and
* in the event that the security is enforced, the date on which the
note trustee determines that the proceeds of that enforcement are
insufficient, after payment of all other claims ranking in
priority to the notes, to pay in full any amount due on the notes.
This is called the "post maturity call option".
90
<PAGE>
You acknowledge that the note trustee has the authority and the power to
bind you in accordance with the terms and conditions set out in the post
maturity call option and, by subscribing or acquiring, as the case may be, for
your note(s), you agree to be bound in this way.
7. Payments
Payments of principal and interest on your notes will be made only when
they are presented and, in the case of final redemption, provided that payment
is made in full, surrendered at the specified office of the paying agent by
transfer to a U.S. dollar account.
All payments on your notes are subject to any applicable fiscal or other
laws and regulations. You will not be charged commissions or expenses on these
payments.
If the due date for payment of any amount on your notes is not a business
day in the place it is presented, you will not be entitled to payment of the
amount due in that place until the next business day in that place and you
shall not be entitled to any further interest or other payment as a result of
that delay.
If a paying agent makes a partial payment on your note, that paying agent
will endorse on that note, as applicable, a statement indicating the amount and
date of that payment.
Payments on your notes are subject to the operating rules of DTC and
Euroclear or Cedelbank, if applicable.
8. Taxation
Payments of interest and principal will be made without making any
deductions for any tax imposed by any jurisdiction having power to tax unless a
deduction is required by the law of the relevant jurisdiction which has power
to tax. If a deduction for tax is made, the paying agent will account to the
relevant authority for the amount deducted. Neither the issuer nor any paying
agent is required to make any additional payments to noteholders for any
deductions made for tax.
9. Events of Default
If any of the following events occurs and is continuing it is called an
"event of default":
* the issuer fails to pay any amount of principal on the notes
within 7 days of the date payment is due or fails to pay any
amount of interest on the notes within 15 days of the date payment
is due; or
* the issuer fails to perform or observe any of its other
obligations under the notes, the trust deed, the deed of charge or
the paying agency and agent bank agreement, other than any
obligation to pay any principal or interest on the notes, and,
except where that failure is incapable of remedy, it remains
unremedied for 30 days after the note trustee has given written
notice of it to the issuer, certifying that the default is, in its
opinion, materially prejudicial to the interests of the
noteholders; or
* the early termination, without replacement, of any of the swap
agreements as described in this prospectus under "The Swap
Agreements: Common Provisions of the Swap Agreements"; or
* a judgement or order for the payment of any amount is given
against the issuer and continues unsatisfied and unstayed for a
period of 30 days after it is given or, if a later date is
specified for payment, from that date; or
* a secured party and/or encumbrancer takes possession or a
receiver, administrative receiver, administrator, examiner,
manager or other similar officer is appointed, of the whole or any
part of the business, assets and revenues of the issuer or an
enforcement action is begun for unpaid rent or executions levied
against any of the assets of the issuer; or
* the issuer becomes insolvent or is unable to pay its debts as they
fall due;
* an administrator or liquidator of the issuer or the whole or any
part of the business, assets and revenues of the issuer is
appointed, or an application for an appointment is made;
* the issuer takes any action for a readjustment or deferment of any
of its obligations or makes a general assignment or an arrangement
or composition with or for the benefit of its creditors or
declares a moratorium in respect of any of its indebtedness or any
guarantee of indebtedness given by it; or
* the issuer stops or threatens to stop carrying on all or any
substantial part of its business; or
91
<PAGE>
* an order is made or an effective resolution is passed for the
winding up, liquidation or dissolution of the issuer; or
* any action, condition or thing at any time required to be taken,
fulfilled or done in order:
(1) to enable the issuer lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights
and perform and comply with its obligations under and in respect
of the notes and the issuer related documents; or
(2) to ensure that those obligations are legal, valid, binding and
enforceable, except as that enforceability may be limited by
applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, moratorium, reorganisation or
other similar laws affecting the enforcement of the rights of
creditors generally and that that enforceability may be limited by
the effect of general principles of equity;
is not taken, fulfilled or done; or
* it is or will become unlawful for the issuer to perform or comply
with any of its obligations under or in respect of the notes or
the issuer related documents; or
* all or any substantial part of the business, assets and revenues
of the issuer is condemned, seized or otherwise appropriated by
any person acting under the authority of any national, regional or
local government; or
* the issuer is prevented by any person acting under the authority
of any national, regional or local government from exercising
normal control over all or any substantial part of its business,
assets and revenues.
If an event of default occurs then the note trustee may give an
enforcement notice or appoint a receiver if it chooses and if it is indemnified
to its satisfaction.
If an event of default occurs then the note trustee shall be bound to give
an enforcement notice if it is indemnified to its satisfaction and it is:
* required to by the swap counterparty;
* required to by holders of at least one-quarter of the aggregate
principal amount outstanding of the class A notes, if any remain
outstanding, and if none remain outstanding, the class B notes and
if none of these remain outstanding, the class C notes; or
* directed by an Extraordinary Resolution, as defined in the trust
deed, of holders of outstanding class A notes, and if there are
none, of holders of outstanding class B notes, and if there are
none, of holders of outstanding class C notes.
An "enforcement notice" is a written notice to the issuer declaring the
notes to be immediately due and payable. When it is given, the notes will
become immediately due and payable at their principal amount outstanding
together with accrued interest without further action or formality. Notice of
the receipt of an enforcement notice shall be given to the noteholders as soon
as possible. A declaration that the notes have become immediately due and
payable will not, of itself, accelerate the timing or amount of redemption of
the notes as described in number 6.
10. Prescription
Your notes will become void if they are not presented within the time
limit for payment. That time limit is ten years from their due date. If there
is a delay in the principal paying agent receiving the funds, the due date, for
the purposes of this time limit, is the date on which it notifies you, in
accordance with number 14, that it has received the relevant payment.
11. Replacement of Notes
If your notes are lost, stolen, mutilated, defaced or destroyed, you can
replace them at the specified office of the principal paying agent. You will be
required to both pay the expenses of producing a replacement and comply with
the issuer's reasonable requests for evidence, security and indemnity. You must
surrender any defaced or mutilated notes before replacements will be issued.
12. Note Trustee and Agents
The note trustee is entitled to be indemnified and relieved from
responsibility in certain circumstances and to be paid its costs and expenses
in priority to your claims.
In the exercise of its powers and discretions under the conditions and the
trust deed, the note trustee will consider the interests of the noteholders as
a class and will not be responsible for any consequence to you individually as
a result of you being connected in any way with a particular territory or
taxing jurisdiction.
92
<PAGE>
In acting under the paying agency and agent bank agreement, and in
connection with your notes, the paying agents and the agent bank act only as
agents of the issuer and the note trustee and do not assume any obligations
towards or relationship of agency or trust for or with you.
The note trustee and its related companies are entitled to enter into
business transactions with the issuer, Barclays Bank PLC or related companies
of either of them without accounting for any profit resulting from those
transactions.
The issuer can, at any time, vary or terminate the appointment of any
paying agent or the agent bank and can appoint successor or additional paying
agents or a successor agent bank. If the issuer does this it must ensure that
it maintains the following:
* a principal paying agent;
* a paying agent, if and for so long as any of the notes are listed
on the London Stock Exchange, in London; and
* an agent bank.
Notice of any change in the paying agents, agent bank or their specified
offices shall be promptly given to you in accordance with number 14.
13. Meetings of Noteholders, Modification and Waiver, Substitution and
Addition.
(a) Meetings of Noteholders
The trust deed contains provisions for convening single and separate
meetings of each class of noteholders to consider matters relating to the
notes, including the modification of any provision of the conditions or the
trust deed. Any modification may be made if sanctioned by an extraordinary
resolution.
The quorum for any meeting convened to consider an extraordinary
resolution will be two or more persons holding or representing a clear majority
of the aggregate principal amount outstanding of the relevant class of notes --
and in the case of a separate meeting, the class A notes, the class B notes or
the class C notes, as the case may be -- for the time being outstanding.
Certain terms including the date of maturity of the notes, any day for
payment of interest on the notes, reducing or cancelling the amount of
principal or the rate of interest payable in respect of the notes or altering
the currency of payment of the notes, require a quorum for passing an
extraordinary resolution of two or more persons holding or representing in
total not less than 75 per cent. of the total principal amount outstanding of
the relevant class of notes. These modifications are called "Basic Terms
Modifications".
Except where the extraordinary resolution effects a Basic Terms
Modification, the interests of the most senior class of notes outstanding at
the time take precedence over the interests of the subordinated classes. The
note trustee may only give effect to an extraordinary resolution passed by the
class C noteholders if it considers that the interests of the class A
noteholders or the class B noteholders will not be materially prejudiced. An
extraordinary resolution of the class B noteholders will only be effective if
the note trustee considers that it will not be materially prejudicial to the
class A noteholders.
Subject to the foregoing, any extraordinary resolution duly passed shall
be binding on all noteholders, whether or not they are present at the meeting
at which such resolution was passed. The majority required for an extraordinary
resolution shall be 75 per cent. of the votes cast on that extraordinary
resolution.
Modification and Waiver
The note trustee may agree, without the consent of the noteholders, (1) to
any modification -- except a Basic Terms Modification -- of, or to the waiver
or authorisation of any breach or proposed breach of, the notes or any other
related agreement, which is not, in the opinion of the note trustee, materially
prejudicial to the interests of the noteholders or (2) to any modification of
any of the provisions of the terms and conditions or any of the related
agreements which, in the opinion of the note trustee, is of a formal, minor or
technical nature or is to correct a manifest error. Any of those modifications,
authorisations or waivers will be binding on the noteholders and, unless the
note trustee agrees otherwise, shall be promptly notified by the issuer to the
noteholders in accordance with number 14.
Substitution and Addition
The note trustee may also agree to the substitution of any other body
corporate in place of the issuer as principal debtor under the trust deed and
the notes and in the case of such a substitution or addition the note trustee
may agree, without the consent of the noteholders, to a change of the law
governing the notes and/or the trust deed provided that such change would not
in the opinion of the trustee be materially prejudicial to the
93
<PAGE>
interests of the noteholders. Any such substitution or addition will be promptly
notified to the noteholders in accordance with number 14.
Enforcement
At any time after the notes become due and repayable and without prejudice
to its rights of enforcement in relation to the security, the note trustee may,
at its discretion and without notice, institute such proceedings as it thinks
fit to enforce payment of the notes, including the right to repayment of the
notes together with accrued interest thereon, and shall be bound to do so only
if :
It has been so directed by an extraordinary resolution of the noteholders
of the relevant class. No extraordinary resolution of the class B noteholders
or class C noteholders or any request of the class B noteholders or class C
noteholders will be effective unless there is an extraordinary resolution of
the class A noteholders or a direction of the class A noteholders to the same
effect or none of the class A notes remain outstanding.
No noteholder may institute any proceedings against the issuer to enforce
its rights under or in respect of the notes or the trust deed unless (1) the
note trustee has become bound to institute proceedings and has failed to do so
within a reasonable time and (2) the failure is continuing. Notwithstanding the
previous sentence and notwithstanding any other provision of the trust deed,
the right of any noteholder to receive payment of principal of and interest on
its notes on or after the due date for the principal or interest, or to
institute suit for the enforcement of payment of that interest or principal,
may not be impaired or affected without the consent of that noteholder.
14. Notices
Notices to you will be deemed to have been validly given if published in a
leading English language daily newspaper in London -- which is expected to be
the Financial Times -- and will be deemed to have been given on the date of
first publication.
Any notices specifying a rate of interest, an interest amount, an amount
of shortfall or interest on it, principal payment or a principal amount
outstanding will be treated as having been duly given if the information
contained in that notice appears on the relevant page of the Reuters Screen or
other similar service approved by the note trustee and notified to you. The
notice will be deemed given when it first appears on the screen. If it cannot
be displayed in this way, it will be published as described in the previous
paragraph.
Copies of all notices given in accordance with these provisions will be
sent to the London Stock Exchange Company Announcements Office and DTC.
15. Currency Indemnity
You can be indemnified against losses you suffer from the use of an
exchange rate to convert sums recovered by you in litigation against the
issuer, which is different to the rate you ordinarily use. You must request
this indemnity in writing from the issuer.
This indemnity constitutes a separate and independent obligation of the
issuer and shall give rise to a separate and independent cause of action.
16. Governing Law and Jurisdiction
The notes, swap agreements and trust deed are governed by English Law and
the courts have non-exclusive jurisdiction in connection with the notes.
The Swap Agreements
General
The issuer will enter into the class A swap agreement, the class B swap
agreement and the class C swap agreement -- called collectively the "swap
agreements". There is no separate interest rate cap agreement for any of the
notes.
Under the class A swap agreement between the issuer and the swap
counterparty, the issuer will pay to the swap counterparty:
* an initial payment of dollars, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the initial balance of the class A notes; and
94
<PAGE>
* on each transfer date after the closing date, the lesser of (1)
the sterling amount equal to the interest and principal, if any,
received by the issuer from the MTN issuer on the class A MTN and
(2) the amount of interest and principal, if any, due and payable
to the swap counterparty under the class A swap agreement.
The swap counterparty will pay to the issuer:
* an initial payment in sterling, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the dollar amount of the initial balance of the class A
notes converted into sterling at the fixed exchange rate; and
* on each interest payment date after the closing date, sums in
dollars equal to the interest payable and, if any, principal
repayable to holders of the class A notes on that interest payment
date, as set out in the terms and conditions of the class A notes.
Under the class B swap agreement between the issuer and the swap
counterparty, the issuer will pay to the swap counterparty:
* an initial payment of dollars, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the initial balance of the class B notes; and
* on each transfer date after the closing date, the lesser of (1)
the sterling amount equal to the interest and principal, if any,
received by the issuer from the MTN issuer on the class B MTN and
(2) the amount of interest and principal, if any, due and payable
to the swap counterparty under the class B swap agreement.
The swap counterparty will pay to the issuer:
* an initial payment in sterling, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the dollar amount of the initial balance of the class B
notes converted into sterling at the fixed exchange rate; and
* on each interest payment date after the closing date, sums in
dollars equal to the interest payable and principal repayable, if
any, to holders of the class B notes on that interest payment
date, as set out in the terms and conditions of the class B notes.
Under the class C swap agreement between the issuer and the swap
counterparty, the issuer will pay to the swap counterparty:
* an initial payment of dollars, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the initial balance of the class C notes; and
* on each transfer date after the closing date, the lesser of (1)
the sterling amount equal to the interest and principal, if any,
received by the issuer from the MTN issuer on the class C MTN and
(2) the amount of interest and principal, if any, due and payable
to the swap counterparty under the class C swap agreement.
The swap counterparty will pay to the issuer;
* an initial payment in sterling, on the closing date, in an amount
equal to the dollar amount of the initial balance of the class C
notes converted into sterling at the fixed exchange rate; and
* on each interest payment date after the closing date, sums in
dollars equal to the interest payable and principal repayable, if
any, to holders of the class C notes on that interest payment
date, as set out in the terms and conditions of the class C notes.
The swap agreements provide that payments made under it are to be reduced
in the event that any amount due and payable to the issuer under the class A
MTN, the class B MTN or the class C MTN, as applicable, is deferred by the MTN
issuer under the terms of the relevant class of the MTNs. This is to prevent
that amount in dollars being payable by the swap counterparty before it receives
the corresponding sterling amount from the issuer under the relevant swap
agreement. There will be a corresponding increase in the amounts payable under
the swap agreements to make up this shortfall if the deferred amount is
subsequently received by the issuer.
The fixed sterling to dollar exchange rate, which we refer to as the
"fixed exchange rate", in the swap agreements will be L0.60705 per one dollar.
Common Provisions of the Swap Agreements
The swap agreements provide that if the short-term unsecured debt rating
of the swap counterparty is withdrawn or reduced below "A-1+" by Standard &
Poor's or if the long-term unsecured debt rating of the swap counterparty is
withdrawn or reduced below "Aa3" by Moody's, then within 30 days following that
event, the swap counterparty will be required to take one of the following
steps:
95
<PAGE>
* Post collateral equal to the amount necessary to defease the
obligations of the swap counterparty under the swap agreement, as
confirmed in writing by Standard & Poor's or Moody's and, if the
posting of collateral is confirmed in writing by Standard & Poor's,
it must be done in accordance with the Standard & Poor's interest
rate and currency swap criteria dated January 1999 for calculating
swap collateral (including all mark-to-market and volatility buffer
calculations which are set out in that swap criteria);
* Assign its obligations under the swap agreement to a substitute
swap counterparty having long-term unsecured debt ratings of "AAA"
by Standard & Poor's and "Aaa" by Moody's or, with the prior
written confirmation of the rating agencies that such action will
not result in a reduction or withdrawal of the rating of the
applicable class of notes, a substitute swap counterparty that has
a lesser rating; or
* Arrange for the appointment of a joint and several swap
counterparty with a long-term unsecured debt rating that, when
combined with the long-term unsecured debt ratings of the swap
counterparty, are assessed as sufficient to maintain the then-
current ratings of the applicable class of notes.
Termination of the Swap Agreements
The swap agreements will, or may, in the case of the third bullet point
below, terminate on the earlier of:
* the distribution date on which there is no further obligation to
make a payment under the relevant class of medium term notes;
* the November 2004 interest payment date; and
* the occurrence of an early swap termination event as described
below.
The swap agreements may be terminated early in the following circumstances
- -- each called an "early swap termination event":
* At the option of one party, if there is a failure by the other
party to pay any amounts due under the swap agreement;
* If an event of default under the notes occurs or if there is no
further obligation to make a payment under the relevant class of
medium term notes before the series 99-1 scheduled redemption
date;
* Upon the occurrence of an insolvency of either party, merger
without an assumption of the obligations under the swap
agreements, or changes in law resulting in illegality;
* If as a result of a change in applicable law, withholding taxes
would be imposed by any jurisdiction on any payments made or
required to be made by the swap counterparty to the issuer or by
the issuer to the swap counterparty under the swap agreement and
there are no reasonable measures that the swap counterparty or the
issuer can take to avoid their imposition; and
* The issuer determines that it or the paying agent has or will
become obligated to deduct or withhold amounts from payments on
the related class of notes to be made to any of the related
noteholders on the next interest payment date, for any tax
assessment or other governmental charge imposed by the United
Kingdom or any political subdivision or taxing authority of the
United Kingdom on the payments as a result of any change in its
laws or regulations or rulings, or any change in official position
regarding the application or interpretation of its laws,
regulations or rulings, which change or amendment becomes
effective on or after the date the notes are issued, and there are
no reasonable measures the issuer can take to avoid the tax or
assessment.
The swap agreements may be terminated following the events described in
either of the last two bullet points above only if the issuer is directed to
terminate the swap agreements by a vote of the holders of the class A notes
representing 66 2/3 per cent. of the outstanding principal balances of the class
A notes or, if there are no class A notes outstanding, a vote of the holders of
the class B notes representing 66 2/3 per cent. of the outstanding principal
balance of the class B notes or, if there are no class B notes outstanding, a
vote of the holders of the class C notes representing 66 2/ 3 per cent. of the
outstanding principal balance of the class C notes.
Upon the occurrence of an early swap termination event, following the
occurrence of any of the events referred to in the last two bullet points above,
the issuer or the swap counterparty may be liable to make a termination payment
to the other. This termination payment will be calculated and made in sterling.
The amount of any termination payment will be based on the market value of the
terminated swap agreement based on market quotations of the cost of entering
into a swap transaction with the same terms and conditions that would
96
<PAGE>
have the effect of preserving the respective full payment obligations of
the parties. Any such termination payment could, if the sterling/dollar
exchange rates have changed significantly, be substantial.
In the case of an early swap termination event described in either of the
last two bullet points above the amounts payable on the redemption of each of
the relevant class of notes will be adjusted by reference to a Notional Swap
Termination Amount, see "Terms and Conditions of the Notes: Redemption and
Purchase -- Mandatory Early Redemption". This adjustment corresponds to the
actual termination payment payable under the relevant swap agreement.
If an early swap termination event occurs, on each interest payment date
thereafter, payments of interest and principal payable on the relevant class of
medium term notes allocated and available to make payments on the related class
of notes will be converted into dollars by the note trustee at the then-
prevailing spot exchange rate in the City of London for sterling purchases of
dollars, which will then be used to pay principal and interest on the related
class of notes. Any dollar amounts so distributed may not be equal to the
dollar amounts then due and owing on that class of notes, in which case any
shortfall will be borne equally by each noteholder of that class. Any dollar
amounts so converted in excess of interest due and payable on that class of
notes will be shared equally by each noteholder of that class.
Taxation
Neither the issuer nor the swap counterparty is obliged under the swap
agreements to gross up if withholding taxes are imposed on payments made under
the swap agreements.
If any withholding tax is imposed on payments due to the issuer on the
medium term notes the swap counterparty will be entitled to deduct amounts in
the same proportion from subsequent payments due from it. If that happens
amounts available to the issuer to make payments on the notes will be reduced
by the amount so deducted.
If any withholding tax is imposed on payments due by the swap counterparty
under the swap agreements the issuer will not be entitled to deduct amounts
from subsequent payments due from it and amounts available to the issuer to
make payments on the notes will be reduced by the amount so withheld by the
swap counterparty.
97
<PAGE>
The Medium Term Notes
On the closing date the MTN issuer will issue three interest bearing
medium term notes to the issuer. These will be the class A MTN, the class B MTN
and the class C MTN. Each medium term note will mature for redemption on the
series 99-1 scheduled redemption date. The Bank of New York, acting out of its
London Branch at One Canada Square, Canary Wharf, London E14 5AL will act as
trustee, custodian, issue agent and principal paying agent in relation to the
series 99-1 medium term notes.
Under the terms of the security trust and cash management deed, Barclays,
acting through its corporate lending division at 54 Lombard Street, London,
EC3P 3AH, will initially be appointed as cash manager for the medium term notes
- -- called the "MTN cash manager".
Application has been made to list the medium term notes on the London
Stock Exchange.
The medium term notes will be issued on a non-syndicated continuous basis
in series. Medium term notes issued in respect of any series may differ as to
principal, interest and recourse to security. Each series must be constituted
by a supplemental deed to the security trust and cash management deed that will
also specify any enhancement provider for that series and whether that
enhancement provider is to be a beneficiary. The transferor beneficiary may
direct the receivables trustee to create one or more new series within the
receivables trust by making an acquisition.
Each new series may differ from any other series in its principal terms
and the manner, timing and amounts of distributions made to beneficiaries
within it. The MTN issuer may, by executing a further series trust supplement,
become an investor beneficiary in that new series. The MTN issuer shall not
issue any further medium term notes in respect of an existing series without
the prior consent of the holders of the existing medium term notes in that
series, unless the further medium term notes are fungible with the existing
ones.
The MTN issuer will pay the proceeds of the medium term notes to the
receivables trustee for the purpose of the receivables trust which would permit
the receivables trustee to acquire separate undivided beneficial interests in
the receivables trust for each class of medium term notes. See "The Receivables
Trust" and "Use of Proceeds". The initial principal amount of each undivided
beneficial interest acquired is the Investor Interest for each class of
investor certificates. These interests will be represented by an investor
certificate for each class, which will be issued to the MTN issuer by the
receivables trustee. See "Series 99-1: General".
The receivables trustee will be permitted to use the proceeds of the
medium term notes paid to it, together with monies paid to it by other
beneficiaries and other trust property, to accept an offer to assign by the
transferor all present and future amounts arising on the designated accounts.
By becoming the initial investor beneficiary of the receivables trust, the MTN
issuer will be entitled to receive payment, at specified times, of a portion of
collections of the receivables assigned by the transferor to the receivables
trustee. These payments will be used by the MTN issuer in and towards
redemption of, first, the class A MTN, second, the class B MTN and third, the
class C MTN.
The ability of the MTN issuer to meet its obligations to pay principal of
and interest on the medium term notes will be entirely dependent on the receipt
by it of funds from the receivables trust.
The MTN issuer and the security trustee will have no recourse to Barclays
other than:
* against Barclaycard as transferor under the receivables securitisation
agreement for any breach of representations and obligations in respect
of the receivables; and
* against Barclaycard as MTN cash manager under the security trust and
cash management deed for any breach of obligations of the MTN cash
manager.
The obligations of the MTN issuer and certain other rights of the MTN
issuer under each series of medium term notes and under the documents relating
to them, will be secured under the security trust and cash management deed, by
security interests over the investor certificates. The security for each series
will be granted by the MTN issuer in favour of the security trustee. If the net
proceeds of the enforcement of security for a series following a mandatory
redemption -- after meeting the expenses of the trustee, the paying agents, the
custodian and any receiver -- are insufficient to make all payments due on the
medium term notes of that series, the assets of the MTN issuer securing other
series of medium term notes will not be available for payment of that
shortfall.
If the security trust and cash management deed is enforced, the monies
paid to the MTN issuer by the receivables trustee on each transfer date will be
applied:
* first to meet payments due to any receiver appointed under it; then
* to the extent not met above, to meet the fees, costs and expenses of
the MTN issuer and the security trustee; then
98
<PAGE>
* to meet payments of interest and then principal on the class A MTNs,
then on the class B MTNs and finally on the class C MTNs.
The interest rate on the medium term notes will be determined by the agent
bank in accordance with the medium term note conditions. This is done by
reference to the screen rate or other rate set by the agent bank for three-
month deposits for pounds sterling in the London interbank market plus a margin.
The margin will be 0.2375 per cent. per annum for the class A MTN, 0.5300 per
cent. per annum for the class B MTN and 1.0000 per cent. per annum for the class
C MTN. The interest rate for the first interest period will be determined on the
closing date. Interest in respect of the medium term notes will be payable in
arrear in sterling on each interest payment date. Interest on each class of MTNs
will be paid monthly on each distribution date falling during or upon the expiry
of each quarterly interest period.
If any withholding or deduction for any taxes, duties, assessments or
government charges is imposed, levied, collected, withheld or assessed on
payments of principal or interest on the medium term notes by any jurisdiction
or any political subdivision or authority in or of any jurisdiction having
power to tax, neither the MTN issuer nor the principal paying agent will be
required to make any additional payments to holders of the medium term notes
for that withholding or deduction.
The occurrence and continuation of the following events is called an MTN
event of default:
* the MTN issuer fails to pay any amount of principal of the medium term
notes within 7 days of the due date for its payment or fails to pay
any amount of interest on the medium term notes within 15 days of its
due date; or
* the MTN issuer fails to perform or observe any of its other
obligations under the medium term notes, the MTN trust supplement, or
the security trust and cash management deed and, except where the
failure is incapable of remedy, it remains unremedied for 30 days, in
either case, after the security trustee has given written notice to
the MTN issuer, certifying that the failure is, in the opinion of the
security trustee, materially prejudicial to the interests of the
medium term note holders; or
* the early termination, without replacement, of any of the swap
agreements as described in this prospectus under "The Swap Agreements:
Common Provisions of the Swap Agreements".
* a judgement or order for the payment of any amount is given against
the MTN issuer and continues unsatisfied and unstayed for a period of
30 days after the date it is given or the date specified for payment,
if later; or
* a secured party takes possession or a receiver, administrative
receiver, administrator, examiner, manager or other similar officer is
appointed, of the whole or any part of the undertaking, assets and
revenues of the MTN issuer or an enforcement action is begun for
unpaid rent or executions levied against any of the assets of the MTN
issuer; or
* the MTN issuer becomes insolvent or is unable to pay its debts as they
fall due or an administrator or liquidator of the MTN issuer or the
whole or any part of its business, assets and revenues is appointed,
or application for any appointment is made, or the MTN issuer takes
any action for a readjustment or deferment of any of its obligations
or makes a general assignment or an arrangement or composition with or
for the benefit of its creditors or declares a moratorium in respect
of any of its indebtedness or any guarantee of indebtedness given by
it or ceases or threatens to cease to carry on all or any substantial
part of its business; or
* an order is made or an effective resolution is passed for the winding
up, liquidation or dissolution of the MTN issuer; or
* any action, condition or thing at any time required to be taken,
fulfilled or carried out in order to (i) enable the MTN issuer
lawfully to enter into, exercise its rights and perform and comply
with its obligations under and in respect of the medium term notes and
the documents relating to them or (ii) to ensure that those
obligations are legal, valid, binding and enforceable, except as the
enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency,
moratorium, reorganisation or other similar laws affecting the
enforcement of the rights of creditors generally and as that
enforceability may be limited by the effect of general principles of
equity, is not taken, fulfilled or, as the case may be, carried out;
or
* it is or will become unlawful for the MTN issuer to perform or comply
with any of its obligations under or in respect of the medium term
notes or the documents relating to them; or
* all or any substantial part of the business, assets and revenues of
the MTN issuer is condemned, seized or otherwise appropriated by any
person acting under the authority of any national, regional or local
government or the MTN issuer is prevented by any of these people from
exercising normal control over all or any substantial part of its
business, assets and revenues,
99
<PAGE>
If an MTN event of default occurs then the security trustee shall be bound
to give an enforcement notice if it is indemnified to its satisfaction and it
is:
* required to by holders of at least one-quarter of the aggregate
principal amount outstanding of the class A MTN, if any remain
outstanding, and if none remain outstanding, the class B MTN, and if
none of these remain outstanding, the class C MTN; or
* directed by an Extraordinary Resolution, as defined in the security
trust and cash management deed, of holders of outstanding class A MTN,
and if there are none, of holders of outstanding class B MTNs, and if
there are none, of holders of outstanding class C MTN.
An MTN enforcement notice is a written notice to the MTN issuer declaring
the medium term notes to be immediately due and payable. When it is given, the
medium term notes will become immediately due and payable at their principal
amount outstanding together with accrued interest without further action or
formality. Notice of the receipt of an MTN enforcement notice shall be given to
the medium term note holders as soon as possible. A declaration that the medium
term notes have become immediately due and payable will not, of itself,
accelerate the timing or amount of redemption of the medium term notes.
When reference is made to the MTN cash manager it includes any successor
to Barclaycard as MTN cash manager. The security trust and cash management deed
provides that, as MTN cash manager, Barclaycard will service and administer the
Series 99-1: Distribution Account.
Barclaycard, and any successor MTN cash manager to the MTN issuer, will be
entitled to receive the fee for acting as MTN cash manager, payable by the MTN
issuer from amounts received as MTN Issuer Costs Amounts from the Series 99-1
Distribution Account.
The MTN cash manager may not resign, apart from in certain circumstances.
The resignation of the MTN cash manager shall only become effective once a
replacement has assumed all of the responsibilities of the MTN cash manager set
out in the security trust and cash management deed.
Material Legal Aspects of the Receivables
Consumer Credit Act 1974
A significant number of the credit transactions that occur on a designated
account will be for items of credit extended to a cardholder for an amount up
to L25,000. The Consumer Credit Act applies to these transactions and, in whole
or in part, the credit or charge card agreement establishing each designated
account. This has certain consequences for the designated accounts, including
the following:
Enforcement of improperly executed or modified card agreements
If a credit or charge card agreement has not been executed or modified in
accordance with the Consumer Credit Act, it may be unenforceable against a
cardholder without a court order -- and in some instances may be completely
unenforceable. As is common with many other UK credit and charge card issuers,
some of Barclaycard's credit and charge card agreements do not comply in all
respects with the Consumer Credit Act or other related legislation. As a
result, these agreements may be unenforceable by Barclaycard against the
cardholders without a court order. The transferor gives no guarantee that a
court order could be obtained if required. With respect to those credit or
charge card agreements which may not be compliant, such that a court order
could not be obtained, Barclaycard estimates that this would apply to
approximately 1 per cent. of the aggregate principal receivables in the
designated accounts on 30 September, 1999. Barclaycard does not anticipate any
material increase in this percentage of receivables in the securitised
portfolio. The accounts that do not comply with the Consumer Credit Act are
still legal, valid and binding obligations of the relevant cardholder and it
will still be possible to collect payments and demand arrears from cardholders
willing to pay their debt and demand arrears from cardholders who are falling
behind with their payments. The transferor will have no obligation to repay or
account to a cardholder for any payments received by a cardholder because of
this noncompliance with the Consumer Credit Act. However, if losses arise on
these accounts, they will be written off and borne by the investor beneficiary
and transferor beneficiary based on their respective interests in the
receivables trust.
Liability for supplier's misrepresentation or breach of contract
Transactions involving the use of a credit or charge card in the United
Kingdom may constitute transactions under debtor-creditor-supplier agreements.
A debtor-creditor-supplier agreement includes an agreement where the creditor,
with knowledge of its purpose, advances funds to finance a purchase by the
debtor of goods or services from a supplier.
100
<PAGE>
Section 75 of the Consumer Credit Act provides that, if the supplier is in
breach of the contract -- whether such contract is express or implied by law --
between the supplier and a cardholder in a debtor-creditor-supplier agreement
or if the supplier has made a misrepresentation about that contract, the
creditor may also be liable to the cardholder for the breach or
misrepresentation. The liability of the transferor for a designated account is
called a "Transferor Section 75 Liability". In these circumstances, the
cardholder may have the right to reduce the amount owed to the transferor under
his or her credit or charge card account. This right would survive the sale of
the receivables to the receivables trustee. As a result, the receivables
trustee may not receive payments from cardholders that it might otherwise
expect to receive. As a result, the receivables trustee may not receive the
full amount otherwise owed by a cardholder. However, the creditor will not be
liable where the cash price of the item or service supplied concerning the
claim is less than L100 or greater than L30,000.
The receivables trustee has agreed to indemnify the transferor for any
loss suffered by the transferor arising from any claim under section 75 of the
Consumer Credit Act. This indemnity cannot exceed the original outstanding
principal balance of the affected charges on the designated account.
The receivables trustee's Indemnity will be payable from excess spread on
the receivables. Any amounts that Barclaycard recovers from the supplier will
reduce Barclaycard's loss for purposes of the receivables trustee's indemnity.
Barclaycard will have rights of indemnity against suppliers under section 75 of
the Consumer Credit Act. Barclaycard may also be able to charge-back the
transaction in dispute to the supplier under the operating regulations of VISA
or Mastercard.
If Barclaycard's loss for purposes of the receivables trustee's indemnity
exceeds the excess spread available to satisfy the loss, the amount of the
excess will reduce the Transferor Interest accordingly.
Transfer of Benefit of Receivables
The transfer by the transferor to the receivables trustee of the benefit
of the receivables is governed by English law and takes effect in equity only.
Notice to the cardholders of the assignment to the receivables trustee
would perfect the legal title of the receivables trustee to the receivables.
The receivables trustee has agreed that notice will not be given to
cardholders, unless the transferor's long-term senior unsecured indebtedness as
rated by Moody's, Standard & Poor's or Fitch IBCA were to fall below Baa2, BBB
or BBB, respectively. The lack of notice has several legal consequences.
Until notice is given to the cardholders, each cardholder will discharge
his or her obligations under the designated account by making payment to the
transferor. Notice to cardholders would mean that cardholders should no longer
make payment to the transferor as creditor under the card agreement but should
instead make payment to the receivables trustee as assignee of the receivables.
If notice is given, and a cardholder ignores it and makes payment to the
transferor for its own account, that cardholder would nevertheless still be
bound to make payment to the receivables trustee. The transferor, having
transferred the benefit of the receivables to the receivables trustee, is the
bare trustee of the receivables trustee for the purposes of the collection of
the receivables that are the property of the receivables trust and is
accountable to the receivables trustee accordingly.
Before the insolvency of the transferor, until notice is given to a
cardholder who is a depositor or other creditor of the transferor, equitable
set-offs may accrue in favour of that cardholder against his or her obligation
to make payments under the card agreement to the transferor. These rights of
set-off may result in the receivables trustee receiving less monies than
anticipated from the receivables.
The transfer of the benefit of receivables to the receivables trustee has
been and will continue to be subject both to any prior equities that have
arisen in favour of the cardholder and to any equities that may arise in the
cardholder's favour after the assignment. Where notice of the assignment is
given to a cardholder, certain rights of set-off may not arise after the date
of the notice.
Under the terms of the receivables securitisation agreement, the
transferor represents that each receivable assigned to the receivables trust is
an eligible receivable -- unless the receivable is specified as being an
ineligible receivable. The eligibility criteria include that each receivable
constitutes the legal, valid and binding obligations of the cardholder
enforceable -- unless they are not in compliance with the Consumer Credit Act
in which case they may only be enforceable with a court order and, in a small
number of cases, may be unenforceable -- against the cardholder in accordance
with its terms. They also include that each receivable is not, save as
specifically contemplated by any rule of English law, currently subject to any
defence, dispute, set-off or counterclaim or enforcement orders apart from in
the limited cases described in the previous sentence.
Notice to the cardholder would perfect the transfer so that the
receivables trustee would take priority over any interest of a later
encumbrancer or transferee of the transferor's rights who has no notice of the
transfer to the receivables trustee.
101
<PAGE>
Notice to the cardholder would prevent the card agreement from being
amended by the transferor or the cardholder without the consent of the
receivables trustee.
Lack of notice to the cardholder means that, for procedural purposes, the
receivables trustee will have to join the transferor as a party to any legal
action that the receivables trustee may want to take against any cardholder.
United Kingdom Taxation Treatment Of The Notes
Overview
UK legal advisers, Clifford Chance, have filed an opinion that, subject to
finalisation of documents including those which are exhibits to the registration
statement of which this prospectus forms a part in a form which is satisfactory
to them and not inconsistent with the descriptions in the body of this
prospectus and based on certain assumptions which cannot be verified before
closing, the following summary is true in all material respects in relation to
the matters expressly addressed. The summary set out below describes the
material United Kingdom income tax, corporation tax, inheritance tax, capital
gains tax, stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax consequences of acquiring,
holding and disposing of the offered notes.
The comments below are, based on current United Kingdom law and practice.
They relate only to the position of persons who are the absolute beneficial
owners of their notes and may not apply to certain classes of persons,
including dealers who carry on a trade in the UK and persons who own the notes
as trustee, nominee or otherwise on behalf of another person, but otherwise
will, subject to the following paragraph, apply to US holders who beneficially
own the notes and coupons.
The comments below do not necessarily apply where the interest or any
other income on the notes is deemed for UK tax purposes to be the income of a
person other than the absolute beneficial owner of the notes in question, for
example where a person ordinarily resident in the UK transfers assets to a non-
resident company for the purpose of avoiding UK tax.
It is suggested that any noteholders who are in doubt as to their position
consult their professional advisers.
Taxation of US Residents
As discussed in more detail below, a US holder who is not resident in the
UK for UK tax purposes may obtain payment of interest on their notes without
deduction of tax if and for so long as the notes are quoted Eurobonds, if
either:
* he obtains payment on the notes from a recognised clearing system,
which has received the payments without deduction of UK tax, otherwise
than through a collecting agent in the UK; or
* if payment is made by or through a paying agent in the UK, or through
a collecting agent in the UK, he has filed or procured that a valid
declaration in the prescribed form has been filed with the appropriate
agent confirming that he is the absolute beneficial owner of his notes
and the interest on his notes and he is not resident in the UK for UK
tax purposes.
Definitive notes will be in registered form and therefore will not
constitute quoted Eurobonds. Interest on definitive notes will be subject to
deduction of tax at the lower rate, currently 20 per cent., unless relief is
available under the terms of an applicable double tax treaty.
Under the terms of the Convention of 31 December, 1975 between the United
Kingdom and the United States of America -- called "the Convention" -- a person
who is a US resident for the purposes of the Convention -- called a U.S.
noteholder, will not be subject to UK tax on any coupon beneficially owned by
him, unless he carries on business in the UK through a permanent establishment
situated in the UK, or performs in the UK independent personal services from a
fixed base situated therein, and the notes are effectively connected with such
permanent establishment or fixed base, or in certain other circumstances
specified in the Convention where relief is not available.
A US noteholder who is an individual will not be subject to United Kingdom
tax on any gain on any disposal of the notes unless they are held by or for a
trade, profession or vocation carried on by him through a branch or agency in
the UK -- subject to any relief which may be available under the Convention or
which may be available under UK law.
102
<PAGE>
Taxation of Interest Paid
Under current UK law and Inland Revenue practice, the notes will be
treated as "quoted Eurobonds" -- as defined in Section 124 of the Income and
Corporation Taxes Act 1988 -- so long as they are represented by global notes
in bearer form and are listed on a recognised stock exchange within the meaning
of Section 841 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. The London Stock
Exchange is recognised for this purpose. Therefore, so long as the notes are
represented by global notes in bearer form and continue to be listed on a
recognised stock exchange and held within a recognised clearing system,
payments of interest on the notes by any paying agent may, under current law
and practice, be made without withholding or deduction for or on account of
United Kingdom income tax where:
* the payments are made by a paying agent who is not in the United
Kingdom; or
* payments are made by or through a paying agent who is in the United
Kingdom and either:
(1) payment is made direct to the recognised clearing system; or
(2) in a case where payment is made to, or at the direction of, a
depositary for the recognised clearing system the paying agent obtains
a valid declaration in the prescribed form from the depositary; or
(3) the paying agent has obtained a notice from the Inland Revenue
directing the paying agent to pay the interest with no tax deducted.
For the purposes of Section 124 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act
1988, DTC, Euroclear and Cedelbank have been designated as recognised clearing
systems.
Any definitive notes will not be quoted Eurobonds. In addition, the notes
will not be, or will cease to be, quoted Eurobonds on which interest can be
paid gross as described above in any other case where:
* the notes are not in bearer form; or
* the notes do not carry a right to interest; or
* the notes are not listed on a recognised stock exchange; or
* the notes are not held in a recognised clearing system.
In any of the cases referred to in this paragraph, interest on the
relevant notes will be payable subject to deduction or withholding of United
Kingdom income tax at the lower rate, currently 20 per cent., except that (1)
the withholding is subject to any direction to the contrary by the Inland
Revenue pursuant to the provisions of any applicable double taxation treaty;
and (2) even if the relevant notes are not held in a recognised clearing
system, interest may be payable gross if it is paid through a paying agent who
is outside the United Kingdom.
If the notes are quoted Eurobonds and a person in the United Kingdom in
the course of a trade or profession:
* by means of coupons, warrants or bills of exchange, collects or
secures payment of or receives interest on the notes for a noteholder;
or
* arranges to collect or secure payment of interest on the notes for a
noteholder; or
* acts as a custodian of the notes and receives interest on the notes or
directs that interest on the notes is paid to another person or
consents to that payment.
- - other than solely by clearing a cheque or arranging for the clearing of a
cheque -- that person, called the "collecting agent", will be required to
withhold United Kingdom income tax at the lower rate -- currently 20 per cent.,
subject to certain exceptions, including the following:
* the notes are held in a recognised clearing system and either:
(1) the collecting agent pays or accounts for the interest directly to the
recognised clearing system; or
(2) in a case where payment is made to, or at the direction of, a
depositary for the recognised clearing system, the collecting agent
obtains a valid declaration in the prescribed form from the
depositary; or
(3) the collecting agent acts as a depositary for the recognised clearing
system; or
* the person beneficially entitled to the interest owns the notes and is
not resident in the United Kingdom and the collecting agent either:
(1) holds a valid declaration in the prescribed form from that person; or
103
<PAGE>
(2) holds a valid declaration in the prescribed form from a person --
other than a beneficial owner of the notes -- to whom the interest is
payable or who is entitled to arrange for the interest to be collected
without deduction of United Kingdom tax and who is not a collecting
agent in the United Kingdom; or
* the interest is payable to trustees of certain trusts, -- called
"qualifying discretionary and accumulation trusts", where essentially
neither the trustees nor the beneficiaries are resident in the United
Kingdom and the collecting agent has obtained a valid declaration in
the prescribed form from the trustee; or
* the person beneficially entitled to the interest is eligible for
certain reliefs from tax for the interest -- for example, charities or
pension funds -- and the collecting agent has obtained a valid
declaration in the prescribed form from that person; or
* the collecting agent has obtained a notice from the Inland Revenue
directing the collecting agent to pay the interest with no tax
deducted.
In certain circumstances, a bank in the United Kingdom which sells coupons
or a dealer in coupons may also be subject to the collecting agent rules
described above.
Any declaration made as referred to above will not have effect in relation
to any given interest payments or receipts where:
* the person who made the declaration has notified the paying agent or
collecting agent that the declaration does not apply, or has ceased to
apply, to the payments or receipts in question; or
* the paying agent or collecting agent has reason to believe that the
declaration is or has become incorrect as regards the relevant
payments or receipts; or
* the paying agent or collecting agent has received notice from the
Inland Revenue directing that the relevant payments or receipts
arising after a specified date are chargeable payments or receipts.
Interest on the notes will have a United Kingdom source and accordingly
will be within the charge to United Kingdom tax even if paid without
withholding or deduction except that exemption from or reduction in any United
Kingdom tax payable on the interest might be available in appropriate
circumstances under the provisions of an applicable double taxation convention.
By way of exception to the charge described in the paragraph right above,
interest on the notes received without deduction or withholding for United
Kingdom income tax will not be chargeable to United Kingdom income tax in the
hands of a noteholder who is not resident for tax purposes in the United
Kingdom unless that holder carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the
United Kingdom through a United Kingdom branch or agency in connection with
which the interest is received or to which the notes are attributable. There
are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agent -- such as
some brokers and investment managers.
Proposed European Directive on the Taxation of Savings
In May 1998, the European Commission presented to the Council of Ministers
of the European Union a proposal to oblige member states to adopt either a
withholding tax system or an information reporting system for interest,
discounts and premiums. It is unclear whether this proposal will be adopted,
and if it is adopted, whether it will be adopted in its current form. The
withholding tax system would require a paying agent established in a member
state to withhold tax at a minimum rate of 20 per cent. from any interest,
discount or premium paid to an individual resident in another member state,
unless the individual presents a certificate obtained from the tax authorities
of the member state in which the individual is resident confirming that those
authorities are aware of the payment due to that individual. The information
reporting system would require a member state to supply, to other member
states, details of any payment of interest, discount or premium made by paying
agents within its jurisdiction to an individual resident in another member
state. For these purposes, the term paying agent is widely defined and includes
an agent who collects interest, discounts or premiums on behalf of an
individual beneficially entitled thereto. If this proposal is adopted, it will
not apply to payments of interest, discounts and premiums made before 1
January, 2001.
Neither the issuer nor any paying agent is required to make any payments
to noteholders to compensate them for any withholding tax imposed on payments
under the notes.
Ownership and Disposal, Including Redemption, of the Notes by United Kingdom Tax
Payers
(1) Corporate Noteholders
Noteholders which are companies within the charge to United Kingdom
corporation tax -- other than authorised unit trusts -- will normally be taxed
on their returns from the notes, including interest and returns attributable to
movements in value, whether income or capital in nature, as income, which is
calculated in accordance with an authorised accruals or mark-to-market basis of
accounting. Relief may be available for related expenses on a similar basis.
104
<PAGE>
Such noteholders may also be subject to taxation with respect to foreign
exchange gains and losses on their notes, with all such gains and losses being
computed by translating the relevant amounts into sterling at year-ends and
other "translation times".
(2) Other Noteholders
Accrued income scheme
On transfer of a note, a noteholder who is not subject to corporation tax
and who is resident or ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom or carrying on
a trade in the United Kingdom through a branch or agency to which that note is
attributable, may be chargeable to UK income tax on an amount treated, by rules
known as the accrued income scheme contained in Chapter II or Part XVII of the
Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988, as representing interest accrued on the
note from the last interest payment date to the time of transfer.
Taxation of capital gains
A disposal of a note by a noteholder who is not subject to corporation tax
and who is resident or ordinarily resident in the United Kingdom or who carries
on a trade, profession or vocation in the United Kingdom to which that note is
attributable, may give rise to a chargeable gain or allowable loss for the
purposes of the taxation of capital gains. However in calculating any gain or
loss of this sort the consideration for disposal of the note will be reduced by
any amount on which the noteholder is chargeable to income tax on the transfer
of the note under the accrued income scheme as described above.
United Kingdom Inheritance Tax
Where a note is held by an individual who is domiciled, or deemed
domiciled for inheritance tax purposes, in the UK there may be a charge to UK
inheritance tax on the individual's death or on certain transfers of the note,
including gifts to some settlements and gifts made within seven years of the
death of the individual.
U.S. holders should be aware that the definitive notes could be regarded
as property situated in the United Kingdom and therefore be subject to UK
inheritance tax on death or on certain transfers of the definitive notes,
including gifts to some settlements and gifts made within seven years of death.
These provisions are subject to any relief provided by the U.S./UK double
tax convention relating to estate and gift taxes.
Stamp Duty and Stamp Duty Reserve Tax
No United Kingdom stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax is payable on the
issue or transfer of the global notes or on the issue or transfer of a note in
definitive form, provided that the note does not at any time carry (1) a right
to interest, the amount of which exceeds a reasonable commercial return on the
nominal amount of the capital of the note; or (2) a right on repayment to an
amount which exceeds the nominal amount of the capital of the note and is not
reasonably comparable with what is generally repayable, in respect of a similar
nominal amount of capital, under the terms of issue of loan capital listed in
the official list of the London Stock Exchange.
Taxation of the MTN Issuer and the Issuer
The MTN issuer and the issuer will be subject to UK corporation tax, at a
maximum rate currently of 30 per cent. on the profit reflected in their
respective profit and loss accounts as increased by the amounts of any non-
deductible expenses or losses. The profit in the profit and loss account will
not exceed 1 basis point of the principal amount outstanding on the medium term
notes in the case of the MTN issuer, or on the notes in the case of the issuer.
Examples of non-deductible expenses and losses may include, for the MTN issuer:
* amounts paid by the MTN issuer to the receivables trustee to cover the
receivables trustee's fee and expenses; and
* any losses of principal which cannot be met out of excess spread and
are not reflected by account-specific provisions in the MTN issuer's
statutory accounts; and for the issuer, certain expenses relating to
cash management.
Taxation of Receivables Trustee
The receivables trustee will have no United Kingdom tax liabilities apart
from a liability to United Kingdom income tax or corporation tax on any
amounts, such as trustee fees, which are paid to the receivables trustee for
its own benefit; and accordingly, the receivables trustee will have no
liability to United Kingdom tax in relation to amounts which it receives on
behalf of the MTN issuer or amounts which it is obliged to pay the MTN issuer.
105
<PAGE>
Material United States Federal Income Tax Consequences
Overview
The following summary describes the material United States federal income
tax consequences of acquiring, holding and disposing of the class A notes and
class B notes. This summary has been prepared and reviewed by Orrick,
Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP, special United States federal income tax counsel to
the Issuer -- called "special U.S. tax counsel".
This summary does not discuss all aspects of United States federal tax
law. In particular, except as specifically indicated in this summary, it
addresses only purchasers in the original offering who hold class A notes and/
or class B notes as capital assets within the meaning of Section 1221 of the
United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, called the "Code". It does not
address special United States federal income tax considerations that may be
important to particular investors in light of their individual investment
circumstances or to certain types of investors subject to special tax rules --
for example, financial institutions, insurance companies, tax-exempt
institutions, persons whose functional currency is not the United States
dollar, dealers in securities or currencies, or investors holding the notes as
part of a conversion transaction, as part of a hedge or hedging transaction, or
as a position in a straddle for tax purposes, or persons whose functional
currency, as defined in Code Section 985, is not the U.S. dollar.
Further, this discussion does not address alternative minimum tax
consequences or any tax consequences to holders of interests in a noteholder.
In addition, this summary does not discuss any foreign, state, local or other
tax considerations. This summary is based on the Code, and administrative and
judicial authorities, all as in effect on the date of this prospectus and all
of which are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis.
Special U.S. tax counsel has prepared and reviewed this summary of
material United States federal income tax consequences, and is of the opinion
that it is correct in all material respects. Special U.S. tax counsel also
opines that, as described below, each of the receivables trust, the MTN issuer
and the issuer will not be treated as engaged in a trade or business within the
United States for U.S. federal income tax purposes and that each of those
entities will not be subject to United States federal income tax. Except as set
forth in the preceding sentences, special U.S. tax counsel will render no other
opinions about the acquisition, holding and disposition of the notes. Further,
an opinion of special U.S. tax counsel is not binding on the IRS or the courts,
and no ruling on any of the consequences or issues discussed below will be
sought from the IRS. Moreover, there are no authorities on similar transactions
involving securities issued by an entity with terms similar to those of the
notes. Accordingly, the issuer suggests that persons considering the purchase
of class A notes and/or class B notes consult their own tax advisors about the
United States federal income tax consequences of an investment in the notes and
the application of United States federal tax laws, as well as the laws of any
state, local or foreign taxing jurisdictions, to their particular situations.
For the purposes of this summary, a "United States holder" means a
beneficial owner of notes who is a "United States person" as described in
Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code, generally including;
* an individual who is a citizen or resident of the United States;
* a corporation or partnership created in or under the laws of the
United States, any state or any political subdivision of any state --
including the District of Columbia; and
* an estate or trust whose income is includible in gross income for
United States federal income tax purposes without regard to source.
A "non-United States holder" means a beneficial owner of notes that is not a
United States holder.
Tax Status of the Receivables Trust, the MTN Issuer and the Issuer
It is presently contemplated that each of the receivables trust, the MTN
issuer and the issuer will conduct their respective activities, including
activities undertaken on their behalf, such as servicing activities, entirely
outside of the United States. In that regard, assuming that the activities of
each of the receivables trust, the MTN issuer and the issuer are, as
contemplated, conducted entirely outside of the United States, and assuming
each of these entities makes no investments that are subject to withholding of
U.S. federal income tax, special U.S. tax counsel is of the opinion that,
although no transaction closely comparable to that contemplated herein has been
the subject of a Treasury regulation, revenue ruling or judicial decision and
hence the matter cannot be free from doubt, each of the receivables trust, the
MTN issuer and the issuer will not be treated as engaged in a trade or business
within the United States for U.S. federal income tax purposes and that each of
these entities will not be subject to United States federal income tax.
Prospective investors should understand that such determination of whether
a person is engaged in a U.S. trade or business is based on a highly factual
analysis, there is no direct guidance as to which activities constitute being
engaged in a trade or business within the United States, and it is unclear how
a court would construe the
106
<PAGE>
existing indirect authorities. A foreign corporation deemed to be so engaged
would be subject to U.S. federal income tax, as well as the branch profits tax,
on its income which is treated as effectively connected with the conduct of
that trade or business. Such income tax, if imposed, would be based on
effectively connected income computed in a manner generally analogous to that
applied to the income of a domestic corporation, except that a foreign
corporation would be entitled to deductions and credits for a taxable year only
if it files, on a timely basis, an income tax return for that year, which none
of the receivables trust, MTN issuer and issuer intend to do, even as a
protective measure. The maximum U.S. federal income tax rates are currently 35
per cent. for a corporation's effectively connected income and 30 per cent. for
the branch profits tax, resulting in an effective maximum U.S. federal income
tax rate of 54.5 per cent. The branch profits tax is imposed each year on a
corporation's effectively connected earnings and profits, with certain
adjustments, deemed repatriated out of the United States.
United States Holders
There are no regulations, published rulings or judicial decisions
addressing the characterisation for United States federal income tax purposes
of securities with terms substantially the same as the notes. The issuer
intends to treat the offered notes as debt of the issuer for United States
federal income tax purposes. However, no ruling will be obtained from the IRS
on the characterisation of the notes for federal income tax purposes and there
can be no assurance that the IRS or the courts will agree with the conclusions
of the issuer. Furthermore, for the reasons discussed below, special U.S. tax
counsel is unable to render any legal opinion with respect to whether the notes
will be treated as debt for United States federal income tax purposes, and it
is possible that the notes might be viewed as equity interests in the issuer
for such purposes.
In determining whether a security -- such as a note -- represents
indebtedness for United States federal income tax purposes, United States
courts and the IRS have applied a number of factors. The most significant of
these factors are:
* a fixed maturity date;
* the right to receive fixed payments;
* the right of a holder to enforce payment on a default;
* the degree of subordination;
* the intent of the parties;
* the level of capitalisation;
* the extent to which the owner of the assets has transferred the
opportunity for gain if the assets increase in value;
* the risk of loss if the assets decrease in value; and
* the extent to which the investors in the security have obtained the
economic benefits and burdens of ownership of the assets.
Based on these factors, among others, the issuer intends to treat the
notes as debt for United States federal income tax purposes. However, special
U.S. tax counsel has advised the issuer that certain considerations raise the
possibility that the notes might be viewed as equity. First, among those
considerations, the issuer is only nominally capitalized. Second, although a
class of notes subordinated to another more senior class of notes arguably
represents capital with respect to the senior notes, in general the
subordination is effected at the receivables trust level rather than within the
issuer. Third, because the notes by their terms provide for an addition or
deduction from the amount due in the event of a termination of the swap
agreements, it is unclear that their principal amount would be regarded as
fixed.
Based on the absence of relevant legal authority and the adverse impact of
the foregoing considerations on the debt analysis applied by the courts and the
IRS as set forth above, special U.S. tax counsel is unable to render any legal
opinion with regard to the treatment of the class A notes or class B notes as
debt for the United States federal income tax purposes. The issuer nonetheless
believes that, based primarily on the form and credit rating of the class A
notes and class B notes, treatment of such notes as debt is reasonable, and,
except as otherwise stated, the discussion herein assumes that such notes will
constitute debt of the issuer for such purposes. However, were such notes not
treated as debt, they might be viewed as equity interests in the issuer, and in
that case the taxation of income, gain, and loss to a United States holder
could be different from that applicable to a note treated as debt. See "--
Investment in a Passive Foreign Investment Company" below. The issuer suggests
that prospective investors consult their tax advisors regarding the tax
consequences of investing in the notes.
107
<PAGE>
Interest Payments and Distributions
The offered notes may be treated as having been issued with original issue
discount -- "OID" -- for United States federal income tax purposes, in which
case the OID will be taxed as described below. However, in the absence of any
OID on notes, interest on the offered notes will be taxable to a United States
holder as ordinary income at the time it is received or accrued, in accordance
with the holder's regular method of accounting for United States federal income
tax purposes.
The total amount of OID on a note is the excess of its stated redemption
price at maturity over its issue price. The issue price for the offered notes
is the price -- including any accrued interest -- at which a substantial
portion of the relevant notes are first sold to the public. In general, the
stated redemption price at maturity is the sum of all payments made on the note
other than payments of interest that (1) are actually payable at least annually
over the entire life of the note and (2) are based on a single fixed rate or
variable rate -- or certain combinations of fixed and variable rates.
If any of the offered notes are issued at a discount of an amount equal to
or greater than 0.25 per cent. of that note's stated redemption price at
maturity multiplied by the note's weighted average maturity, called its "WAM",
then that note will be deemed to bear OID. The WAM of a note is computed based
on the number of full years each distribution of principal -- or other amount
included in the stated redemption price at maturity -- is scheduled to be
outstanding. Further, the IRS could take the position based on Treasury
regulations that none of the interest payable on an offered note is
unconditionally payable and so that all of that interest should be included in
the note's stated redemption price at maturity. In addition, if on the closing
date there is a differential of more than 25 basis points between the initial
fixed interest rate and the current value of the variable interest rate that
follows, then the IRS may take the position that the note bears OID and the
holder of the note will be required to accrue OID into income as described
below.
A United States holder -- including a cash basis holder -- of an offered
note deemed to bear OID generally would be required to accrue OID on the
relevant note for United States federal income tax purposes on a constant yield
basis. This would require the inclusion of OID in income in advance of the
receipt of cash attributable to that income. Under Section 1272(a)(6) of the
Code, special provisions apply to debt instruments on which payments may be
accelerated due to prepayments of other obligations securing those debt
instruments. However, no regulations have been issued interpreting those
provisions, and the manner in which those provisions would apply to the notes
is unclear.
Sourcing: Interest payments or distributions on a note generally will
constitute foreign source income for United States federal income tax purposes.
Subject to certain limitations, UK withholding tax, if any, imposed on these
payments will generally be treated as foreign tax eligible for credit against a
United States holder's United States federal income tax. For foreign tax credit
purposes, it is expected that interest will generally be treated as passive
income or, in the case of some United States holders, financial services
income.
Disposition or Retirement of Investment
Subject to the discussion of the PFIC rules below, upon the sale, exchange
or retirement of an offered note -- including pursuant to a redemption by the
issuer prior to its maturity date -- the United States holder will recognise
gain or loss equal to the difference between the amount realised and the United
States holder's "adjusted tax basis" in the relevant note. In general, a United
States holder's adjusted tax basis in an OID debt instrument is equal to the
United States holder's cost for such debt instrument, plus any OID accrued and
less the amount of any payments received by the holder that are not "qualified
stated interest" payments under United States Treasury regulations about OID.
A United States holder's adjusted tax basis in a debt instrument with no
OID is generally equal to the holder's cost less the amount of any principal
payments made before the date of disposition. A United States holder's adjusted
tax basis in stock is generally equal to the United States holder's cost for
the stock. In general, any gain or loss realised by the holder will be capital
gain or loss. Under certain circumstances, capital gains derived by individuals
are taxed at preferential rates. The deductibility of capital losses is subject
to limitations.
Sourcing: Gain realised by a United States holder on the sale, exchange or
retirement of a note generally will be treated as a United States source gain.
Under recently issued United States Treasury regulations governing losses
recognised on the sale of personal property, loss from the sale, exchange or
retirement of a note generally will also be treated as a United States source
loss. Exceptions to the application of these regulations' sourcing provisions
include exceptions for certain losses attributable to foreign exchange
fluctuations, accrued but unpaid interest, and foreign offices of U.S.
residents, among others. Some other exceptions to the regulations' general rule
apply to notes treated as equity in the issuer. The issuer suggests that United
States holders consult their own tax advisors about the proper treatment of
losses for foreign tax credit purposes.
108
<PAGE>
Investment in a Passive Foreign Investment Company
Primarily because of the capitalisation of the issuer, special U.S. tax
counsel renders no opinion with respect to whether the notes will be treated as
debt for United States federal income tax purposes, and it is possible that the
notes -- and especially the class C notes and, to a lesser extent, the class B
notes and class A notes -- might be viewed as equity interests -- in other
words stock -- in the issuer. Because of the nature of the income of the
issuer, the issuer could constitute a passive foreign investment company -- or
"PFIC". Accordingly, United States holders of the class A notes and class B
notes may be shareholders in a PFIC and, if any other class of the notes were
not treated as debt but rather were treated as equity of the issuer for United
States federal income tax purposes, direct or indirect United States holders of
these notes could also be considered United States shareholders of a PFIC.
In general, United States holders treated as shareholders of a PFIC
constituted by the issuer will be subject to special tax rules on excess
distributions made to them by the issuer, including a ratable inclusion of
excess distributions in the United States holder's gross income as ordinary
income and requirement for the payment of an interest charge on tax that is
deemed to have been deferred on these excess distributions. Excess
distributions would generally include, (1) some distributions on a United
States shareholder's equity interest in the issuer for a taxable year, if the
total of those amounts exceeds 125 per cent. of the average amount of
distributions from the issuer made during a specified base period, and (2) gain
from the disposition of the equity interest in the issuer. United States
holders generally may avoid these unfavourable consequences if they make either
of two specific elections available under the Code with respect to shares in a
PFIC.
The first such mitigating election is a "qualified electing fund", or
"QEF", election pursuant to Code Section 1295. If a United States holder makes a
QEF election with respect to a class A note or class B note, that United States
holder generally would be required to include its pro rata share of the issuer's
ordinary income and net capital gains in income for each taxable year and pay
tax thereon, even if such income and gain is not distributed to the United
States holder. Further, any losses of the issuer will not be deductible by the
United States holder. If the issuer later distributes the income or gain on
which a United States holder has already paid tax, amounts so distributed will
not be further taxable to the United States holder. A United States holder's tax
basis in its class A notes or class B notes will be increased by the amount so
included and decreased by the amount of nontaxable distributions thereon. In
general, a United States holder making a QEF election will recognize, on a
disposition of its notes, capital gain or loss equal to the difference, if any,
between the amount realized upon such disposition and the tax basis in such
notes. In general, a QEF election would be required to be made on or before the
due date for filing a United States holders' federal income tax return for the
first taxable year for which it holds a note. The QEF election is effective only
if certain required information is made available by the issuer to an investor.
The issuer will, upon request, endeavour to provide the requesting United States
holder with information that the issuer deems reasonably necessary for the
United States holder to make an effective QEF election. Requesting United States
holders should address their requests in writing for this information to the
registered office of the issuer set forth in this prospectus under "Prospectus
Summary: The Issuer". While the issuer does not expect to charge for this
information, by making a request an investor agrees to reimburse the reasonable
costs of the issuer incurred in providing this information, and the issuer will
endeavour to respond to all requests within 30 days of receipt.
A United States holder that holds marketable stock in a PFIC may, in lieu
of making a QEF election, also avoid certain unfavourable consequences of the
PFIC rules by electing to mark the PFIC stock to market as of the close of each
taxable year. A United States holder that makes the mark-to-market election is
required to include in income each year as ordinary income an amount equal to
the excess, if any, of the fair market value of the stock at the close of the
year over the United States holder's adjusted tax basis in the stock. For this
purpose, a United States holder's adjusted basis will generally be the holder's
cost for the stock, increased by the amount previously included in the holder's
income pursuant to this mark-to-market election and decreased by any amount
previously allowed to the United States holder as a deduction pursuant to this
election. If, at the close of the year, the United States holder's adjusted tax
basis exceeds the fair market value of the stock, then the United States holder
may deduct this excess from ordinary income, but only to the extent of net
mark-to-market gains previously included in income. Any gain from the actual
sale of the PFIC stock will be treated as ordinary income, and any loss will be
treated as ordinary loss to the extent of net mark-to-market gains previously
included in income. Stock is considered marketable if it is regularly traded on
an exchange that the IRS determines to be qualified for these purposes. In that
regard, the IRS recently proposed regulations articulating definitions of
regularly traded and qualified exchange under these mark-to-market provisions,
as to which the issuer suggests that prospective investors consult their
advisors. Although the proposed regulations generally take effect only
following their promulgation as final regulations, shareholders in a PFIC also
may elect current application of the proposed regulations. Although the issuer
believes that each class of notes will be listed on a qualified exchange, there
is uncertainty as to whether they will be regularly traded, and hence, there
can be no assurance -- and no representation is made -- that the notes will be
eligible for mark-to-market election.
109
<PAGE>
Although the issuer expects the QEF election to be available to an investor
to mitigate the effect of the PFIC provisions, United States holders should be
aware of the potentially adverse tax consequences arising under the PFIC
provisions discussed above should neither of the two elections be effectively
made. First, all or a portion of both distributions and gains on notes generally
would be taxable to holders as ordinary income, and would be taxable at the
highest marginal rates applicable to current and prior years during the holding
period. Further, all or a portion of the distributions and gains could be
subject to the additional "interest charge" tax. Such interest charge tax --
computed in the manner described above on "excess distributions" and gains --
generally is intended to eliminate the value of any tax deferral arising from an
investment in notes. Although the issuer does not expect there to be any
significant deferral of tax arising from an investment in notes and consequently
does not expect that the interest charge tax computation would normally produce
a substantial additional tax liability, in some circumstances, it could do so.
For example, the interest charge computation could produce an interest charge
tax with respect to a floating rate note if the floating rate on the note
increased substantially over an investor's holding period. Alternatively, the
computation could produce such a tax with respect to a fixed rate note if that
note was sold by a United States holder at a substantial gain due to
fluctuations in the general level of interest rates. No assurance is possible
that such circumstances, or others, will not occur.
Certain additional adverse consequences can flow to indirect investors in
a PFIC. More specifically, the ownership of the notes by a non-United States
holder may be attributed to a United States holder notwithstanding that such
United States holder holds no note and receives no cash in respect of a note.
Code Section 1298(a) generally treats notes held directly or indirectly by a
foreign partnership, corporation, trust or estate as owned by such entity's
partners, shareholders or beneficiaries, as applicable; it also may treat any
of various option arrangements as conferring ownership of notes on United
States holders. Hence, a United States holder treated as owning notes held by a
non-United States holder generally would be subject to tax on indirect gains
and distributions attributable to the notes in the manner described above.
Finally, an investor who pledges shares in a PFIC as security for a loan
should be aware that such a pledge is treated as a disposition of the related
shares, and any gain would be subject to the rules applicable to distributions
and gains with respect to shares in a PFIC described above.
Sourcing: For sourcing of payments for a note treated as stock in the
issuer and gain or loss on sale of an interest in this stock, see " -- Interest
Payments and Distributions -- Sourcing" and "-- Disposition or Retirement of
Investment -- Sourcing" above.
Controlled Foreign Corporation Status
It is possible that the issuer might be treated as a controlled foreign
corporation for United States federal income tax purposes. In this event,
United States holders of equity interests that are treated as owning 10 per
cent. or more of the combined voting power of the issuer would be required to
include in income their pro rata share of the earnings and profits of the
issuer, and generally would not be subject to the rules described above about
PFICs. The issuer suggests that prospective investors consult with their tax
advisors concerning the potential effect of the controlled foreign corporation
provisions.
Non-United States Holders
An investment in the notes by non-United States holders generally will not
give rise to any United States federal income tax to these holders, unless the
income received on, or any gain recognised on the sale or other disposition of
their notes is:
* treated as effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or
business in the United States; or
* in the case of gain recognised by an individual, the individual is
present in the United States for 183 days or more and has a tax home
-- as defined in the Code -- in the United States during the taxable
year.
Backup Withholding and Information Reporting
Information reporting to the IRS generally will be required for
distributions or payments of principal or interest -- including any OID -- on
the notes and on proceeds of the sale of the notes within the United States to
United States holders other than corporations and certain other exempt
recipients. A 31 per cent. backup withholding tax will apply to those payments
if the United States holder fails to provide certain identifying information --
for example, the holder's taxpayer identification number -- or the holder is
notified by the IRS that it has failed to report all interest and dividends
required to be shown on its United States federal income tax returns. Non-
United States holders may be required to comply with applicable certification
procedures to establish that they are not United States holders in order to
avoid the application of these information reporting requirements and backup
withholding.
110
<PAGE>
The United States Treasury recently released regulations that will revise
the procedures for backup withholding and information reporting described above
for payments on the notes and payments of proceeds of the sale of the notes
made after 31st December, 2000. The issuer suggests that prospective investors
consult with their tax advisers concerning the potential effect of these
regulations on their ownership of the notes.
ERISA Considerations
The U.S. Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended --
called "ERISA"-, and Section 4975 of the Code impose requirements on employee
benefit plans and some other plans and arrangements, including individual
retirement accounts and annuities, Keogh plans and certain collective
investment funds or insurance company general or separate accounts in which
these plans, accounts or arrangements are invested, that are subject to the
fiduciary responsibility provisions of ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code. We
call these entities "Plans". ERISA also imposes requirements on persons who are
fiduciaries of Plans for the investment of "plan assets" of any Plan -- called
"Plan Assets". ERISA generally imposes on Plan fiduciaries certain general
fiduciary requirements, including those of investment prudence and
diversification and the requirement that a Plan's investments be made in
accordance with the documents governing the Plan.
General
ERISA and Section 4975 of the Code prohibit a broad range of transactions
involving Plan Assets and persons -- called "Parties in Interest" -- who have
specified relationships to a Plan or its Plan Assets, unless an exemption is
available or an exception applies under U.S. Department of Labor -- called
"DOL" -- Regulation Section 2510.3-101 -- called the "Plan Asset Regulation".
Parties in Interest that participate in a prohibited transaction may be subject
to a penalty imposed under ERISA or an excise tax imposed under Section 4975 of
the Code, unless an exemption is available or an exception applies under the
Plan Asset Regulation. The details of these prohibited transactions are
contained in Section 406 of ERISA and Section 4975 of the Code.
Subject to the considerations described below, you may purchase only the
class A notes with Plan Assets of any Plan.
The class B notes may not be acquired by or on behalf of any Plan or any
entity acting on behalf of or with Plan Assets. You will be deemed to have
represented by your purchase and holding of a class B note that no part of the
funds being used to pay the purchase price for that class B note constitutes
Plan Assets of any Plan or will constitute Plan Assets while you hold a class B
note.
The Plan Asset Regulation treats the assets of an entity in which a Plan
holds an equity interest as Plan Assets of such Plan. If the class A notes are
treated as equity interests and you use Plan Assets to purchase the class A
notes, the assets of the issuer and the receivables trust would be treated as
Plan Assets of the investing Plan unless an exception applies -- see "-- Equity
Treatment" below. Among other things, this would subject the issuer and the
receivables trust's assets to the fiduciary rules of ERISA and the prohibited
transaction rules of ERISA and Section 4975 of the Code and could result in
penalties and/or excise taxes under those rules. The term "equity interest" is
defined under the Plan Asset Regulation as any interest in an entity other than
an instrument which is treated as indebtedness under applicable local law and
has no substantial equity features. It is not certain whether the class A notes
are properly classified as debt or equity interests under the Plan Asset
Regulation.
If you are considering whether to purchase class A notes with Plan Assets
of any Plan, you should determine whether the purchase would result in a non-
exempt prohibited transaction under ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code because
any of Barclays Bank PLC, the issuer, the servicer, the receivables trustee or
any other party may be a Party in Interest as to the investing Plan and may be
deemed to be benefiting from the issuance of class A notes. If Barclays Bank
PLC, the issuer or the servicer is a Party in Interest as to Plan Assets you
are investing, the issuer suggests that you consult with your counsel about the
availability of exemptive relief under one or more "DOL Prohibited Transaction
Class Exemptions" -- called "PTCEs".
You should be aware, however, that even if you meet the conditions specified in
one or more exemptions, the scope of the exemptive relief provided by the
exemption might not cover all acts that might be construed as prohibited
transactions.
Equity Treatment
If the class A notes are treated as equity (rather than debt) interests
under the Plan Asset Regulation despite the agreement of the issuer and the
note holders to treat the class A notes as debt instruments, the assets of the
issuer would be treated as Plan Assets of the investing Plans for purposes of
ERISA and Section
111
<PAGE>
4975 of the Code and result in non-exempt prohibited transactions unless one of
the following exceptions applies.
The first exception applies to interests that qualify as "publicly-offered
securities" under the Plan Asset Regulation. A publicly-offered security is a
security that is:
* freely transferable;
* part of a class of securities that is owned, immediately subsequent to
the initial offering, by 100 or more investors who are independent of the
Issuer and of one another -- called "Independent Investors"; and
* either is:
(i) part of a class of securities registered under Section 12(b) or 12(g)
of the Exchange Act, or
(ii) sold to the Plan as part of an offering of securities to the public
pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act and
the class of securities of which such security is a part is registered under
the Exchange Act within 120 days (or such later time as may be allowed by the
SEC) after the end of the fiscal year of the Issuer during which the offering
of such securities to the public occurred.
For purposes of the 100 Independent Investor condition, each class of
notes should be deemed to be a "class" of securities that would be tested
separately from any other securities that may be issued by the Issuer.
It is anticipated that each of the class A notes will meet the criteria
for treatment as "publicly-offered securities" as described above. No
restrictions will be imposed on the transfer of the class A notes. It is
expected that class A notes will be held by at least 100 Independent Investors
at the conclusion of the offering made by this prospectus. However, no
assurance can be given, and no monitoring or other measures will be taken to
ensure, that the 100 Independent Investor condition is satisfied. The class A
notes will be sold as part of an offering pursuant to an effective registration
statement under the Securities Act and then will be timely registered under the
Exchange Act.
A second exception applies if equity participation in an equity by Plans,
other employee benefit plans not subject to ERISA -- such as governmental or
foreign plans -- and as entities holding assets deemed to be Plan Assets --
called "Benefit Plan Investors" -- is not "significant." Benefit Plan
Investors' equity participation in the Issuer would not be significant on any
if, immediately after the most recent acquisition of any equity interest in the
Issuer, less than 25 per cent. of the value of each class of equity interests
in the Issuer -- excluding interests held by the Barclays Bank PLC, the Issuer,
the servicer, the receivables trustee or any of their affiliates -- is held by
Benefit Plan Investors. No assurance can be given as to whether the value of
each class of equity interests in the notes held by Benefit Plan Investors will
be "significant" upon completion of the offering of any notes or other
securities by the issuer or thereafter, and no monitoring or other measures
will be taken to determine whether the conditions to this exception are
satisfied.
Further Considerations
In light of the above discussion, if you are considering the purchase of
class A notes with Plan Assets of any Plan, you should consult your own counsel
regarding whether the assets of the Issuer represented by the class A notes
would be considered Plan Assets, the consequences that would apply if the
Issuer's assets were considered Plan Assets, the availability of exemptive
relief from the prohibited transaction rules under a PTCE --- whether or not
the issuer's assets are considered Plan Assets ---, and the applicability of an
exception under the Plan Asset Regulation. In any case you should also consider
the fiduciary standards under ERISA or other applicable law in the context of
the Plan's particular circumstances before authorizing an investment of Plan
Assets in the class A notes. Among other factors, you should consider whether
the investment (1) satisfies the diversification requirement of ERISA or other
applicable law, (2) is consistent with the Plan's governing instruments, and
(3) is prudent in light of the "Risk Factors" and other factors discussed in
this prospectus.
You must not purchase the class A notes with your Plan Assets of any Plan,
if any of the issuer, Barclays Bank PLC, the servicer, the receivables trustee
or any of their affiliates (1) has investment or administrative discretion for
those Plan Asset; (2) has authority or responsibility to give, or regularly
gives, investment advice for those Plan Assets, for a fee and under an
agreement or understanding that the advice will serve as a primary basis for
investment decisions for the Plan Assets, and will be based on the particular
investment needs of the Plan; or (3) unless PTCE 95-60, 91-38 or 90-1 is
applicable, is an employer maintaining or contributing to the Plan. You will be
deemed to have represented by your purchase and holding of a class A note that
you are not subject to this limitation.
Some employee benefit plans, such as governmental plans -- as defined in
Section 3(32) of ERISA -- and some church plans -- as defined in Section 3(33)
of ERISA -- are not subject to the requirements of ERISA or Section 4975 of the
Code. Accordingly, assets of these plans may be invested in the notes without
regard to the ERISA considerations described in this prospectus, but subject to
the provisions of other applicable federal, state and foreign law. However, any
of these plans that are qualified and exempt from taxation under Sections
401(a) and 501(a) of the Code may be subject to the prohibited transaction
rules set forth in Section 503 of the Code.
112
<PAGE>
Enforcement of Foreign Judgements in England and Wales
The issuer is incorporated with limited liability in England and Wales
under the Companies Act 1985. Any final and conclusive judgement of either a
New York state or United States Federal court that has jurisdiction recognised
by England and Wales regarding obligations of the issuer for the offered notes,
which is for a debt or a fixed sum of money and which has not been stayed or
fully satisfied, can be enforced by action against the issuer in the courts of
England and Wales without re-examining the merits of the issues determined by
the proceedings unless:
* the proceedings in New York state or the United States Federal court
involved a denial of the principles of natural justice;
* the judgement goes against to the public policy of England and Wales;
* the judgement was obtained by fraud, duress or was based on a clear
mistake of fact;
* the judgement is a penal or revenue judgement; or
* there has been an earlier judgement in another court between the same
parties on the same issues as are dealt within the judgement to be
enforced.
A judgement by a court may be sometimes given in pounds sterling. The
issuer expressly submits to the jurisdiction of New York state and the United
States Federal courts sitting in the Borough of Manhattan in the City of New
York for the purpose of any suit, action or proceedings arising out of this
offering. The following parties have been appointed to receive legal documents
for the issuer and the transferor, servicer and trust cash manager.
* for the issuer:
CT Corporation Systems
1633 Broadway
New York, NY 10019
00 1800 624 0909
* for the transferor, servicer and trust cash manager:
Patricia Ryan Guarino
Barclays Bank PLC
222 Broadway
New York, New York 20038
(212)-412-1383
Most of the directors and executive officers of the issuer and some of the
experts named in this document live outside the United States. Most of their
assets are located outside the United States. Because of this, the holders of
the offered notes may not be able to serve notice of legal action on them or to
enforce judgements against them. The issuer has been advised by its English
counsel, Clifford Chance, that because of this, they may not be able to enforce
in England and Wales, in original actions or in actions for enforcement of
judgements of United States courts, civil liabilities based on the Federal
securities laws of the United States.
Underwriting
The issuer has agreed to sell and Barclays Bank PLC and the underwriters
for the class A notes listed below have agreed to purchase the principal amount
of the class A notes listed in the table below. The issuer has agreed to sell
and Barclays Bank PLC have agreed to purchase the entire principal amount of the
class B notes. The terms of these purchases are governed by an underwriting
agreement between the issuer and Barclays Bank PLC for itself and as
representative for all of the underwriters.
Underwriters of the Class A Notes Principal Amount of the
Class A Notes
Barclays Bank PLC $810,000,000
Credit Suisse First Boston Corporation $22,500,000
Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. $22,500,000
Morgan Stanley & Co. International Limited $22,500,000
Salomon Smith Barney Inc. $22,500,000
------------
Total $900,000,000
============
Underwriter of the Class B Notes Principal Amount of the
Class B Notes
Barclays Bank PLC $50,000,000
113
<PAGE>
The price to the public and underwriting discounts and commissions as a
percentage of the principal balance of the class A notes will be 100.00 per
cent. and 0.20 per cent., respectively.
The underwriters have agreed to purchase all of the offered notes if any
of them are purchased.
Barclays Bank PLC, as representative of the underwriters of the class A
notes, has advised the issuer that the underwriters propose initially to offer
the class A notes to the public at the public offering price stated on the
cover page of this prospectus, and to some dealers at that price, less a
concession up to 0.100 per cent. for each class A note. The underwriters may
allow, and those dealers may reallow, concessions up to 0.075 per cent. of the
principal balance of the class A notes to some brokers and dealers.
The price to the public and underwriting discounts and commissions as a
percentage of the principal balance of the class B notes will be 100.00 per
cent. and 0.25 per cent., respectively.
Barclays Bank PLC have advised the issuer that they propose initially to
offer the class B notes to the public at the public offering price stated on
the cover page of this prospectus, and to some dealers at that price, less a
concession up to 0.150 per cent. for each class B note. Barclays Bank PLC may
allow, and those dealers may reallow, concessions up to 0.100 per cent. of the
principal balance of the class B notes to some brokers and dealers.
Additional offering expenses are estimated to be $2,515,975.
The issuer and Barclays Bank PLC will indemnify the underwriters against
liabilities -- including liabilities under the United States Securities Act --
caused by (1) any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of a material
fact contained in this prospectus or the related registration statement or (2)
any omission or alleged omission to state a material fact required to be stated
in this prospectus or the related registration statement or necessary to make
the statements in this prospectus or the related registration statement not
misleading. The issuer and Barclays Bank PLC will not, however, indemnify the
underwriters against liabilities caused by any untrue statement or omission,
real or alleged, made in reliance upon and in conformity with information
relating to and provided by any underwriter for use in this prospectus and the
related registration statement.
The underwriters may engage in over-allotment transactions, stablising
transactions, syndicate covering transactions and penalty bids for the offered
notes under Regulation M under the United States Exchange Act.
* Over-allotment transactions involve syndicate sales in excess of the
offering size, which creates a syndicate short position.
* Stablising transactions permit bids to purchase the offered notes so
long as the stablising bids do not exceed a specified maximum.
* Syndicate covering transactions involve purchases of the offered notes
in the open market after the distribution has been completed in order
to cover syndicate short positions.
* Penalty bids permit the underwriters to reclaim a selling concession
from a syndicate member when the offered notes originally sold by that
syndicate member are purchased in a syndicate covering transaction.
These transactions may cause the prices of the offered notes to be higher
than they would otherwise be in the absence of those transactions. Neither the
issuer nor any of the underwriters represent that the underwriters will engage
in any of those transactions or that those transactions, once begun, will not
be discontinued without notice at any time.
The offered notes will be registered under the Securities Act. Barclays
Bank PLC and Morgan Stanley & Co. International Limited have agreed that they
will sell the offered notes within the United States through their U.S.
registered broker dealers.
United Kingdom
Each underwriter will represent and agree that:
* it has not offered or sold, and, before the expiry of six months from
the closing date, will not offer or sell, any offered notes to persons
in the United Kingdom, except to persons whose ordinary activities
involve them in acquiring, holding, managing or disposing of
investments (as principal or agent) for purposes of their business, or
otherwise in circumstances which have not resulted and will not result
in an offer to the public in the United Kingdom within the meaning of
the Public Offers of Securities Regulations 1995;
114
<PAGE>
* it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the
Financial Services Act 1986 with respect to anything done by it in
relation to the offered notes in, from or otherwise involving the
United Kingdom;
* if it is an authorised person under Chapter III of part I of the
Financial Services Act 1986, it has only promoted and will only
promote (as that term is defined in Regulation 1.02(2) of the
Financial Services (Promotion of Unregulated Schemes) Regulations
1991) to any person in the United Kingdom the scheme described in this
prospectus if that person is of a kind described either in Section
76(2) of the Financial Services Act 1986 or in Regulation 1.04 of the
Financial Services (Promotion of Unregulated Schemes) Regulations
1991; and
* it is a person of a kind described in Article 11(3) of the Financial
Services Act 1986 (Investment Advertisements) (Exemptions) Order 1996
(as amended) or is a person to whom the document may otherwise
lawfully be issued or passed on.
General
The underwriters have represented and agreed that they have complied and
will comply with all applicable laws and regulations in force in any
jurisdiction in which they purchase, offer, sell or deliver offered notes or
possess them or distribute the propectus and will obtain any consent, approval
or permission required by them for the purchase, offer, sale or delivery by them
of offered notes under the laws and regulations in force in any jurisdiction to
which they are subject or in which they make such purchases, offers, sales or
deliveries and the issuer shall have no responsibility for them. Furthermore,
they will not directly or indirectly offer, sell or deliver any offered notes or
distribute or publish any prospectus, form of application, offering circular,
advertisement or other offering material except under circumstances that will,
to the best of its knowledge and belief, result in compliance with any
applicable laws and regulations, and all offers, sales and deliveries of offered
notes by it will be made on the same terms.
The underwriters have agreed that no invitation may be made to the public
in Jersey to subscribe for the offered notes.
Neither the issuer nor the underwriters represent that offered notes may
at any time lawfully be sold in compliance with any application registration or
other requirements in any jurisdiction, or pursuant to any exemption available
thereunder, or assume any responsibility for facilitating such sale.
With regard to each issue of offered notes, the underwriters will be
required to comply with such other additional or modified restrictions (if any)
as the issuer and the underwriters shall agree.
The underwriters will, unless prohibited by applicable law, furnish to
each person to whom they offer or sell offered notes a copy of the prospectus as
then amended or supplemented or, unless delivery of the prospectus is required
by applicable law, inform each such person that a copy will be made available
upon request. The underwriters are not authorised to give any information or to
make any representation not contained in the prospectus in connection with the
offer and sale of offered notes to which the prospectus relates.
This prospectus may be used by Barclays Bank PLC -- the transferor,
servicer and trust cash manager -- for offers and sales related to market-
making transactions in the offered notes. Barclays Bank PLC may act as
principal or agent in these transactions. These sales will be made at prices
relating to prevailing market prices at the time of sale. Barclays Bank PLC has
no obligation to make a market in the offered notes, and any market-making may
be discontinued at any time without notice. Barclays Bank PLC is among the
underwriters participating in the initial distribution of the offered notes.
Barclays Bank PLC will be the initial transferor, the servicer, the cash
manager for the receivables trust and the medium term notes, the transferor
beneficiary and excess interest beneficiary, the swap counterparty and the
lender under the expenses loan agreement.
Ratings of the Offered Notes
It is a condition to issuing the class A notes that they be rated in the
highest rating category by four nationally recognised rating agencies.
It is a condition to issuing the class B notes that they be rated at least
"A" by four nationally recognised rating agencies.
Any rating of your notes by a rating agency will indicate:
115
<PAGE>
* its view on the likelihood that you will receive interest payments and
principal payments by the series 99-1 termination date; and
* its evaluation of the receivables and the availability of the credit
enhancement for your notes.
What a rating will not indicate is:
* the likelihood that principal payments will be paid on a scheduled
redemption date before the series 99-1 termination date;
* the likelihood that a Pay Out Event will occur;
* the likelihood that a withholding tax will be imposed on noteholders;
* the marketability of your notes;
* the market price of your notes; or
* whether your notes are an appropriate investment for you.
A rating will not be a recommendation to buy, sell or hold the notes. A
rating may be lowered or withdrawn at any time.
The issuer will request a rating of the offered notes from four nationally
recognized rating agencies. Rating agencies other than those requested could
assign a rating to the offered notes, and its rating could be lower than any
rating assigned by a rating agency chosen by the issuer.
Experts
The balance sheet of the issuer and the MTN issuer as of 30 September,
1999, are included in this prospectus in reliance on the reports of
PricewaterhouseCoopers, independent accountants, given on the authority of the
said firm as experts in auditing and accounting.
116
<PAGE>
Legal Matters
Matters of UK law relating to the validity of the issuance of the notes
will be passed upon for the issuer by Clifford Chance, London, England. Legal
matters will be passed upon for the underwriters by Orrick, Herrington &
Sutcliffe, London, England who will also act as counsel to the issuer as to
U.S. tax matters.
Reports to Noteholders
The servicer will prepare monthly and annual reports that will contain
information about the offered notes. The financial information contained in the
reports will not be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting
principles. Unless and until definitive notes are issued, the reports will be
sent to the depository, the holder of the offered notes. No reports will be
sent to you.
Where You Can Find More Information
We filed a registration statement for the offered notes with the SEC. This
prospectus is part of the registration statement, but the registration
statement includes additional information.
The servicer will file with the SEC all required annual, monthly and
special SEC reports and other information about the offered notes.
You may read and copy any reports, statements or other information we file
at the SEC's public reference room in Washington, D.C. You can request copies
of these documents, upon payment of a duplicating fee, by writing to the SEC.
Please call the SEC at (800) SEC-0330 for further information on the operation
of the public reference rooms. Our SEC filings also are available to the public
on the SEC internet site (http://www.sec.gov).
Listing And General Information
We have made an application to the London Stock Exchange Limited to admit
the offered notes to the Official List. Listing particulars with regard to the
issuer and the offered notes in accordance with the listing rules made under
Part IV of the Financial Services Act, have been delivered to the Registrar of
Companies in England and Wales for registration in accordance with Section 149
of the Financial Services Act.
The listing of the offered notes on the London Stock Exchange is expected
to be granted before the closing date subject only to the issue of the offered
notes in global bearer form. The listing of the offered notes will not become
effective if any of the offered notes in global bearer form are not issued.
Before official listing, however, dealings in the offered notes will be
permitted by the London Stock Exchange in accordance with its rules.
Litigation and Change in Circumstances
Other than as described in the section "The Issuer" there have been no
material adverse changes in the financial position of the issuer nor has the
issuer been involved in, or expects, any litigation which has had or may have a
significant effect on its financial position, for the twelve months preceding
the date of this prospectus.
Other than as described in the section "The MTN Issuer" there have been no
material adverse changes in the financial position of the MTN issuer nor has
the MTN issuer been involved in, or expects, any litigation which has had or
may have a significant effect on its financial position, for the twelve months
preceding the date of this prospectus.
117
<PAGE>
Documents Available for Inspection
You may inspect drafts of the following documents at the offices of
Clifford Chance, 200 Aldersgate Street, London EC1A 4JJ during usual business
hours on any weekday, apart from Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays, during
the period of 21 days from the date of this prospectus:
* master definition schedule;
* receivables securitisation agreement;
* declaration of trust and trust cash management agreement;
* series 99-1 supplement to declaration of trust and trust cash
management agreement;
* beneficiaries servicing agreement;
* trust section 75 indemnity;
* security trust and cash management deed;
* series 99-1 supplement to security trust and cash management deed;
* MTN paying agency and agent bank agreement;
* expenses loan agreement;
* class A swap agreement;
* class B swap agreement;
* class C swap agreement
* corporate services agreement;
* underwriting agreement
* MTN dealership agreement;
* depository agreement;
* paying agency and agent bank agreement;
* trust deed;
* deed of charge;
* post maturity call option;
* form of class A global note;
* form of class B global note;
* memorandum and articles of association of the issuer;
* accountant's report on the issuer;
* memorandum and articles of association of the MTN issuer;
* accountant's report on the MTN issuer;
* memorandum and articles of association of the receivables trustee; and
* accountant's report on the receivables trustee.
118
<PAGE>
ISSUER
Gracechurch Card Funding (No.1) PLC
200 Aldersgate Street
London EC1A 4JJ
INITIAL TRANSFEROR RECEIVABLES TRUSTEE
INITIAL SERVICER AND INITIAL CASH Gracechurch Receivables Trustee Ltd
MANAGER Normandy House, Grenville Street
Barclays Bank PLC St. Helier, Jersey JE2 4UF
1234 Pavilion Drive
Northampton NN4 7SG
NOTE TRUSTEE AND SECURITY TRUSTEE
The Bank of New York, London Branch
One Canada Square
London E14 5AL
PRINCIPAL PAYING AGENT OTHER PAYING AGENTS
The Bank of New York, London Branch The Bank of New York Company, Inc.
One Canada Square One Wall Street
London E14 5AL New York, New York 10286
LEGAL ADVISERS
To the Issuer, the MTN Issuer, To the Note Trustee, Security
the Receivables Trustee and Barclays Trustee and to the Lead Manager
as to English law and United States law as to United States law
Clifford Chance Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe
200 Aldersgate Street 1 Threadneedle Street
London EC1A 4JJ London EC2R 8AW
To the Lead Manager as to To the Receivables Trustee as to
English law Jersey law
Linklaters & Alliance Bedell & Cristin
One Silk Street One The Forum, Grenville Street
London EC2Y 8HQ St. Helier, Jersey JE4 8PP
AUDITORS
To the Issuer To the Receivables Trustee
PricewaterhouseCoopers PricewaterhouseCoopers
Southwark Towers Twenty Two Colomberie
32 London Bridge Street St Helier,
London SE1 9SY Jersey JE1 4XA
LISTING AGENT
Barclays Bank PLC
5 The North Colonnade
Canary Wharf
London E14 4BB
119
<PAGE>
Index of Terms for Prospectus
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Acquired Interchange................................................ 34
addition date....................................................... 31
additional accounts................................................. 31
adjusted amount..................................................... 90
Adjusted Investor Interest.......................................... 52
adjusted tax basis.................................................. 108
Aggregate Investor Indemnity Amount................................. 72
Available Investor Principal Collections............................ 65
Average Principal Receivables....................................... 77
bank portfolio...................................................... 28
Barclaycard Operating Account....................................... 45
Barclaycard Proceeds Account........................................ 46
Basic Terms Modifications........................................... 93
Benefit Plan Investors.............................................. 111
business day........................................................ 32
Calculation Period.................................................. 60
cancelled account................................................... 33
Class A............................................................. 56
Class A Additional Finance Amount................................... 60
Class A Adjusted Investor Interest.................................. 57
Class A Available Funds............................................. 60
class A cash management fee......................................... 53
Class A Covered Amount.............................................. 73
Class A Debt Amount................................................. 60
Class A Deficiency Amount........................................... 59
Class A Distribution Ledger......................................... 60
Class A Excess Spread............................................... 60
Class A Fixed Allocation............................................ 65
Class A Floating Allocation......................................... 57
Class A Investor Interest........................................... 57
Class A Initial Investor Interest................................... 56
Class A Investor Charge-Off......................................... 57
Class A Investor Default Amount..................................... 70
Class A Monthly Distribution Amount................................. 60
Class A Monthly Finance Amount...................................... 59
Class A Monthly Principal Amount.................................... 66
Class A Monthly Required Expense Amount............................. 59
Class A Required Amount............................................. 71
class A servicing fee............................................... 53
Class A Trustee Payment Amount...................................... 74
Class B............................................................. 56
Class B Additional Finance Amount................................... 61
Class B Adjusted Investor Interest.................................. 57
Class B Available Funds............................................. 61
class B cash management fee......................................... 53
Class B Debt Amount................................................. 61
Class B Deficiency Amount........................................... 61
Class B Distribution Ledger......................................... 61
Class B Excess Spread............................................... 61
Class B Fixed Allocation............................................ 65
Class B Floating Allocation......................................... 57
Class B Initial Investor Interest................................... 56
Class B Investor Charge-Off......................................... 58
Class B Investor Default Amount..................................... 70
Class B Investor Interest........................................... 57
Class B Monthly Distribution Amount................................. 61
Class B Monthly Finance Amount...................................... 61
Class B Monthly Principal Amount.................................... 66
Class B Monthly Required Expense Amount............................. 61
Class B Principal Commencement Date................................. 66
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Class B Required Amount............................................. 71
class B servicing fee............................................... 53
Class B Trustee Payment Amount...................................... 74
Class C............................................................. 56
Class C Additional Finance Amount................................... 62
Class C Adjusted Investor Interest.................................. 58
Class C Available Funds............................................. 62
class C cash management fee......................................... 53
Class C Debt Amount................................................. 62
Class C Deficiency Amount........................................... 62
Class C Distribution Ledger......................................... 62
Class C Excess Spread............................................... 62
Class C Fixed Allocation............................................ 65
Class C Floating Allocation......................................... 57
Class C Initial Investor Interest................................... 56
Class C Investor Charge-Off......................................... 58
Class C Investor Default Amount..................................... 70
Class C Investor Interest........................................... 58
Class C Monthly Distribution Amount................................. 72
Class C Monthly Finance Amount...................................... 62
Class C Monthly Principal Amount.................................... 67
Class C Monthly Required Expense Amount............................. 62
Class C Principal Commencement Date................................. 66
class C servicing fee............................................... 53
Class C Trustee Payment Amount...................................... 74
closing date........................................................ 20
Code................................................................ 106
Companion Series.................................................... 77
Controlled Accumulation Period...................................... 63
Controlled Accumulation Period Length............................... 68
Controlled Deposit Amount........................................... 63
collecting agent.................................................... 103
Daily Investor Principal Collections................................ 65
default amount...................................................... 70
defaulted account................................................... 33
designated accounts................................................. 44
Discount Option Receivables......................................... 33
Discount Percentage................................................. 33
distribution date................................................... 60
DOL................................................................. 111
DTC................................................................. 80
early swap termination event........................................ 96
eligible account.................................................... 35
eligible receivable................................................. 36
Eligible Receivables Pool........................................... 44
eligible servicer................................................... 54
eligible trust cash manager......................................... 56
enforcement notice.................................................. 92
equity interest..................................................... 111
ERISA............................................................... 111
Excess Interest..................................................... 44
excess distributions................................................ 110
Excess Spread....................................................... 71
Expenses Loan Agreement............................................. 21
Expense Rate........................................................ 76
event of default.................................................... 90
Finance Charge Collections Ledger................................... 47
finance charge receivables.......................................... 32
Fixed Investor Percentage........................................... 64
Floating Investor Percentage........................................ 59
</TABLE>
120
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Independent Investors............................................... 112
ineligible receivables.............................................. 37
Initial Investor Interest........................................... 57
Insolvency Events................................................... 48
interchange......................................................... 34
interest charge..................................................... 110
interest payment date............................................... 60
interest period..................................................... 86
Investor Cash Available for Acquisition............................. 47
investor certificates............................................... 21
Investor Default Amount............................................. 69
Investor Indemnity Amount........................................... 72
investor interest................................................... 44
Investor Percentage................................................. 46
Investor Principal Collections...................................... 65
investor servicing fee.............................................. 52
Investor Trustee Payment............................................ 74
investor trust cash management fee.................................. 52
issuer related documents............................................ 86
Maximum Addition Amount............................................. 31
Minimum Aggregate Principal Receivables............................. 77
Minimum Transferor Interest......................................... 77
MTN Issuer Costs Amount............................................ 60
MTN cash manager.................................................... 98
MTN enforcement notice.............................................. 100
notice of assignment................................................ 36
Notional Party A.................................................... 89
Notional Party B.................................................... 89
Notional Swap....................................................... 89
Notional Swap Termination Amount.................................... 89
OID................................................................. 108
Parties in Interest................................................. 111
Pay Out Event....................................................... 48
paying agent........................................................ 80
permitted additional jurisdiction................................... 36
permitted investments............................................... 45
PFIC................................................................ 109
Plan Asset Regulation............................................... 111
Plan Assets......................................................... 111
Plans............................................................... 111
pool selection date................................................. 31
Portfolio Yield..................................................... 76
post maturity all option............................................ 90
pounds.............................................................. 19
pounds sterling..................................................... 19
Principal Collections Ledger........................................ 46
Principal Funding Account........................................... 63
Principal Funding Investment Proceeds............................... 73
principal paying agent.............................................. 80
Principal Shortfalls................................................ 69
PTCE................................................................ 111
publicly offered securities......................................... 112
QEF................................................................. 109
quotation date...................................................... 87
quoted Eurobonds.................................................... 102
</TABLE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
Page
<S> <C>
Rapid Amortisation Period........................................... 64
Reallocated Class B Principal Collections........................... 71
Reallocated Class C Principal Collections........................... 71
redesignated accounts............................................... 33
Reinvested Investor Principal Collections........................... 65
relevant documents.................................................. 23
Regulated Amortisation Period....................................... 63
Regulated Amortisation Trigger Event................................ 63
reference banks..................................................... 87
related beneficiary debt............................................ 43
Required Reserve Amount............................................. 73
Reserve Account..................................................... 73
Reserve Account Funding Date........................................ 73
restricted additional jurisdiction.................................. 36
restricted eligible receivables..................................... 36
Revolving Period.................................................... 62
securitised portfolio............................................... 28
Series 99-1 Distribution Account.................................... 60
Series 99-1 Extra Amount............................................ 72
Series 99-1 Issuer Account.......................................... 77
Series 99-1 Pay-Out Events.......................................... 75
series 99-1 scheduled redemption date............................... 63
Series 99-1 Supplement.............................................. 56
series 99-1 termination date........................................ 64
servicer default.................................................... 53
servicing fee....................................................... 52
Shared Principal Collections........................................ 69
special U.S. tax counsel............................................ 106
successor cash manager.............................................. 54
successor servicer.................................................. 53
swap agreements..................................................... 94
termination payment................................................. 96
transferor acquisition.............................................. 42
transferor certificate.............................................. 42
Transferor Ineligible Interest...................................... 46
Transferor Cash Available for Acquisition........................... 47
Transferor Interest................................................. 44
Transferor Percentage............................................... 45
Transferor Section 75 Liability..................................... 72
transferor servicing fee............................................ 52
transferor trust cash management fee................................ 52
Trust Accounts...................................................... 45
trust cash manager default.......................................... 54
trust cash management fee........................................... 52
Trust Pay Out Events................................................ 48
Trustee Acquisition Account......................................... 45
Trustee Collection Account.......................................... 45
Trustee Payment Amount.............................................. 50
United States holder................................................ 106
United States person................................................ 106
Unavailable Principal Collections................................... 69
WAM................................................................. 108
zero balance account................................................ 33
</TABLE>
121
<PAGE>
Index of Appendices
The appendices are an integral part of this prospectus.
Page
A Report of Independent Accountants for Gracechurch Card
Funding (No.1) PLC........................................ A-1
B Balance Sheet of Gracechurch Card Funding (No.1) PLC....... B-1
C Notes to Financial Statement............................... C-1
D Report of Independent Accountants for Barclaycard Funding
PLC...................................................... D-1
E Balance Sheet of Barclaycard Funding PLC.................. E-1
F Notes to Financial Statement.............................. F-1
122
<PAGE>
Gracechurch Card Funding (No.1) PLC
BALANCE SHEET
AS OF 30 SEPTEMBER, 1999
TOGETHER WITH AUDITORS' REPORT
<PAGE>
Appendix A
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS
To the Board of Directors of :
Gracechurch Card Funding (No.1) PLC
We have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Gracechurch Card Funding
(No.1) PLC (a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales) as of
30 September, 1999. This financial statement is the responsibility of that
company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on this
financial statement based on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan
and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the balance
sheet is free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test
basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the balance sheet. An
audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant
estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial
statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis
for our opinion.
In our opinion, the balance sheet referred to above presents fairly, in
all material respects, the financial position as of Gracechurch Card Funding
(No.1) PLC as of 30 September, 1999, in conformity with generally accepted
accounting principles in the United States of America.
/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors
London, England
20 October, 1999
A-1
<PAGE>
Appendix B
Gracechurch Card Funding (No.1) PLC
BALANCE SHEET-AS OF 30 SEPTEMBER, 1999
ASSETS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C> <C>
Cash........................................ L 12,502
==============
Common stock (authorised, 50,000 shares,
L1.00 par value, Issued and outstanding,
50,000 shares comprising 2 fully paid and
49,998 quarter paid)......................... (4) L 12,502
--------------
Total liabilities and shareholder's equity.. L 12,502
==============
</TABLE>
The accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement.
B-1
<PAGE>
Appendix C
Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENT
30 September, 1999
1. Accounting policies
The balance sheet has been prepared in accordance with the historical cost
convention.
2. Nature of Operations
The Company was incorporated in England and Wales on 24 June, 1999. The
principal purpose of the Company is, among other things, to issue asset backed
floating rate notes and enter into all financial arrangements in that
connection.
3. Trading activity
The Company did not trade during the period from incorporation on 24 June,
1999 to 30 September, 1999 nor did it receive any income nor did it incur any
expenses or pay any dividends. Consequently, no profit and loss account has
been prepared.
4. Share capital
The Company was incorporated with an authorised share capital of L50,000,
comprising 50,000 Ordinary shares of L1 each. Two Ordinary Shares were allotted
for cash, and fully paid, on incorporation. On 10 September, 1999, 49,998
Ordinary Shares were allotted quarter paid.
C-1
<PAGE>
Barclaycard Funding PLC
BALANCE SHEET
AS OF 30 SEPTEMBER, 1999
TOGETHER WITH AUDITORS' REPORT
<PAGE>
Appendix D
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS
To the Board of Directors of
Barclaycard Funding PLC:
We have audited the accompanying balance sheet of Barclaycard Funding PLC
(a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales) as of 30 September,
1999. This financial statement is the responsibility of that company's
management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on this financial
statement based on our audit. We conducted our audit in accordance with
generally accepted auditing standards in the United States of America. Those
standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable
assurance about whether the balance sheet is free of material misstatement. An
audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and
disclosures in the balance sheet. An audit also includes assessing the
accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well
as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our
audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion. In our opinion, the balance
sheet referred to above presents fairly, in all material respects, the financial
position of Barclaycard Funding PLC as of 30 September, 1999, in conformity with
generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America.
PricewaterhouseCoopers
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors
London, England
14 October, 1999
D-1
<PAGE>
Appendix E
Barclaycard Funding PLC
BALANCE SHEET -- AS OF 30 SEPTEMBER 1999
ASSETS
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C>
Debtors:
Balance with Barclays Bank PLC L2
==============
</TABLE>
SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
<S> <C>
Common stock (authorized, 100 shares of L1 each,
Issued and outstanding, two shares of L1 each) L2
--------------
Total liabilities and shareholders' equity L2
==============
</TABLE>
The accompanying notes are an integral part of this document.
E-1
<PAGE>
Appendix F
Barclaycard Funding PLC
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENT
30 SEPTEMBER 1999
1. Accounting policies
The balance sheet has been prepared in accordance with the historical cost
convention.
2. Nature of Operations
The Company was incorporated in England and Wales on 13 August, 1990. The
principal purpose of the Company is, among other things, to issue asset backed
medium term notes and enter into all financial arrangements in that connection.
3. Trading activity
The Company did not trade during the period from incorporation on 13
August, 1990 to 30 September, 1999 nor did it receive any income nor did it
incur any expenses or pay any dividends. Consequently, no profit and loss
account has been prepared.
4. Share capital
The Company was incorporated with an authorised share capital of L2,
comprising two Ordinary shares of L1 each. Issued share capital comprises two
Ordinary shares which were allotted for cash, and fully paid, on incorporation.
5. Subsequent Events
On 8 October, 1999, the Company passed special resolutions to re-register
as a public company and that the name of the Company be changed to from
Exshelfco (BDC) Limited to Barclaycard Funding PLC.
On 8 October, 1999, the Company passed ordinary resolutions to convert the
existing share capital of 100 ordinary shares of L1 to A ordinary shares of L1
each and to increase the authorised share capital to L50,000 by the creation of
37,400 A ordinary shares of L1 each and 12,500 B ordinary shares of L1 each.
F-1
<PAGE>
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gracechurch Card Funding (No. 1) PLC
Issuer
Barclays Bank PLC
Transferor, Servicer and Trust Cash Manager
$900,000,000 Class A Floating Rate Asset-Backed Notes
$50,000,000 Class B Floating Rate Asset-Backed Notes
----------
Prospectus
----------
Underwriters of the Class A Notes
Barclays Capital
Credit Suisse First Boston Deutsche Banc Alex. Brown
Morgan Stanley Dean Witter Salomon Smith Barney
Underwriter of the Class B Notes
Barclays Capital
You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus. We
have not authorised anyone to provide you with different information.
We are not offering the offered notes where the offer is not permitted.
Dealers will deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters of the
offered notes and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions. In
addition, all dealers selling the offered notes may be required to deliver a
prospectus until 7 February, 2000.
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
